Mercedes Benz 2010 PDF

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 1
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1
R-Class
Operator’s Manual
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 2
Symbols
Trademarks®:
RAdBlue® is a registered trademark of the
German Association of the Automotive
Industry (VDA).
RBabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered
trademarks of Daimler.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks
of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in

damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you

may find useful.
X This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
YY This continuation symbol marks a
warning or procedure which is
continued on the next page.
Display Text in displays, such as the control
system, are printed in the type
shown here.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 1
Our company and staff congratulate you on

the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and will provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
2515843082 É2515843082_ËÍ
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 2
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 3
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25
Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety and security ............................. 35
Controls in detail ................................. 69
Operation ........................................... 219
Practical hints ................................... 269
Technical data ................................... 343

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 4
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Front passenger front air bag off

indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 307
115V AC Socket ................................. 206 Messages in the multifunction
3-zone automatic climate control display ........................................... 277
see Climate control system OCS (Occupant Classification
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System) ... 65 System ............................................. 42
4MATIC Safety guidelines ............................. 39
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Side impact ...................................... 40
Window curtain ................................ 41
A Air conditioning refrigerant and
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 63 lubricant ............................................. 352
Indicator lamp ................................ 300 Air distribution .......................... 168, 177
Messages in the multifunction Air filter .............................................. 294
display ................................... 275, 286 AIRMATIC
Accessory weight .............................. 248 ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 153
Accidents ........................................... 113 Introduction ................................... 153
Air bags ........................................... 37 Messages in the multifunction
Distance warning function ............. 152 display ........................................... 287
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 209 Vehicle level control ...................... 154
NECK-PRO active front head AIRMATIC/Compass menu ............... 129
restraints ........................................ 53 Air pressure
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps see Tire inflation pressure
Messages in the multifunction Air pressure (tires) ............................ 249
display ........................................... 295 Air pump (electric) ............................ 328
see Headlamps Air recirculation mode .............. 169, 179
Adaptive Damping System Air volume ................................. 168, 178
see ADS Alarm system
AdBlue® ...................................... 331, 354 see Anti-theft systems
Capacity, AdBlue® tank ................. 351 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool
Refilling ......................................... 332 kit) .............................................. 270, 327
Additives All-wheel drive (4MATIC) .................. 156
Engine oil ....................................... 352 Alternator
Gasoline ......................................... 354 Messages in the multifunction
Address change ................................... 22 display ................................... 282, 292
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ..... 153 Alternator (Technical data)
Advanced Tire Pressure see Vehicle specification
Monitoring System (Advanced Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 356
TPMS) ................................................. 232 Antilock Brake System
Messages in the multifunction see ABS
display ................................... 283, 298 Anti-theft systems ............................... 67
Air bags ................................................ 37 Anti-theft alarm system ................... 67
Emergency call upon deployment . . 209 Immobilizer ...................................... 67
Front, driver and passenger ............. 40 Aquaplaning
Front passenger front air bag off see Hydroplaning
indicator lamp (Canada Armrest, front
only) ........................................ 45, 307 Storage compartment .................... 198
Telephone tray ............................... 198
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 5
Index 5
Armrest, rear Battery, Vehicle ................................. 333

Storage compartment .................... 199 Charging ........................................ 335
Ashtrays ............................................. 204 Jump starting ................................. 336
Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 249 Messages in the multifunction
Audio/DVD menu .............................. 128 display ................................... 282, 292
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 94 Bead (tire) .......................................... 249
Automatic central locking .......... 74, 137 Beverage holders
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 98 see Cup holders
Automatic interior lighting control .. 102 Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
Automatic locking when driving ...... 137 engine) ............................................... 331
Automatic shift program .................. 120 BlueTEC
Automatic transmission ................... 115 AdBlue® tank ................................. 331
Automatic shift program ................ 120 AdBlue® tank capacity ................... 351
Emergency operation (limp-home Brake fluid
mode) ............................................ 121 Checking level ............................... 227
Gear range indicator ...................... 120 Messages in the multifunction
Gear ranges ................................... 119 display ........................................... 286
Gear selector lever ........................ 116 Brake lamps
Hill-start assist system .................. 153 Cleaning lenses ............................. 265
Kickdown ....................................... 119 Brake pads
One-touch gearshifting .................. 120 Messages in the multifunction
Program mode indicator ................ 120 display ........................................... 285
Program mode selector switch Brakes ................................................ 253
(automatic shift program) .............. 120 Parking brake ........................ 114, 255
Shifting procedure ......................... 118 Warning lamp ................................. 301
Steering wheel gearshift control .... 121 Break-in period .................................. 220
Towing a trailer .............................. 119 Bug cover (Radiator) ......................... 224
Transmission position indicator ..... 118 Bulbs
Transmission positions .................. 118 see Replacing bulbs
AUX socket ........................................ 198
Axle oils .............................................. 351 C
B CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 23

California retail buyers and
BabySmart™ lessees, important notice for ............. 21
Air bag deactivation system ............. 45 Calls (phone) ...................................... 140
Self-test ........................................... 47 Can holders
Backrest see Cup holders
see Seats Capacities and recommended
Backup lamps fuel/lubricants .................................. 350
Messages in the multifunction Cargo compartment
display ........................................... 295 Cargo net ....................................... 196
Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 249 Cargo volume, expanding .............. 189
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64 Cover blind .................................... 194
Batteries, SmartKey Fuse box ........................................ 342
Checking condition .......................... 73 Hooks ............................................ 189
Replacing ....................................... 310 Tie-down rings ............................... 188
Cargo compartment cover blind ...... 194
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 6
6 Index
Cargo net ........................................... 196 Clock ............................................ 28, 133

Cargo tie-down rings ......................... 188 Cockpit ................................................. 27
Carpets, cleaning .............................. 267 Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 249
Central locking Collapsible tire (spare wheel) .......... 350
Automatic ................................ 74, 137 Collapsible wheel chock ................... 272
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 COMAND system
Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 74 see separate COMAND system
SmartKey ......................................... 70 operating instructions
Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 74 Combination switch .......................... 100
Certification label .............................. 344 Comfort submenu
Children in the vehicle Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 137
Air bags ........................................... 37 Fold-in function for exterior rear
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation view mirrors ................................... 138
system ............................................. 45 Seat belt adjustment feature ......... 138
Child safety locks (rear doors) ......... 61 Compass
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type .... 60 Calling up ....................................... 216
Indicator lamp, front passenger Control system .................................. 123
front air bag off (Canada only) ......... 45 Multifunction display ..................... 125
Indicator lamp, front passenger Multifunction steering wheel ......... 123
front air bag off (USA only) .............. 42 Resetting to factory settings .......... 131
Infant and child restraint systems .... 55 Control system menus ...................... 126
OCS (Occupant Classification AIRMATIC/Compass ...................... 129
System) ........................................... 42 Audio/DVD .................................... 128
Override switch ................................ 62 Distronic ........................................ 129
Safety notes ..................................... 55 Navigation ..................................... 129
Tether anchorage points .................. 57 Settings ......................................... 130
Top tether ........................................ 57 Standard display ............................ 126
Child safety Telephone ...................................... 140
see Children in the vehicle Trip computer ................................ 139
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Vehicle status message memory ... 130
see Children in the vehicle Control system submenus
Chrome-plated exhaust tip, Comfort ......................................... 137
cleaning .............................................. 268 Instrument cluster ......................... 132
Cigarette lighter ................................ 205 Lighting .......................................... 134
Climate control system .................... 162 Time/Date ..................................... 133
3-zone automatic climate control . . 170 Vehicle ........................................... 137
Air conditioning ..................... 167, 175 Coolant
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 352 Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 356
Air distribution ....................... 168, 177 Capacities ...................................... 351
Air recirculation mode ........... 169, 179 Checking level ............................... 225
Air volume ............................. 168, 178 Messages in the multifunction
Automatic mode .................... 167, 176 display ........................................... 290
Climate control .............................. 164 Corner-illuminating front fog
Deactivating system .............. 166, 175 lamps .................................................. 101
Front defroster ...................... 168, 178 Cruise control .................................... 142
Residual heat and Activating ....................................... 143
ventilation .............................. 170, 180 Canceling ....................................... 143
Temperature .......................... 168, 176
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 7
Index 7
Changing the set speed ................. 144 Messages in the multifunction

Last stored speed .......................... 144 display ........................................... 274
Lever .............................................. 143 Multifunction display ..................... 125
Messages in the mutlifunction Outside temperature ............. 127, 133
display ........................................... 280 Symbol messages .......................... 285
Resume function ............................ 144 Text messages ............................... 275
Setting current speed .................... 143 Trip computer ................................ 139
Cup holders ........................................ 201 Vehicle status message memory ... 130
Curb weight ....................................... 249 Vehicle system settings ................. 130
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 23 Distronic ............................................ 145
Customer Relations Department ....... 23 Cleaning system sensor cover ....... 265
Control system .............................. 129
D Distance warning function ............. 152
Distance warning
Dashboard lamp ...................................... 147, 304
see Instrument cluster Driving with .................................... 151
Data recording ..................................... 23 Menu ............................................. 147
Date, Setting ...................................... 134 Messages in the multifunction
Daytime running lamp mode .............. 99 display ........................................... 280
Switching on or off ......................... 134 Resume function ............................ 150
Deep water Sensor cover .................................. 265
see Standing water Speed settings ............................... 149
Defroster Door control panel .............................. 33
Rear window .................................. 180 Door handles ........................................ 33
Windshield ............................. 168, 178 Doors
Delayed shut-off Child safety locks ............................ 61
Exterior lamps ................................ 135 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ... 71
Interior lighting .............................. 136 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70
Department of Transportation Messages in the multifunction
see DOT display ........................................... 289
Diesel engine Opening from inside ......................... 74
Preglow indicator lamp .................... 29 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 212
Diesel fuel Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 308
see Fuel DOT (Department of
Difficulties Transportation) .................................. 249
While driving .................................. 113 Drinking and driving ......................... 253
With starting .................................. 111 Driving
Digital clock Abroad ........................................... 259
see Clock Hydroplaning ................................. 255
Digital speedometer ......................... 127 Instructions ........................... 110, 253
Dimensions (vehicle) In winter ........................................ 252
see Vehicle specification Problems ....................................... 113
Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 240 Safety systems ................................ 63
Displays Systems ......................................... 142
Digital speedometer ...................... 127 Through standing water ................. 256
Distronic ........................................ 146 With Distronic ................................ 151
Maintenance service indicator ....... 261 Driving and parking
Safety notes .................................. 110
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 8
8 Index
Driving off .................................. 112, 255 Emission control ............................... 260

Driving safety systems ....................... 63 Information label ............................ 345
4-ETS ............................................... 65 System warranties ........................... 20
ABS .................................................. 63 Engine
BAS .................................................. 64 Break-in recommendations ............ 220
EBP .................................................. 64 Cleaning ......................................... 264
ESP® ................................................ 65 Compartment ................................ 222
Driving systems Malfunction indicator
AIRMATIC ...................................... 153 lamp ........................................ 29, 305
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) ................ 156 Messages in the multifunction
Cruise control ................................ 142 display ........................................... 290
Distronic ........................................ 145 Number .......................................... 345
Hill-start assist system .................. 153 Starting .......................................... 110
Parktronic system .......................... 156 Turning off ..................................... 114
Rear view camera .......................... 159 Engine (Technical data)
Driving tips, automatic see Vehicle specification
transmission ...................................... 119 Engine compartment
Radiator ......................................... 224
E Engine coolant
see Coolant
Easy-entry/exit feature .............. 92, 137 Engine oil
EBP (Electronic Brake Adding ........................................... 225
Proportioning) ...................................... 64 Additives ........................................ 352
Electrical system Checking level ............................... 224
Improper work on or Consumption ................................. 224
modifications ................................... 22 Messages in the multifunction
Power outlets ................................. 206 display ........................................... 293
Electrical system (Technical data) Oil dipstick ..................................... 224
see Vehicle specification Recommended engine oils and oil
Electronic Stability Program filter ............................................... 352
see ESP® ESP® (Electronic Stability
Electronic Traction System Program) .............................................. 65
see 4-ETS 4-ETS ............................................... 65
Emergency, in case of Messages in the multifunction
First aid kit ..................................... 270 display ................................... 275, 286
Flat tire .......................................... 319 Trailer stabilization ........................... 66
Hazard warning flasher .................. 101 Warning lamp ................................. 303
Roadside Assistance ................ 21, 210 ETD (Emergency Tensioning
Towing the vehicle ......................... 338 Device) ................................................. 52
Emergency calls Safety guidelines ............................. 39
Tele Aid .......................................... 209 Express operation
Emergency engine shutdown ........... 342 Panorama roof ............................... 184
Emergency operations Power windows .............................. 106
Limp-home mode ........................... 121 Tilt/sliding sunroof ........................ 181
Remote door unlock ...................... 212 Exterior lamp switch ........................... 97
Emergency Tensioning Device Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 94
see ETD Fold-in function .............................. 138
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 9
Index 9
Parking position ............................... 95 Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 351

Power folding ................................... 95 Diesel fuel ............................. 351, 353
Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 26 Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 253
Fuel consumption statistics ........... 139
F Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 221
Fuel tank reserve warning
Fastening the seat belts ..................... 49
lamp ........................................ 29, 305
First aid kit ......................................... 270 Premium unleaded gasoline ... 351, 353
Flat tire ............................................... 319 Refueling ........................................ 220
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 329 Requirements ................................ 353
Mounting the spare wheel ............. 324 Fuel filler flap ..................................... 221
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 320 Opening manually .......................... 309
Spare wheel ........................... 319, 350 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 320 Capacities ...................................... 350
Floormats ........................................... 217 Fuel system, bleeding (diesel
Fluids engine) ............................................... 331
AdBlue® ......................................... 351 Fuel tank
Automatic transmission fluid ......... 350 Capacity ........................................ 351
Brake fluid ..................................... 351 Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 221
Capacities ...................................... 350 Refueling ........................................ 220
Engine coolant ............................... 351 Fuses .................................................. 340
Engine oil ....................................... 350
Power steering fluid ....................... 351
G
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ........................................... 351 Garage door opener .................... 32, 213
Fog lamps ............................................. 99 Gasoline
Messages in the multifunction see Fuel
display ................................... 295, 296 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 249
Fold-in function for exterior rear Gear range ......................................... 119
view mirrors ...................................... 138 Indicator ........................................ 120
Four-wheel drive Limiting .......................................... 121
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Shifting into optimal ...................... 121
Front air bags Gear selector lever ............................ 116
see Air bags Cleaning ......................................... 267
Front axle oil ...................................... 351 Gearshift pattern ........................... 116
Front lamps Shifting procedure ......................... 118
see Headlamps Transmission position indicator ..... 118
Front passenger front air bag ............ 40 Transmission positions .................. 118
Messages in the multifunction Generator
display ........................................... 277 see Alternator
Front passenger front air bag off Global locking/unlocking
indicator lamp (Canada only) ..... 45, 307 see Key, SmartKey
Front passenger front air bag off Glove box ........................................... 198
indicator lamp (USA only) .......... 42, 307 Gross Axle Weight Rating
Front seat head restraints see GAWR
see Head restraints Gross Trailer Weight
Fuel ............................................. 220, 353 see GTW
Additives ........................................ 354
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 10
10 Index
Gross Vehicle Weight Hood ................................................... 222

see GVW Messages in the multifunction
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating display ........................................... 288
see GVWR Hooks ................................................. 189
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) .............. 249 Horn ...................................................... 27
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 249 HVAC
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight see Climate control system
Rating) ................................................ 249 Hydroplaning ..................................... 255
H I
Halogen headlamps Identification labels .......................... 344
see Headlamps Identification number, vehicle
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 267 (VIN) ................................................... 345
Hazard warning flasher .................... 101 Ignition ................................... 79, 80, 111
Headlamp cleaning system .............. 101 Immobilizer .......................................... 67
Headlamps Indicator lamps
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 97 see Lamps, indicator and warning
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 98 Infant and child restraint systems
Bi-Xenon .................................. 97, 313 see Children in the vehicle
Cleaning lenses ............................. 265 Inflation pressure
Cleaning system ............................ 101 see Tires, Inflation pressure
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 99 Infrared reflecting windshield ......... 217
Delayed shut-off ............................ 135 Inside door handle .............................. 74
Halogen ......................................... 313 Instrument cluster ...................... 28, 122
High-beam flasher ......................... 101 Illumination .................................... 123
High-beam headlamps ................... 100 Lamps ............................................ 299
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 98 Multifunction display ..................... 125
Replacing bulbs ............................. 312 Instrument lighting
Switch .............................................. 97 see Instrument cluster, Illumination
Headliner, cleaning and care of ....... 267 Instrument panel
Head restraints .................................... 81 see Instrument cluster
Adjustment ................................ 81, 83 Instruments and controls
NECK-PRO active front head see Cockpit
restraints ......................................... 53 Interior lighting
NECK-PRO active front head Delayed shut-off ............................ 136
restraints, resetting ....................... 310 Emergency lighting ........................ 103
Heated steering wheel ........................ 93 Front .............................................. 102
Height adjustment Front reading lamps ....................... 102
Seat belt outlet ................................ 50 Rear ............................................... 103
Seats ............................................... 81 Rear reading lamps ........................ 103
Vehicle level control ...................... 154 Interior rear view mirror ..................... 94
High-beam flasher ............................. 101 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 94
High-beam headlamps .............. 100, 313 Interior storage spaces
Indicator lamp .................................. 29 see Storage compartments
Hill-start assist system ..................... 153 Intermittent wiping
Hinged quarter windows .................. 107 Rain sensor .................................... 104
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 11
Index 11
J Tire and Loading Information

placard ........................................... 236
Jack ..................................................... 272 Tire inflation pressure .................... 230
Jump starting ..................................... 336 Lamps, exterior
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 97
K Front .............................................. 313
Key, Mechanical Messages in the multifunction
Loss of ............................................. 73 display ........................................... 295
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 308 Rear ............................................... 313
Key, SmartKey Switching on/off .............................. 97
Battery check lamp .......................... 73 Lamps, indicator and warning
Checking batteries ........................... 73 ABS .......................................... 28, 300
Factory setting ........................... 71, 72 Brakes ..................................... 28, 301
Global locking (KEYLESS- Distance warning
GO) .................................................. 73 lamp ........................ 28, 147, 152, 304
Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 71 Engine malfunction .................. 29, 305
Global unlocking (KEYLESS- ESP® ........................................ 28, 303
GO) ............................................ 72, 73 Fog lamps ........................................ 99
Global unlocking Front passenger front air bag off
(SmartKey) ....................................... 71 (Canada only) .......................... 45, 307
Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ..... 72 Front passenger front air bag off
Locking/unlocking ........................... 70 (USA only) ................................ 42, 307
Loss of ............................................. 73 Fuel tank reserve ..................... 29, 305
Messages in the multifunction High-beam headlamps ............. 29, 100
display ........................................... 289 Instrument cluster ................... 28, 299
Opening and closing the power Low-beam headlamps ................ 29, 98
tilt/sliding sunroof or the Low tire pressure/TPMS
panorama roof ............................... 108 malfunction telltale .................. 28, 306
Opening and closing the windows . 108 Seat belt telltale ................ 29, 51, 302
Remote control ................................ 70 SRS .................................... 29, 36, 303
Replacing batteries ........................ 310 Turn signals ..................................... 28
Restoring to factory setting ....... 71, 73 Language, selecting .......................... 133
Selective setting ........................ 71, 73 LATCH-type child seat anchors
Starter switch positions ................... 79 see Children in the vehicle
KEYLESS-GO License plate lamps
Starter switch positions ................... 80 Messages in the multifunction
Kickdown ........................................... 119 display ........................................... 296
Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 249 Replacing bulbs ............................. 314
Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 267
L Lighter
see Cigarette lighter
Labels Lighting ................................................ 97
Certification ................................... 344 Daytime running lamp mode ............ 99
Emission control information ......... 345 Exterior ............................................ 97
Interior ........................................... 102
Limp-home mode .............................. 121
Load index (tires) ...................... 245, 249
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 12
12 Index
Loading MOExtended system ......................... 330

see Vehicle loading MOExtended tires ..................... 330, 347
Locator lighting ................................. 135 MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 353
Lock button Motor Octane Number
Outside door handle (KEYLESS- see MON
GO) .................................................. 73 Multicontour seat ................................ 90
Locking the vehicle Multifunction display ........................ 125
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 Symbol messages .......................... 285
Manually ........................................ 309 Text messages ............................... 275
SmartKey ......................................... 70 Vehicle status messages ............... 274
Loss of Multifunction display messages
Key .................................................. 73 ABS ....................................... 275, 286
Service and Warranty Information Active headlamps .......................... 295
booklet .......................................... 344 Advanced TPMS ..................... 283, 298
Low-beam headlamps ......................... 98 Air bags ......................................... 277
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 97 Air filter .......................................... 294
Switching on .................................... 98 AIRMATIC ...................................... 287
Lubricants .......................................... 350 Alternator .............................. 282, 292
Lumbar support ................................... 86 Automatic
transmission .................................. 282
M Battery ................................... 282, 292
Brake fluid ..................................... 286
Maintenance ........................................ 21
Brake pads ..................................... 285
Maintenance System Coolant .......................................... 290
Service indicator display ................ 262 Corner-illuminating front fog
Service indicator message ............. 261 lamps ............................................. 297
Service term exceeded .................. 261 Cruise control ................................ 280
Manual headlamp mode (Low- Distronic ........................................ 280
beam headlamps) ................................ 98 Doors ............................................. 289
Maximum engine speed EBP ................................................ 286
see Vehicle specification Engine oil ....................................... 293
Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 250
ESP® ...................................... 275, 286
Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 249
Fog lamps .............................. 295, 296
Maximum permissible tire
Front passenger front air bag ........ 277
inflation pressure .............................. 250
Gas cap .......................................... 294
Mechanical key .................................. 308 High-beam lamps ........................... 296
Media interface ................................. 198 Hood .............................................. 288
Memory function ................................. 96 License plate lamps ....................... 296
Menus Light sensor ................................... 296
see Control system menus Low-beam lamps ............................ 296
Mirrors .................................................. 93 Parking brake ................................ 286
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 94 Parking lamps ................................ 296
Exterior rear view mirror parking PRE-SAFE® .................................... 276
position ............................................ 95 Reserve fuel ................................... 293
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 94 Reverse lamp ................................. 295
Interior rear view mirror ................... 94 Side marker lamps ......................... 295
Memory function .............................. 96 SmartKey ....................................... 289
Vanity mirror .................................. 203
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 13
Index 13
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO .......... 289 Child seat anchors – LATCH-type .... 60
SRS ................................................ 287 Fastening the seat belts ................... 49
Tailgate .......................................... 288 Front passenger front air bag off
Tail lamps ...................................... 297 indicator lamp (Canada
Tele Aid .......................................... 287 only) ........................................ 45, 307
Tire inflation pressure ............ 283, 298 Front passenger front air bag off
Tire pressure monitor .................... 283 indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 307
Tires ...................................... 283, 298 Infant and child restraint systems .... 55
Trailer brake lamps ........................ 297 Introduction ..................................... 36
Trailer tail lamps ............................ 297 OCS (Occupant Classification
Trailer turn signal lamps ................ 297 System) ........................................... 42
Turn signals ................................... 298 PRE-SAFE® ....................................... 52
Washer fluid ................................... 290 Seat belts .................................. 39, 47
Multifunction steering wheel OCS (Occupant Classification
Adjustment ...................................... 91 System) ................................................ 42
Buttons .......................................... 123 Self-test ........................................... 45
Cleaning ......................................... 267 Odometer ........................................... 125
Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 92, 137 Oil, oil level
Gearshift control ............................ 121 see Engine oil
Heating ............................................ 93 On-board computer
Memory function .............................. 96 see Control system
Overview .......................................... 30 One-touch gearshifting ..................... 120
Operating safety .................................. 22
N Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 265
Navigation menu ............................... 129 Outside temperature
Navigation system see Displays
see Separate operating instructions Overhead control panel ...................... 32
NECK-PRO active front head
restraints ............................................. 53 P
Resetting ....................................... 310 Paintwork, cleaning .......................... 264
Nets, parcel ....................................... 188 Paintwork code ................................. 345
Night security illumination .............. 135 Panic alarm .......................................... 62
Normal occupant weight .................. 250 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Number, vehicle identification sliding panel ...................................... 184
(VIN) ................................................... 345 Cleaning ......................................... 266
Operation ....................................... 184
O Roller sunblinds ............................. 184
Occupant Classification System Synchronizing ................................ 186
see OCS (Occupant Classification Parcel nets ......................................... 188
System) Parking ............................................... 114
Occupant distribution ....................... 250 Parktronic system .......................... 156
Occupant safety Parking brake ............................ 114, 255
Air bags ........................................... 37 Messages in the multifunction
BabySmart™ .................................... 45 display ........................................... 286
Children and air bags ....................... 37 Parking position
Children in the vehicle ..................... 55 Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 95
Transmission position .................... 118
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 14
14 Index
Parktronic system PRE-SAFE® ............................................ 52

Cleaning system sensors ............... 265 Messages in the multifunction
Malfunction .................................... 159 display ........................................... 276
Minimum distance ......................... 158 Problems
Sensor range ................................. 157 While driving .................................. 113
Switching on/off ........................... 159 With vehicle ..................................... 23
System sensors ............................. 157 Product information ............................ 20
Warning indicators ................... 27, 158 Production options weight ............... 250
Parts service ...................................... 344 Program mode selector switch
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Automatic shift program ................ 120
(Canada only) Proximity key
see Front passenger front air bag see Key, SmartKey
off indicator lamp (Canada only) PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 250
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
(USA only) R
see Front passenger front air bag
off indicator lamp (USA only) Radiator ..................................... 224, 251
Passenger safety Radio
see Occupant safety Selecting stations .......................... 128
Pedals ................................................. 253 Radio transmitters ............................ 260
Phone Rain sensor
see Telephone see Intermittent wiping
Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 267 Rear axle oil ....................................... 351
Power assistance .............................. 253 Rear center console .......................... 200
Power outlets .................................... 206 Rear doors
Power seats Child safety locks ............................ 61
see Seats Rear door window
Power tailgate Override switch ................................ 62
Closing ............................................. 76 Rear fog lamp
Messages in the multifunction see Fog lamps
display ........................................... 288 Rear lamps
Opening ........................................... 76 see Tail lamps
Power tilt/sliding sunroof Rear seat ashtray
Operation ....................................... 181 see Ashtrays
Synchronizing ................................ 183 Rear seats
Power washer .................................... 263 see Seats
Power windows ................................. 106 Rear view camera .............................. 159
Cleaning ......................................... 266 Cleaning the camera lens .............. 266
Door windows ................................ 107 Rear window defroster ..................... 180
Hinged quarter windows ................ 107 Rear window wiper/washer ............. 105
Operation ....................................... 106 Recommended tire inflation
Rear door window, override pressure ..................................... 228, 250
switch .............................................. 62 Refilling
Synchronizing ................................ 107 AdBlue® ......................................... 332
Practical hints ................................... 270 Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 352
Preglow indicator lamp .............. 29, 111 Refueling ............................................ 220
Regular checks .................................. 222
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 15
Index 15
Reminder, Seat belt Seats ..................................................... 81

see Seat belts, Telltale Adjustment ...................................... 81
Remote control Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 92
see Key, SmartKey Folding (expanding cargo volume) . 189
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 212 Heating ............................................ 91
Replacing bulbs ................................. 312 Memory function .............................. 96
Reporting safety defects .................... 23 Multicontour seat ............................ 90
Research Octane Number Rear seats ........................................ 86
see RON Ventilation ....................................... 90
Reserve fuel Securing cargo
Messages in the multifunction Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 188
display ........................................... 293 Selective setting
Warning lamp ................................... 29 see Key, SmartKey
Reset button ................................ 28, 122 Selector lever
Reset tool (NECK-PRO active front see Gear selector lever
head restraints) ................................. 310 Self-test
Restraint systems BabySmart™ .................................... 47
see Occupant safety OCS (Occupant Classification
Rims ........................................... 250, 347 System) ........................................... 45
Roadside Assistance ................... 21, 210 Tele Aid .......................................... 208
Roller sunblinds ................................. 184 Service
RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 353 see Maintenance
Roof rack ............................................ 187 Service, parts .................................... 344
Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 267 Service and warranty information ..... 20
Run-flat tires Service intervals
see MOExtended tires see Maintenance System, Service
indicator message
S Service life (tires) .............................. 241
Settings
Safety Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ......... 72
Driving safety systems ..................... 63 Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 71
Occupant safety ............................... 36 Memory function .............................. 96
Reporting defects ............................ 23 Menu ............................................. 130
Safety belts Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 73
see Seat belts Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 71
Seat belt force limiter ......................... 52 Side impact air bags ........................... 40
Seat belts ............................................. 47 Side marker lamps
Adjustment function ........................ 51 Cleaning lenses ............................. 265
Children in the vehicle ..................... 55 Messages in the multifunction
Cleaning ......................................... 267 display ........................................... 295
Fastening ......................................... 49 Sidewall (tires) .................................. 250
Height adjustment ........................... 50 Side windows
Proper use of ................................... 48 see Power windows
Safety guidelines ............................. 39 SmartKey
Safety notes ..................................... 47 see Key, SmartKey
Telltale ..................................... 29, 302 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
Seat heating ......................................... 91 see Key, SmartKey
Seating capacity ................................ 237
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 16
16 Index
Snow chains ...................................... 252 Opening ........................................... 75

Snow tires Power tailgate .................................. 76
see Winter tires Tail lamps ........................................... 313
Spare wheel ....................................... 347 Cleaning lenses ............................. 265
Mounting ....................................... 324 Messages in the multifunction
Storage location ............................ 272 display ........................................... 297
Speedometer ............................... 28, 146 Tar stains ........................................... 263
Speed settings Technical data
Cruise control ................................ 143 Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 352
Distronic ........................................ 149 Brake fluid ..................................... 352
Resume function ................... 144, 150 Capacities fuels, coolants,
SRS lubricants etc. ................................ 350
Indicator lamp ................... 29, 36, 303 Coolant .......................................... 355
Messages in the multifunction Engine oil additives ........................ 352
display ........................................... 287 Engine oils ..................................... 352
Standing water, driving through ...... 256 Fuel requirements .......................... 353
Starter switch positions Gasoline additives .......................... 354
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 80 Identification labels ....................... 344
SmartKey ......................................... 79 Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 353
Starting difficulties (engine) ............ 111 Rims and tires ................................ 347
Starting the engine ........................... 110 Spare wheel ................................... 350
Steering column Vehicle specification R 350 ........... 346
see Multifunction steering wheel, Vehicle specification
Adjustment R 350 BlueTEC ............................... 346
Steering wheel Washer and headlamp cleaning
see Multifunction steering wheel system ................................... 351, 357
Steering wheel gearshift control ..... 121 Technical data (dimensions)
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 212 see Vehicle specification
Storage compartments ..................... 197 Technical data (electrical system)
Storing tires ....................................... 242 see Vehicle specification
Stranded vehicle ............................... 340 Technical data (engine)
Sunroof see Vehicle specification
see Power tilt/sliding sunroof Technical data (weights)
Sunshade see Vehicle specification
Rear door window .......................... 204 Tele Aid ............................................... 207
Sun visors .......................................... 203 Emergency calls ............................. 209
Suspension tuning Information button ......................... 210
see AIRMATIC Initiating an emergency call
manually ........................................ 209
T Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 287
Tachometer .................................. 29, 123 Remote door unlock ...................... 212
Overspeed range ........................... 123 Roadside Assistance button .......... 210
Tailgate Search & Send ............................... 212
Closing ............................................. 75 SOS button .................................... 209
Messages in the multifunction Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services .. 212
display ........................................... 288 System self-test ............................. 208
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 17
Index 17
Telephone ............................................. 30 Information placard ....................... 236

Answering/ending a call ................ 141 Inspection ...................................... 241
Hands-free microphone ................... 33 Labeling ......................................... 244
Menu ............................................. 140 Load index ............................. 245, 249
Operation ....................................... 140 Load rating .................................... 249
Phone book .................................... 141 Messages in the multifunction
Redialing ........................................ 142 display ................................... 283, 298
Temperature MOExtended .................................. 347
Interior temperature .............. 168, 176 Ply composition and material
Outside .................................. 127, 133 used ............................................... 250
Tether anchorage points Problems under-/overinflation ...... 230
see Children in the vehicle Retreads ........................................ 227
Tie-down rings ................................... 188 Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 347
Tightening torque Rotation ......................................... 243
Wheels ........................................... 330 Service life ..................................... 241
Time setting ....................................... 133 Sizes .............................................. 347
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 250 Snow chains .................................. 252
Tire and Loading Information Speed rating .......................... 246, 250
placard ............................................... 236 Storing ........................................... 242
Tire and loading terminology ........... 248 Temperature .......................... 229, 243
TIREFIT ............................................... 320 Terminology ................................... 248
Tire Identification Number TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 320
see TIN Tire Identification Number ............. 250
Tire inflation pressure Tire pressure loss warning system . 231
Checking ........................................ 230 TPMS low tire pressure/
Important notes on ........................ 229 malfunction telltale ........................ 306
Label on the inside of fuel filler Traction ................................. 242, 250
flap ................................................ 230 Tread ............................................. 251
Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 236 Tread depth ........................... 241, 251
Tire labeling ....................................... 244 Treadwear ...................................... 242
Tire load rating .................................. 249 Treadwear indicators ............. 241, 251
Tire ply composition and material Vehicle maximum load on .............. 251
used .................................................... 250 Wear pattern .................................. 243
Tire pressure loss warning system . 231 Winter tires ............................ 251, 347
Tire repair kit Tire speed rating ....................... 246, 250
see TIREFIT Tongue Weight Rating
Tires ........................................... 227, 347 see TWR
Advanced Tire Pressure Top tether
Monitoring System (Advanced see Children in the vehicle
TPMS) ............................................ 232 Total load limit ................................... 250
Air pressure ................................... 228 Towing
Care and maintenance ................... 241 Towing eye bolt .............................. 338
Cleaning ......................................... 242 Trailer .................................... 119, 256
Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 240 Vehicle ........................................... 338
Important notes on tire inflation Towing eye bolt ................................. 338
pressure ........................................ 229 Traction ...................................... 242, 250
Inflation pressure ........................... 230 Trailer towing ............................ 119, 256
Coupling a trailer ........................... 257
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 18
18 Index
Decoupling ..................................... 259 V

Electrical connections .................... 256
Towing ........................................... 258 Vehicle
Trailer hitch ................................... 256 Battery ........................................... 333
Weights and ratings ....................... 256 Care ............................................... 262
Transfer case ..................................... 122 Control system .............................. 123
Transmission Identification Number (VIN) ........... 344
see Automatic transmission Locking/unlocking ........................... 70
Transmission fluid level .................... 225 Lowering (wheel change) ............... 329
Transmission gear selector lever Modifications and alterations,
see Gear selector lever Operating safety .............................. 22
Transmission positions .................... 118 Towing ........................................... 338
Traveling abroad ............................... 259 Unlocking/locking manually .......... 308
Tread (tires) ....................................... 251 Vehicle dimensions
Tread depth (tires) .................... 241, 251 see Vehicle specification
Vehicle Identification Number
Treadwear .......................................... 242
(VIN) ................................................... 344
Treadwear indicators (tires) .... 241, 251
Vehicle jack
Trip computer menu ......................... 139
see Jack
Trip odometer, resetting ................... 123
Vehicle level control
Turning off the engine ...................... 114
see AIRMATIC
Turn signals ....................................... 100
Vehicle lighting .................................... 97
Cleaning lenses ............................. 265
Vehicle loading
Indicator lamps ................................ 28
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 188
Messages in the multifunction
Cargo volume, expanding .............. 189
display ........................................... 298
Instructions .................................... 186
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) ........... 251
Load limit ....................................... 237
Roof rack ....................................... 187
U
Terminology ................................... 248
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 251
Standards .................................. 242, 251 Vehicle specification
Units R 350 ............................................. 346
Selecting digital speedometer R 350 BlueTEC ............................... 346
display mode ................................. 132 Vehicle status message memory .... 130
Selecting speedometer/ Vehicle tool kit .................................. 270
odometer display mode ................. 132 Vehicle washing
Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 353 see Vehicle care
Unlocking the vehicle Vehicle weights
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 see Vehicle specification
Manually ........................................ 308
SmartKey ......................................... 70 W
Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 268
Warning lamps
Useful features .................................. 201
see Lamps, Indicator and warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function ............. 152
Distronic ........................................ 147
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 51
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 19
Index 19
Parking brake ................................ 286

Parktronic system .......................... 159
Seat belt telltale ............................ 302
Warranty coverage ............................ 344
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ................................................ 357
Washer fluid
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 290
Mixing ratio .................................... 357
Refilling .......................................... 226
Washing the vehicle .......................... 262
Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 243
Weights (vehicle)
see Vehicle specification
Wheel
Changing ....................................... 319
Removing ....................................... 327
Spare ............................................. 319
Tightening torque ........................... 330
Wheels, sizes ..................................... 347
Wheels, Tires and .............................. 227
Window curtain air bags ..................... 41
Windows
see Power windows
Windows, cleaning ............................ 266
Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades .................... 266
Infrared reflecting .......................... 217
Washer fluid ................................... 357
Wipers ........................................... 104
Windshield wipers
Replacing wiper blades .................. 317
Winter cover .............................. 224, 251
Winter driving
Instructions .................................... 252
Radiator cover ............................... 251
Snow chains .................................. 252
Tires ............................................... 251
Winter tires ................................ 251, 347
Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 268
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 20
20 Introduction
Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

product and ask for your understanding that
Please observe the following in your own best we reserve the right to make changes in
interest: design and equipment. Therefore,
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- information, illustrations, and descriptions in
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle.
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
Vehicle equipment
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your vehicle may have some or all of the
We are unable to make an assessment for equipment described in this manual.
other products and therefore cannot be held Therefore, you may find explanations for
responsible for them, even if in individual optional equipment not installed in your
cases an official approval or authorization by vehicle. If you have any questions about
governmental or other agencies should exist. operating particular equipment, any
Use of such parts and accessories could authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
adversely affect the safety, performance or to demonstrate the proper procedures.
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use Optional equipment is also described in this
them. manual, including operating instructions
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- wherever necessary. Since they are special-
approved conversion parts and accessories order items, the descriptions and illustrations
are available at any authorized Mercedes- herein may vary slightly from the actual
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive equipment of your vehicle.
comprehensive information on permissible If there are any equipment details that are not
technical modifications and expert shown or described in this Operator’s
installations. Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
Notes with the vehicle.
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the Service and warranty information
vehicle before driving. The Service and Warranty Information
For your own safety and longer service life of booklet contains detailed information about
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
instructions and warnings contained in this including:
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage REmission System Warranty
caused by failure to follow instructions is not REmission Performance Warranty
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Warranty.
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 21
Introduction 21
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Written notification should not be sent to a
Control System Warranty1 dealer, it should be addressed to
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Laws) Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles Maintenance
Under California law you may be entitled to a The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the necessary maintenance work which should
purchase price or lease price, if after a be performed at regular intervals.
reasonable number of repair attempts Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its you when you take the vehicle to an
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
one or more substantial defects or service. The service advisor will record each
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered service in the booklet for you.
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles Roadside Assistance
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
reasonable number of repair attempts is Program provides factory-trained technical
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
more of the following occurs: toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
(1) the same substantial defect or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect Customer Assistance Representatives
or malfunction has been subject to repair 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
two or more times, and you have directly Roadside Assistance will be provided in
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in accordance with standard program
writing of the need for its repair, guidelines which include providing service to
(2) the same substantial defect or the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from
malfunction of a less serious nature than a paved roadway. We will make every effort
category (1) has been subject to repair to assist in a breakdown situation, however,
four or more times and you have directly the accessibility of your vehicle will be
notified us in writing of the need for its determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz
repair, or Center technician or the tow service provider
on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
in our ability to respond.
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative Additional charges may be applicable for a
total of more than 30 calendar days. breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as
1 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 22
22 Introduction
determined by our authorized technician and Operating safety

tow service provider.
For additional information refer to the G Warning!
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Work improperly carried out on electronic
Program brochure (in the USA) or the components and associated software could
Roadside Assistance section of the Service cause them to cease functioning. Because the
and Warranty Information Booklet (in vehicle’s electronic components are
Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio. interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
Change of address or ownership seriously impair the operating safety of your
If you change your address, be sure to send vehicle.
in the “Change of Address Notice” found in Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
the Service and Warranty Information for repairs or modifications to electronic
Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz components.
Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at Other improper work or modifications on the
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service vehicle could also have a negative impact on
(in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will the operating safety of the vehicle.
assist us in contacting you in a timely manner
Some safety systems only function while the
should the need arise.
engine is running. You should therefore never
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all turn off the engine while driving.
literature with the vehicle to make it available
to the next operator. G Warning!
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used tires/wheels may cause serious damage and
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes- Such blows can be caused, for example, by
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the running over an obstacle, road debris or a
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer pothole. If you feel a sudden significant
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect
that damage to your vehicle as occurred:
Rturn on your hazard warning flashers
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada Rslow down carefully
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that: distance from the road
RService facilities or replacement parts may Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
not be readily available. wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
RUnleaded gasoline for vehicles with authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
catalytic converters may not be available; qualified maintenance or repair facility for
the use of leaded fuels will damage the further inspection or repairs.
catalysts.
RGasoline may have a considerably lower
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause
engine damage.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 23
Introduction 23
Proper use of the vehicle Reporting safety defects

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
For the USA only:
familiar with the following information and
rules: The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Rthe safety precautions in this manual Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
Rtraffic rules and regulations of 1966”.
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
Reporting safety defects
G Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
vehicle. These warning labels are intended to which could cause a crash or could cause
make you and others aware of various risks. injury or death, you should immediately
Do not remove any of these warning labels inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
unless explicitly instructed to do so by Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
information on the label itself. Removing notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
warning labels may cause you and others to If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
be unaware of certain risks which may result open an investigation, and if it finds that a
in an accident and/or personal injury. safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Problems with your vehicle individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If you should experience a problem with your To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
affect its safe operation, we urge you to (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center www.safercar.gov; or write to:
immediately to have the problem diagnosed Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
and corrected if required. If the matter is not 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss Washington, DC 20590.
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center You can also obtain other information about
management or, if necessary, contact us at motor vehicle safety from
one of the following addresses: www.safercar.gov.
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Vehicle data recording
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Information regarding electronic
recording devices
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department (Including notice pursuant to California Code
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. § 9951)
98 Vanderhoof Avenue Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 24
24 Introduction
This information helps, for example, to

diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
share it with others
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
Please check the Tele Aid subscription
service agreement for details regarding the
information that may be recorded or
transmitted via that system.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 25
25
Exterior view ....................................... 26

Cockpit ................................................. 27
Instrument cluster .............................. 28
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 30
Center console .................................... 31
Overhead control panel ...................... 32
Door control panel .............................. 33
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 26
26 Exterior view
Exterior view
At a glance
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page
: Rear lamps 312 Wiper blades, cleaning 266
; Fuel filler flap 220

D Hood 222
= Exterior rear view mirrors 94

E Front lamps 312
? Power tilt/sliding sunroof 181

F Headlamp cleaning system 101
Panorama roof with power G Front towing eye 338
tilt/sliding panel 184
H Tires and wheels 227
A Windshield: Rims and tires 347
Wiping with washer fluid 105
I Rear towing eye 338
Cleaning 266
J Rear window wiper/washer 105
B Doors:
Wiper blade, replacing 317
Locking and unlocking 70
Wiper blade, cleaning 266
Locking and unlocking
manually 308 K Tailgate 75
C Wipers 103 Power tailgate 76
Wiper blades, replacing 317 L Rear window defroster 180
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 27
Cockpit 27
Cockpit
At a glance
: Cruise control lever: I Starter switch 79
Cruise control 142 J Steering wheel adjustment,
Distronic 145 manual 91
; Instrument cluster 28, K Steering wheel adjustment,
122 electrical 91
= Multifunction steering 30, Heated steering wheel 93
wheel 123 L On-board diagnostics
? Horn (OBD) socket
A Steering wheel gearshift M Hood lock release 222
control 121 N Parking brake release 114
B Gear selector lever 116 O Parking brake pedal 114
C Front Parktronic warning P Door control panel 33
indicators 158
Q Exterior lamp switch 97
D Overhead control panel 32
R Combination switch:
E Glove box lid release, glove
box lock 198 Turn signals 100
Wipers 103
F Glove box 197 High beam 100
G Center console 31
H Power outlet 205
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 28
28 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: # Left turn signal $ Brake warning lamp,
indicator lamp USA only 301
d ESP® warning lamp 303
; To dim instrument cluster
· Distance warning
illumination 123
lamp3 304
= Reset button for: J Brake warning lamp,
Trip odometer 123 Canada only 301
Settings 131 h Combination low tire
? To brighten instrument pressure/TPMS
cluster illumination 123 malfunction telltale, USA 232,
only 306
A ! Right turn signal
indicator lamp
B Clock 133
C Speedometer with:
! Antilock Brake
System (ABS) indicator
lamp 300
È Variable speed limiter
indicator lamp2
2 Lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.
3 Vehicles without Distronic: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should
go out when the engine is running.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 29
Instrument cluster 29
At a glance
D Multifunction display with: 8 Fuel filler flap
indicator: The fuel filler flap
Trip odometer 125
is located on the rear right-
Main odometer 125 hand side.
E Tachometer with: G Multifunction display with:
7 Seat belt telltale 51, Outside temperature
302 indicator or digital
% Preglow indicator speedometer (depending
lamp, diesel engine only 111 on selected setting in the
+ Supplemental control system) 127
Restraint System (SRS) 36, Transmission position
indicator lamp 303 indicator 118
L Low-beam headlamp Gear range indicator 120
indicator lamp 98 Automatic transmission
; Engine malfunction program mode indicator 120
indicator lamp, Canada only 305 Distance warning function 138,
! Engine malfunction indicator 152
indicator lamp, USA only 305 Rear window wiper
K High-beam headlamp indicator 105
indicator lamp 100
F Fuel gauge with:
Fuel tank reserve warning
lamp 305
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 30
30 Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel Function Page

= Press button V or U
At a glance
to select next/previous
menu. 123
Press button & or *
briefly:
to move within a menu
to select previous or next
track, scene or stored
station within Audio/DVD
menu 128
to switch to the phone book
and select a name or
number within Telephone
menu 140
Press and hold button
& or *:
Function Page track with quick search or
: Multifunction display 125 station in station list or
; Press button 6: wave band within Audio/
DVD menu 128
to answer a call 140
to start the quick search in
to dial4 140 the phone book within
to redial4 140 Telephone menu 140
Press button ~: Press button A to turn
to end a call 140 the Voice Control System
to reject an incoming call 140 off5, see separate operating
Press button W or X: instructions.
to select submenus in the
Settings menu 131
to set values
to set the volume
Press button ? to turn
the Voice Control System
on5, see separate operating
instructions.
4 Function only available in telephone menu.

5 Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 31
Center console 31
Center console Function Page

Upper part D Hazard warning flasher
At a glance
switch 101
E Alarm system indicator
lamp 68
F Parktronic system
deactivation switch 159
G Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch 65
H Seat ventilation, driver’s
side 90
I Seat heating, driver’s side 91
J Adaptive Damping System
(ADS) switch 153
Function Page
: COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
; Climate control system 162
Rear window defroster 180
= Seat heating, front
passenger side 91
? Seat ventilation, front
passenger side 90
A Vehicle level control switch 154
B Program mode selector
switch for automatic
transmission 120
C Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp (USA 42,
only) 307
Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp 45,
(Canada only) 307
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 32
32 Overhead control panel
Lower part Overhead control panel

At a glance

: Storage compartment 198 : Left front reading lamp on/
off 102
; Ashtray with storage
compartment 204 ; Automatic interior lighting 102
Cigarette lighter 205 = Rear interior lighting on/off 102
= Cup holder 201 ? Front interior lighting on/
? Front armrest storage off 102
compartment/telephone A Right reading lamp on/off 102
tray 198
B Front right interior lamp 102
A Removable card/ticket
holder, bottle opener 201 C Power tilt/sliding sunroof
switch 181
Power tilt/sliding panel
switch 184
D SOS button (Tele Aid
system) 209
E Interior rear view mirror 94
F Reading lamps 102
G Garage door opener 213
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 33
Door control panel 33
Function Page Door control panel

H Hands-free microphone for
At a glance
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone, and
Voice Control System, see
separate operating
instructions
I Front left interior lamp 102
Function Page
: Inside door handle 74
; Central locking/unlocking
switch 74
= Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment 94
? Selection buttons for
exterior rear view mirror
adjustment 94
Power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors 95
A Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door
windows 106
B Rear door window override
switch 62
C Hinged quarter window
switch 106
D Remote tailgate release
switch, power tailgate 78
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 34
34
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 35
35
Vehicle equipment .............................. 36

Occupant safety .................................. 36
Panic alarm .......................................... 62
Driving safety systems ....................... 63
Anti-theft systems .............................. 67
Safety and security

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 36
36 Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment G Warning!

Modifications to or work improperly
i This Operator’s Manual describes all conducted on restraint system components
features, standard or optional, potentially or their wiring, as well as tampering with
available for your vehicle at the time of interconnected electronic systems, can lead
Safety and security
purchase. Please be aware that your to the restraint systems no longer functioning
vehicle might not be equipped with all as intended.
features described in this manual. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
Occupant safety although the deceleration threshold for air
Introduction bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
In this section you will learn the most tamper with electronic components or their
important facts about the restraint system software.
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are: i See “Children in the vehicle”
RSeat belts (Y page 55) for information on
Rinfants and children traveling with you in
RChild restraints
the vehicle
RLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Rrestraint systems for infants and children
(LATCH)
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with SRS indicator lamp
- Air bags The SRS system conducts a self-test when
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
seat belts
The SRS indicator lamp + in the
- Seat belt force limiter instrument cluster comes on when the
RNECK-PRO active front head restraints ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the engine has been
RPreventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE®) started.
RAir bag system components with The SRS components are in operational
- Front passenger front air bag off readiness when the SRS indicator lamp
indicator lamp + is not lit while the engine is running.
- USA only: Front passenger seat with A malfunction in the system has been
Occupant Classification System (OCS) detected if the SRS indicator lamp +
Rfails to go out after approximately
- Canada only: Front passenger seat with
4 seconds after the engine was started
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
Rdoes not come on at all
Although the systems are independent, their
Rcomes on after the engine was started or
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other. while driving
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 37
Occupant safety 37
G Warning! Deployment of the air bags temporarily

The SRS self-check has detected a releases a small amount of dust from the air
malfunction when the SRS indicator lamp bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful
+: to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some
Rdoes not come on at all
Safety and security

temporary breathing difficulty for people with
Rdoes not go out after 4 seconds after the asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
engine was started this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
Rcomes on while driving soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
For your safety, we strongly recommend that vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz air by opening a window or door.
Center immediately to have the system
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be G Warning!
activated when needed in an accident, which To reduce the risk of injury when the front air
could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS bags inflate, it is very important for the driver
might also deploy unexpectedly and and front passenger to always be in a properly
unnecessarily which could also result in injury seated position and to wear their respective
as well. seat belt.
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates For maximum protection in the event of a
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or collision always be in normal seated position
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work with your back against the seat backrest.
on the SRS must therefore only be performed Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
by qualified technicians. Contact an properly positioned on your body.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system speed and force, a proper seating position
to accommodate a person with disabilities, and correct positioning of the hands on the
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
(1-800-367-6372) for details. properly or are too close to the air bag can be
seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
Air bags RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
G Warning! position that is as upright as possible with

Air bags are designed to reduce the potential your back against the seat backrest.
of injury and fatality in certain RMove the driver’s seat as far back as
Rfrontal impacts (front air bags) possible, still permitting proper operation
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
Rside impacts (side impact air bags and center of the driver’s chest to the center of
window curtain air bags) the air bag cover on the steering wheel
Rrollovers (window curtain air bags) must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
However, no system available today can You should be able to accomplish this by
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 38
38 Occupant safety
you have any difficulties, please contact an There is a possibility for a side impact air bag-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. related injury if occupants, especially
RDo not lean your head or chest close to the children, are not properly seated or restrained
steering wheel or dashboard. when next to a side impact air bag which
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
Safety and security
order to do its job.

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
the rim can increase the risk and potential
follow these guidelines:
severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
front air bag inflates. (1) Always sit as upright as possible,
wear the seat belt properly, and for
RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as
children 12 years old and under,
possible rearward from the dashboard
use an appropriately sized infant
when the seat is occupied.
restraint, toddler restraint, or
ROccupants, especially children, should booster seat recommended for the
never place their bodies or lean their heads size and weight of the child.
in the area of the door where the side (2) Always wear seat belts properly.
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the side Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as Rfrontal impacts (front air bags)
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized Rside impacts (side impact and window
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or curtain air bags) which exceed preset
booster seat recommended for the size and deployment thresholds
weight of the child. Rrollovers (window curtain air bags)
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and Only in the event of such a situation will they
under must never ride in the front seat, provide their supplemental protection.
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized The driver and passengers should always
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
operates with the BabySmart™ air bag possible for the air bags to provide their
deactivation system installed in the vehicle supplemental protection.
to deactivate the front passenger front air
In case of other types of impacts and impacts
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
below air bag deployment thresholds, air
they will be struck by the air bag when it
bags will not deploy. The driver and
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
passengers will then be protected to the
or fatal injury will result.
extent possible by a properly fastened seat
Failure to follow these instructions can result belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. needed to provide the best possible
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you protection in a rollover.
make the buyer aware of this safety Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
information. Be sure to give the buyer this Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
Operator’s Manual. whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
air bags.
G Warning!
It is important to your safety and that of your
Accident research shows that the safest place passengers to have deployed air bags
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. replaced and to have any malfunctioning air
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 39
Occupant safety 39
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the cover, outboard sides of the seat
air bags will continue to provide supplemental backrests, door trim panels, or door frame
crash protection for occupants. trims.
RDo not install additional electrical/
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, electronic equipment on or near SRS
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
Safety and security

components and wiring.
and air bag
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
G Warning! free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have umbrellas, etc.).
been subjected to stress in an accident RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
must be replaced. Their anchoring points from the coat hooks or handles over the
must also be checked. Only use seat belts door. These items may be thrown around in
installed or supplied by an authorized the vehicle and cause head and other
Mercedes-Benz Center. injuries when the window curtain air bag is
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency deployed.
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain RAir bag system components will be hot after
perchlorate material, which may require an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
special handling and regard for the
RNever place your feet on the instrument
environment. Check with your local
government’s disposal guidelines. panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
California residents, see keep both feet on the floor in front of the
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ seat.
Perchlorate/index.cfm. RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD causing unintended air bag deployment.
that has deployed must be replaced. PRE- Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
SAFE® has electrically operated reversible
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
pre-tensioners in addition to the
Center.
pyrotechnic ETDs.
RFor your protection and the protection of
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
They could tear.
ETD, our safety instructions must be
RDo not make any modification that could followed. These instructions are available
change the effectiveness of the seat belts. from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may Center.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
not be able to provide adequate protection. required inflation volume, and the material
RNo modifications of any kind may be made of the air bags, there is the possibility of
to any components or wiring of the SRS. abrasions or other, potentially more serious
RDo no change or remove any component or
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
part of the SRS. If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
RDo not install additional trim material, seat recommend that you inform the subsequent
covers, badges, etc. over the steering owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag Also refer them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 40
40 Occupant safety
Front air bags stage inflation of the front passenger front air
bag.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37. The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system’s preset
deployment thresholds. You will then be
Safety and security
protected by the fastened seat belts.

The front air bags will not deploy in the event
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The front passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if
Driver’s front air bag : and front passenger Rvehicles with OCS, USA only: the system,
front air bag ; are designed to provide based on OCS weight sensor readings,
increased protection for the driver and front detects that the front passenger seat is
passenger against the risk of injuries to the occupied
head and thorax. Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the
Driver and front passenger front air bags are center console is not lit
deployed (USA only: (Y page 42),
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts Canada only: (Y page 45))
Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold threshold
Rif the system determines that air bag ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deployment can offer additional protection deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
to that provided by the seat belt place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
Rdepending on whether the respective seat the front passenger seat. This could cause
belt is in use the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
Rindependently of the side impact air bags exceeds the system’s deployment
and/or the window curtain air bags threshold.
The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows Side impact air bags
the air bags to have different rates of inflation.
The rate of inflation is based on the vehicle G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
deceleration rate as assessed by the air bag G Warning!
control unit. The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The front control are located in the doors. Do not
passenger front air bag deployment is modify any components of the doors or door
additionally influenced by the passenger’s trim panels including, for example, the
weight category as identified by the Occupant addition of door speakers.
Classification System (OCS) (Y page 42). Improper repair work on the doors or the
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The lighter the modification or addition of components to the
front passenger-side occupant, the higher the doors create a risk of rendering the side
vehicle deceleration rate required for second
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 41
Occupant safety 41
impact air bags inoperative or causing deceleration or acceleration exceeds the

unintended air bag deployment. Work on the preset deployment threshold for the side air
doors must therefore only be performed by bags.
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
Mercedes-Benz Center. deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
Safety and security

place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
G Warning!
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
Front side impact air bags : and rear side the side impact air bags. Contact an
impact air bags ; are designed to provide authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
increased protection for the thorax but not availability.
the head, neck and arms.
The side impact air bags are deployed Window curtain air bags
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
Rin side impacts exceeding a preset
deployment threshold
Rregardless of whether the seat belts on the
impacted side of the vehicle are in use
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
Vehicles with OCS (USA only): The front
passenger side impact air bag will not deploy
if the OCS senses that the front passenger
seat is empty and the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened. With the front passenger Window curtain air bags : are designed to
seat empty and the seat belt fastened, the provide increased protection for the head but
front passenger side impact air bag will not the chest or arms.
deploy independently of the empty seat. Window curtain air bags : are deployed
Whether a seat belt is recognized as fastened
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
depends on whether or not the latch plate is
properly inserted into the buckle. Rin side impacts exceeding a preset
The side impact air bags are not deployed in deployment threshold
side impacts which do not exceed the Rindependently of the front air bags
system’s deployment threshold. Rregardless of whether the front passenger
The side air bags will not deploy in the event seat is occupied
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of lateral
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 42
42 Occupant safety
Rregardless of whether the seat belt on the objects applying pressure to the back of the
impacted side of the vehicle is in use seat. Always make sure the seat has
Rin certain vehicle rollovers, if the system clearance in all directions at all times.
determines that air bag deployment can If your seat, including the trim cover and
offer additional protection to that provided cushion, needs to be serviced in any way, take
Safety and security
by the seat belt the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.
Window curtain air bags : are not deployed
Only seat accessories approved by
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
deployment threshold.
Both the driver and the front passenger
Window curtain air bags : deploy in the area
should always use the 42
indicated by the arrows.
indicator lamp as an indication of whether or
not the front passenger is properly
positioned.
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is G Warning!
standard equipment in USA. If the 42 indicator lamp
The OCS activates or deactivates the front illuminates when an adult or someone larger
passenger front air bag automatically. The than a small individual is in the front
respective status is based on the classified passenger seat, have the front passenger
occupant weight category determined by reposition himself or herself in the seat until
weight sensor readings from the front the 42 indicator lamp goes out,
passenger seat. or check whether objects are caught under or
around the seat.
The system does not deactivate
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
Rthe front passenger side impact air bag unit will not allow front passenger front air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag deployment when the OCS has classified the
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) front passenger seat occupant as weighting
as much as or less than a typical 12-month-
To be classified correctly, the front passenger old child in a standard child restraint or if the
must sit front passenger seat is classified as being
Rwith the seat belt properly fastened empty.
Rin a position that is as upright as possible When the OCS senses that the front
with the back against the seat backrest passenger seat occupant is classified as
being up to or less than the weight of a typical
Rwith the feet on the floor 12-month-old child in a standard child
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to restraint, the 42 indicator lamp
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning will illuminate when the engine is started and
on armrests), the OCS may not be able to remain illuminated, indicating that the front
properly approximate the occupant’s weight passenger front air bag is deactivated.
category. When the OCS senses that the front
Furthermore, the occupant weight may passenger seat is classified as being empty,
appear to increase or decrease due to the the 42 indicator lamp will
following: objects hanging on the seat, lodged illuminate when the engine is started and
underneath the seat, stuffed between the remain illuminated, indicating that the front
seat and middle console or the seat and door, passenger front air bag is deactivated.
other passengers pushing on the seat, or
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 43
Occupant safety 43
When the OCS senses that the front For more information on air bag display
passenger seat occupant is classified as messages in the multifunction display, see
being heavier than the weight of a typical (Y page 277).
12-month-old child seated in a standard child
G Warning!
restraint or as being a small individual (such
According to accident statistics, children are
Safety and security

as a young teenager or a small adult), the
safer when properly restrained in the rear
42 indicator lamp will illuminate
seating positions than in the front seating
for approximately 6 seconds when the engine
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
is started and then, depending on occupant
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
weight sensor readings from the seat, remain
possible. Regardless of seating position,
illuminated or go out. With the
children 12 years old and under must be
42 indicator lamp illuminated,
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
the front passenger front air bag is
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
deactivated. With the 42
seat recommended for the size and weight of
indicator lamp out, the front passenger front
the child.
air bag is activated.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
When the OCS senses that the front
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
passenger seat occupant is classified as an
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
adult or someone larger than a small
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
individual, the 42 indicator lamp
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
Occupants, especially children, should always
when the engine is started and then go out,
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
indicating that the front passenger front air
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
bag is activated.
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
If the 42 indicator lamp is recommended for the size and weight of the
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag child.
is deactivated and will not be deployed.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
If the 42 indicator lamp is not an inflating air bag. Note the following
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag important information when circumstances
is activated and will be deployed require you to place a child in the front
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts passenger seat:
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
threshold technology designed to deactivate the front
Rindependently
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
of the side impact air bags
when the system senses the weight of a
If the front passenger front air bag is typical 12-month-old child or less along
deployed, the rate of inflation will be with the weight of a standard appropriate
influenced by child restraint on the front passenger seat.
Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
assessed by the air bag control unit front passenger seat will be seriously
Rthe front passenger’s weight category as injured or even killed if the front passenger
identified by the OCS front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 44
44 Occupant safety
completely eliminate this risk is to never where the system suppresses deployment
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint of the front passenger front air bag even
in the front seat. We therefore strongly though the impact met the criteria and was
recommend that you always place a child of sufficient severity to deploy the driver
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. front air bag
Safety and security
RIf you must install a rear-facing child Rthat the seat was occupied by a small
restraint on the front passenger seat individual (such as a young teenager or a
because circumstances require you to do small adult) or a child who weighs more
so, make sure the 42 than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating child in a standard child restraint – both of
that the front passenger front air bag is which are instances where the system may
deactivated. Should the 42 suppress deployment of the front
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while passenger front air bag even though the
the restraint is installed, please check impact met the criteria and was of
installation. Periodically check the sufficient severity to deploy the driver front
42 indicator lamp while air bag
driving to make sure the 42
indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
42 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
The 42 indicator lamp : will be
facing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, illuminated, except with the SmartKey
use the proper child restraint removed from the starter switch or with the
recommended for the age, size and weight starter switch in position 0.
of the child, and secure child restraint with G Warning!
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child If the red SRS indicator lamp + in the
seat manufacturer’s instructions. For instrument cluster and the 42
children larger than the typical 12-month-
indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there
old child, the front passenger front air bag
is a malfunction in the OCS. The front
may or may not be activated.
passenger front air bag will be deactivated in
Deployment of the driver front air bag does this case. Have the system checked as soon
not mean that the front passenger front air as possible by qualified technicians. Contact
bag also should have deployed. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The OCS may have determined Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint – both of which are instances
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 45
Occupant safety 45
In order to ensure proper operation of the air empty, the 42 indicator lamp
bag system and OCS: will illuminate and not go out.
RDo not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into G Warning!
the parcel net on the back of the front If the 42 indicator lamp does not
passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS may illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
Safety and security

not be able to properly approximate the must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
occupant weight category. Center before seating any child on the front
RDo not place objects under and/or around passenger seat.
the front passenger seat.
For more information, see the “Practical
RDo not hang anything from or attach any hints” section (Y page 307).
items to the seats.
G Warning!
RDo not stuff objects such as books between
Never place anything between seat cushion
the front passenger seat and the center
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
console or front passenger door.
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom and
RDo not move the front passenger seat back of the child seat must make full contact
backwards against stiff objects. with the passenger seat cushion and
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a backrest.
position that is as upright as possible with If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger
your back against the seat backrest. seat backrest.
RWhile seated, an occupant should not An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
position him/herself in such a way as to injuries to the child in case of an accident,
cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted instead of increasing protection for the child.
from the seat bottom as this may result in Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
the OCS being unable to correctly installation of child seats.
approximate the occupant’s weight
category.
RRead and observe all warnings in this BabySmart™ air bag deactivation
chapter. system
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
OCS Self-test is standard equipment in Canada.
After turning the SmartKey in the starter G Warning!
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the According to accident statistics, children are
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or safer when properly restrained in the rear
twice, the 42 indicator lamp seating positions than in the front seating
illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
sitting on the front passenger seat and the children be placed in the rear seats whenever
system classifies the occupant as an adult, possible. Regardless of seating position,
the 42 indicator lamp will children 12 years old and under must be
illuminate and go out after approximately seated and properly secured in an appropriate
6 seconds. infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
If the seat is not occupied and the system seat recommended for the size and weight of
classifies the front passenger seat as being the child.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 46
46 Occupant safety
The infant or child restraint must be properly Should the 42 indicator lamp
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat not illuminate or go out while the restraint
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and is installed, please check installation.
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the Periodically check the 42
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. indicator lamp while driving to make sure
Safety and security
Occupants, especially children, should always the 42 indicator lamp is

sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt illuminated. If the 42 indicator
properly and use an appropriately sized infant lamp goes out or remains out, do not
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat transport a child on the front passenger
recommended for the size and weight of the seat until the system has been repaired.
child. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Children can be killed or seriously injured by front passenger seat will be seriously
an inflating air bag. Note the following injured or even killed if the front passenger
important information when circumstances front air bag inflates.
require you to place a child in the front RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
passenger seat: facing child restraint on the front passenger
RChildren 12 years old and under must never seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes- use the proper child restraint
Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatible recommended for the age, size and weight
child seat, which operates with the of the child, and secure child restraint with
BabySmart™ system installed in the vehicle the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
to deactivate the front passenger front air seat manufacturer’s instructions.
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
they will be struck by the air bag when it G Warning!
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious When using a BabySmart™ compatible child
or fatal injury will result. seat on the front passenger seat, the front
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the passenger front air bag will not deploy only if
front passenger seat will be seriously the 42 indicator lamp remains
injured or even killed if the front passenger illuminated.
front air bag inflates in a collision which Please be sure to check the 42
could occur under some circumstances, indicator lamp every time you use a
even with the air bag technology installed BabySmart™ compatible child seat on the
in your vehicle. The only means to front passenger seat. Should the
completely eliminate this risk is to never 42 indicator lamp go out while
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint the restraint is installed, please check
in the front seat. We therefore strongly installation. If the 42 indicator
recommend that you always place a child lamp remains out, do not use the
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. BabySmart™ restraint to transport a child on
RIf you must install a BabySmart™ the front passenger seat until the system has
compatible rear-facing child restraint on been repaired.
the front passenger seat because
circumstances require you to do so, make
sure the 42 indicator lamp is
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 47
Occupant safety 47
G Warning!
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile
phones, electronic tags such as those used in
ski passes and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such
Safety and security

devices may interfere with the BabySmart™
air bag deactivation system. Such signal
interference may cause the 42
indicator lamp not to come on during self-test.
The SRS indicator lamp + and/or the
42 indicator lamp could be
Special BabySmart™ compatible child seats,
continuously lit, indicating that the system is
designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz
not functioning. The front passenger front air
system, are required for use with the
bag could deploy inadvertently or fail to
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.
deploy in an accident.
Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information on availability. With G Warning!
the special child seat installed properly, the
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
front passenger front air bag will not deploy.
will ONLY work with a special child seat
The 42 indicator lamp : will be designed to operate with it. It will not work
illuminated, except with the SmartKey with child seats which are not BabySmart™
removed from the starter switch or with the compatible.
starter switch in position 0.
Never place anything between seat cushion
The system does not deactivate and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
Rthe side impact air bag the effectiveness off the BabySmart™ air bag
Rthe
deactivation system. The bottom of the child
window curtain air bag
seat must make full contact with the front
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
mounted child seat could cause injuries to the
Self-test BabySmart™ without special child in case of an accident, instead of
child seat installed protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
installation of special child seats.
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
twice, the 42 indicator lamp
comes on for approximately 6 seconds and Seat belts
then goes out. Safety notes
If the 42 indicator lamp should
not come on or is continuously lit, the system The use of seat belts and infant and child
is not functioning. You must see an restraint systems is required by law in all 50
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.
seating any child on the front passenger seat. territories and all Canadian provinces.
More information can be found in the Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
“Practical hints” section (Y page 307). occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 48
48 Occupant safety
For information on infants and children G Warning!

traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
systems for infants and children, see been subjected to stress in an accident must
“Children in the vehicle” (Y page 55). be replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoring
G Warning! points must be checked.
Safety and security
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Only use seat belts which have been approved
Always make sure all of your passengers are by Mercedes-Benz.
properly restrained. You and your passengers Do not make any modifications to the seat
should always wear seat belts. belts. This can lead to unintended activation
Failure to wear and properly fasten and of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when
position your seat belt greatly increases your necessary.
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
accident. severely weaken them. In a crash they may
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can not be able to provide adequate protection.
be considerably more severe without your Have all work carried out only by qualified
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat technicians. Contact an authorized
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit Mercedes-Benz Center.
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
it. You can be seriously injured or killed. Proper use of seat belts
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing G Warning!
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
as intended if the occupants are properly RSeat belts can only protect when used
wearing their seat belts. properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
way than as described in this section, as
G Warning!
that could result in serious injuries in case
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat of an accident.
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
REach occupant should wear their seat belt
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under at all times, because seat belts help reduce
it, the seat belt would apply force at the the likelihood of and potential severity of
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and The integrated restraint system includes
seat belt provide the best restraint when the SRS (driver front air bag, front passenger
wearer is in a position that is as upright as front air bag, side impact air bags, window
possible and the seat belt is properly curtain air bags for door windows),
positioned on the body. Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs),
seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee
G Warning! bolsters.
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than The system is designed to enhance the
there are seat belts available. Make sure protection offered to properly belted
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly occupants in certain frontal (front air bags
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags,
use a seat belt for more than one person at a window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts
time. which exceed preset deployment
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 49
Occupant safety 49
thresholds and in certain rollovers (window RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
curtain air bags and ETDs). as upright as possible.
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. sure it is properly positioned.
In a frontal crash, your body would move RNever place your feet on the instrument
Safety and security

too far forward. That would increase the panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat keep both feet on the floor in front of the
belt would also apply too much force to the seat.
ribs or abdomen, which could severely
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
injure internal organs such as your liver or
spleen. restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
manufacturer’s instructions.
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder G Warning!
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
this purpose, you can adjust the height of could tear.
the seat belt outlet. Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
RPosition
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
the lap belt as low as possible on
This could damage the seat belt.
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your Never attempt to make modifications to seat
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
a crash. the seat belts.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing, Fastening the seat belts
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as G Warning!
these might cause injuries.
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted safer when properly restrained in the rear
snugly. Take special care of this when seating positions than in the front seating
wearing loose clothing. position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
RNever use a seat belt for more than one children be placed in the rear seats whenever
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt possible. Regardless of seating position,
around a person and another person or children 12 years old and under must be
other objects at the same time. seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
crash, you would not have the full width of
the size and weight of the child. For additional
the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
The twisted seat belt against your body
could cause injuries. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
RPregnant women should also always use a are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion or the child is not properly secured in the child
should be positioned as low as possible on restraint.
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 50
50 Occupant safety
G Warning! X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the

Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag correct height (Y page 50).
deactivation system, Canada only: Children X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
12 years old and under must never ride in the snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
Safety and security
authorized BabySmart™ compatible child belt have special seat belt retractors to
seat, which operates with the BabySmart™ secure child restraints properly. For more
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate information on special seat belt retractors,
the front passenger front air bag when it is see “Infant and child restraint system”
installed properly. Otherwise they will be (Y page 55).
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a To release the seat belt with seat belt release
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury button ?, see (Y page 51).
will result.
Seat belt outlet height adjustment
X Raising: Slide seat belt outlet height

adjuster ; upward.
Seat belt outlet height adjuster ; engages
in various positions.
X Lowering: Press and hold release
button :.
X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out X Slide seat belt outlet height adjuster ;
of seat belt outlet :. downward.
X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt X Release button : and make sure seat belt
across the top of your shoulder and the lap outlet height adjuster ; engages into
portion across your hips. place.
X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it
clicks.
Seat belt adjustment function: The seat
belts on both front seats adjust to the
upper body automatically as necessary
(Y page 51).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 51
Occupant safety 51
Seat belt adjustment function 6 seconds to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt adjustment function adjusts the
seat belts on both front seats to the upper If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when
body of the respective vehicle occupant. The the engine is started, an additional warning
seat belt will be pulled slightly tighter for that chime will sound. The warning chime goes out
Safety and security

purpose when after approximately 6 seconds or once the
driver’s seat belt is fastened.
Ryou engage the latch plate into the buckle
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
and then turn the SmartKey in the starter
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
switch to position 2
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with
Rthe SmartKey in the starter switch is in front doors closed,
position 2 and you then engage the latch Rthe seat belt telltale 7 remains
plate in the buckle
illuminated for as long as either the driver’s
The seat belt adjustment function takes place or front passenger’s seat belt is not
with a certain amount of retracting force fastened.
when the system senses slack between the Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds
vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale
retain the seat belt during this procedure. You
7 starts flashing and a warning chime
can activate or deactivate the seat belt
sounds with increasing intensity for a
adjustment function via the control system
maximum of 60 seconds or until the
(Y page 138).
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
fastened.
Releasing the seat belts
If you and/or your passenger release the
X Press seat belt release button ? seat belt during driving, the seat belt
(Y page 50). telltale 7 starts flashing and the
Allow the retractor to completely rewind warning chime sounds as described before.
the seat belt by guiding latch plate ; If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat
(Y page 50). belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,
! Make sure the seat belt retracts the warning chime stops sounding, the seat
belt telltale 7 stops flashing but
completely. Otherwise the seat belt and/or
latch plate could get caught or pinched in continues to be illuminated.
the door or in the seat mechanism. This can After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime
damage the seat belt and impair its is reactivated and the seat belt telltale
effectiveness, and/or cause damage to the 7 is flashing again if the vehicle speed
door and/or door trim panel. Such damage once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out if
Limited Warranty. both the driver’s and the front passenger’s
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. seat belt (with the front passenger seat
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
Center. standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
Enhanced seat belt reminder system (Y page 302).
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale 7 will always illuminate for
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 52
52 Occupant safety
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), instructions. These are available at any

seat belt force limiter authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The seat belts for the following seats are The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically
equipped with ETDs and seat belt force operated reversible pre-tensioners that do
limiters: not require replacement after activation.
Safety and security
Rfront seats
Routboard second-row seats Preventive occupant safety (PRE-
Rthird-row seats SAFE®)
The ETDs are designed to activate in the G Warning!
following cases:
The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to reduce
Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding the effects of an accident on vehicle
the system’s preset deployment threshold occupants who are wearing their seat belt
Rin side impacts exceeding the system’s properly. Despite your vehicle being equipped
preset deployment threshold on the far with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of
side of the impact personal injuries occurring as a result of an
Rin accident cannot be eliminated. Therefore,
certain vehicle rollovers
always drive carefully and adjust your driving
Rif the restraint systems are operational and
to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic
functioning correctly, see “SRS indicator conditions.
lamp” (Y page 36)
The ETDs for the front seats will only activate The PRE-SAFE® system takes preventive
if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate measures to better protect the occupants
properly inserted into buckle). from the possibility of personal injuries in the
following hazardous situations:
The ETDs for the rear outer seats (second-row
Remergency braking maneuvers with the
seats) or rear seats (third-row seats) will
activate with or without the respective seat Brake Assist System (BAS) (Y page 64)
belts fastened. activated
In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the Rcriticaldynamic driving situations, e.g.
seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit when the vehicle has been caused to
more snugly against the body. Seat belt force understeer or oversteer because it has
limiters, when activated, are employed to exceeded its physical limitations or in case
help reduce the peak force exerted by the of evasive steering maneuvers at speeds
seat belts on occupants during a crash. above approximately 85 mph (140 km/h)
i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
position or incorrectly worn seat belts. when it is activated:
The ETDs do not pull occupants back RThe front seat belts are pre-tensioned
toward the seat backrest. automatically.
RVehicles with front passenger seat memory
G Warning!
function: If the passenger seat is in an
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
unfavorable position, the seat will be
replaced.
adjusted to a position that seeks to better
For your safety, when disposing of the protect the occupant.
pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 53
Occupant safety 53
RIf the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving

G Warning!
situation, the door windows close, except Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the
for a minimal gap that remains open. head restraint posts. Otherwise, the NECK-
RVehicles with power tilt/sliding sunroof: If PRO active front head restraints may not be
the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving able to function properly or offer the intended
Safety and security

situation, the tilt/sliding sunroof also degree of protection they were designed for
closes, except for a minimal gap that in the event of a rear-end collision.
remains open.
G Warning!
If the closing procedure of any of these
elements is blocked, it will stop and open Only use seat or head restraint covers which
slightly. have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle model.
Once the hazardous situation no longer exists
and an accident has been avoided, the seat Using other seat or head restraint covers may
belt pre-tensioning is deactivated. All of the interfere with or prevent the activation of the
NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/
PRE-SAFE® settings can be re-adjusted
or the deployment of the front side impact air
following the critical driving event.
bags.
If the seat belts do not release:
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
X Adjust the seat backrest or seat slightly to for availability.
the rear until the seat belt tension is
reduced. When the NECK-PRO active front head
The locking mechanism releases. restraints have been triggered in an accident,
the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
! When moving the seats, make sure there must be reset. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO
are no items in the footwell or behind the active front head restraints cannot offer any
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the additional protection in the event of another
seats and/or the items. rear-end collision.
For information on the seat belt adjustment For information on resetting the activated
function as an integrated comfort feature of NECK-PRO active front head restraints, see
PRE-SAFE®, see (Y page 51). “Resetting activated head restraints”
(Y page 310).
You cannot remove the NECK-PRO active
NECK-PRO active front head front head restraints.
restraints
G Warning!
The NECK-PRO active front head restraints For your protection, drive only with properly
are intended to offer the driver and front positioned head restraints.
passenger increased protection from Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
whiplash-type injuries. In the event of a rear- to the head as possible and the center of the
end collision, the NECK-PRO active front head head restraint supports the back of the head
restraints on the front seats are designed to at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
move forward in the direction of travel. They injury to the head and neck in the event of an
thus provide the head with increased support accident or similar situation.
earlier on in the collision sequence. The
NECK-PRO active front head restraints will For information on head restraint adjustment,
move forward whether the seats are occupied see “Head restraint height” (Y page 83), or
or not.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 54
54 Occupant safety
see “Head restraint fore and aft adjustment” Make sure:

(Y page 83). RYou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows.
RYou can move your legs freely.
Correct driver seat adjustment
RAll displays (including malfunction and
Safety and security
G Warning! indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster

In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle are clearly visible.
control the following must be done before the
vehicle is put into motion:
Seat belt
Rseat adjustment
Rhead restraint adjustment
G Observe Safety notes, see page 47.
XFasten and position your seat belt ;
Rsteering wheel adjustment
correctly (Y page 49).
Rrear view mirror adjustment Make sure:
Rfastening of seat belts RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly.
RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder.
RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low
as possible on your hips.
Seat and head restraint

XPosition seat = and head restraint
properly. See (Y page 82) for seat and
head restraint adjustment.
Observe the following points:
RAlways be in a properly seated position.
RThe position should be as far rearward from
the front air bag in the steering wheel as
possible, while still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls.
Steering wheel RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
G Observe Safety notes, see page 91. accelerator/brake pedal safely.
X Position steering wheel : properly. See RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can
(Y page 92) for manual adjustment and correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
(Y page 92) for electrical adjustment.
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
is as nearly upright as possible.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 55
Occupant safety 55
RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front If children open a door, they could injure other
edge of the seat cushion lightly supports persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
your legs. themselves or be injured by following traffic.
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as Do not expose the child restraint system to
close to the head as possible and the direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
Safety and security

center of the head restraint supports the metal parts, for example, could become very
back of the head at eye level. hot, and the child could be burned by these
RNever place hands under the seat or near parts.
any moving parts while the seat is being
G Warning!
adjusted.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless they
are firmly secured in place.
Children in the vehicle
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
Safety notes increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
If an infant or child is traveling with you in the Rstrong braking maneuvers
vehicle:
Rsudden changes of direction
X Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and size of Ran accident
the child.
X Make sure the infant or child is properly Infant and child restraint systems
secured at all times while the vehicle is in
motion. G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
We recommend all infants and children be
G Warning! properly restrained at all times while the
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the vehicle is in motion.
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always Canada only:
take the SmartKey with you and lock the Only use a BabySmart™ compatible child
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in restraint for the front passenger seat in this
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child vehicle.
restraint system, or with access to an
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
belt have special seat belt retractors for
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
secure fastening of child restraints.
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could To fasten a child restraint, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle mounting.
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through To activate the special seat belt retractor:
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
let it retract.
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 56
56 Occupant safety
During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting When using any infant restraint, toddler
sound can be heard to indicate that the restraint, or booster seat, make sure to
special seat belt retractor is activated. carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
The seat belt is now locked. instructions for installation and use.
X Push down on child restraint to take up any Please read and observe warning labels
Safety and security
slack. affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to

infant or child restraints.
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:
X Release the seat belt buckle and let the G Warning!
seat belt retract completely. According to accident statistics, children are
The seat belt can then again be used in the safer when properly restrained in the rear
usual manner. seating positions than in the front seating
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
for the front passenger seat, the front children be placed in the rear seats whenever
passenger seat must be in the most backward possible. Regardless of seating position,
position. children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
G Warning! infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
Never release the seat belt buckle while the seat recommended for the size and weight of
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt the child.
retractor will be deactivated. The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
i Information on child seats with mounting belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
fittings for tether anchorages top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
(Y page 57). child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
For information on LATCH-type child seat Occupants, especially children, should always
anchors (Y page 60). sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
The use of infant or child restraints is required properly and use an appropriately sized infant
by law in all 50 states, the District of restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
Columbia, the U.S. territories and all recommended for the size and weight of the
Canadian provinces. child.
Infants and small children should be seated Children can be killed or seriously injured by
in an appropriate infant or child restraint an inflating air bag. Note the following
system. They must be properly secured in important information when circumstances
accordance with the manufacturer’s require you to place a child in the front
instructions for the child restraint. All infant passenger seat:
or child restraint systems must comply with RUSA only: Your vehicle is equipped with air
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards bag technology designed to deactivate the
213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle front passenger front air bag in your vehicle
Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. when the system senses the weight of a
A statement by the child restraint typical 12-month-old child or less along
manufacturer of compliance with these with the weight of a standard appropriate
standards can be found on the instruction child restraint on the front passenger seat.
label on the restraint and in the instruction RUSA only: For children larger than the
manual provided with the restraint. typical 12-month-old child, the front
passenger front air bag may or may not be
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 57
Occupant safety 57
activated. Always make sure the A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
42 indicator lamp is front passenger seat will be seriously
illuminated, indicating that the front injured or even killed if the front passenger
passenger front air bag is deactivated. front air bag inflates.
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
Safety and security

under must never ride in the front seat, facing child restraint on the front passenger
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which use the proper child restraint
operates with the BabySmart™ system recommended for the age, size and weight
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the of the child, and secure child restraint with
front passenger front air bag when it is the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
installed properly. Otherwise they will be seat manufacturer’s instructions.
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury G Warning!
will result. Infants and small children should never share
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the a seat belt with another occupant. During an
front passenger seat will be seriously accident, they could be crushed between the
injured or even killed if the front passenger occupant and seat belt.
front air bag inflates in a collision which A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
could occur under some circumstances, significantly increased if the child restraints
even with the air bag technology installed are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
in your vehicle. The only means to or the child is not properly secured in the child
completely eliminate this risk is to never restraint.
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint Children too big for a toddler restraint must
in the front seat. We therefore strongly ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
recommend that you always place a child shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. face or neck. A booster seat may be
RIf you must install a rear-facing child necessary to achieve proper seat belt
restraint on the front passenger seat positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
because circumstances require you to do they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
so, make sure the 42 fits properly without a booster.
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating When the child restraint is not in use, remove
that the front passenger front air bag is it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
deactivated. Should the 42 belt to prevent the child restraint from
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while becoming a projectile in the event of an
the restraint is installed, please check accident.
installation. Periodically check the
42 indicator lamp while Installation of infant and child restraint
driving to make sure the 42 systems
indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
42 indicator lamp goes out or
This vehicle is equipped with tether
anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
remains out, do not transport a child on the
the rear seat backrests. The tether anchorage
front passenger seat until the system has
ring of the second-row middle seat is located
been repaired.
on the rear of the seat base (Y page 59).
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 58
58 Occupant safety
Top tether straps enable an additional X Securely fasten hook =, which is part of
connection to be made between child the tether strap ?, to anchorage ring ;.
restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
anchors and rear seats. This can further
reduce the risk of injury.
Safety and security
Outboard second-row and third-row seats
i For safety, make sure hook = is attached

to anchorage ring ; beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
Make sure
Rtop tether strap ? is not twisted
X Press in lower part of anchorage ring
cover : on the seat backrest on which a Rthe head restraint is installed and
child seat is to be installed. positioned such that top tether strap ?
X Pull on upper part of anchorage ring can pass freely between the head restraint
cover : to remove cover. and top of the seat backrest
X Store anchorage ring cover : in a Rtop tether strap ? is positioned between
convenient place (e.g. glove box). the seat backrest and the cargo
compartment cover blind (if installed)
X Move the respective head restraint to its
Rtop tether strap ? is positioned between
uppermost position (Y page 88).
X Release the respective seat backrest
the seat backrest and the cargo net (if
(Y page 84). installed)
The seat backrest folds down. G Warning!
X Guide the top tether strap between head
When installing a child seat on a third-row
restraint and top of the seat backrest. seat, do not fasten the hook to the strap below
the anchorage ring. Otherwise, the child seat
will not be securely fastened. A child’s risk of
serious or fatal injuries is significantly
increased if the child seat is not properly
secured in the vehicle.
X Fold seat backrest up and push backwards

until it engages audibly.
An outboard second-row seat is locked
properly only when the lock status
indicator is in hinged position and the red
marking is barely visible (Y page 86).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 59
Occupant safety 59
G Warning! the seat belt buckle for the second-row

After installing top tether straps, make sure middle seat.
the seats are locked properly, the seat
backrests are in an upright position and they G Warning!
are locked properly. Please be aware that installation of a child
Safety and security

An outboard second-row seat is locked seat in the second-row middle seat position
properly only when the lock status indicator can prevent the folding forward of the
is in hinged position and the red marking is outboard second-row seats which can
barely visible. obstruct access to and exit from the third-row
seats. In case of an accident it will be difficult
If a seat and seat backrest are not locked
for occupants of the third-row seats to leave
properly, the seat could move forward and the
the vehicle. Serious injuries could result.
seat backrest could fold. The child seat would
no longer be supported properly or positioned Install a child seat in one of the outboard
to provide its intended benefit. That could seating positions according to the installation
cause serious or even fatal injuries. instructions if access to the third-row seats is
required.
X Lower the head restraint if necessary
X Move the head restraint to its uppermost
(Y page 88).
Make sure top tether strap ? can pass position (Y page 88).
freely between the head restraint and top
of the seat backrest.
X Install the child restraint system and
tighten top tether strap ? according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
After removing the child restraint system and
top tether strap ?:
X Reinstall anchorage ring cover :.
Second-row middle seat

G Warning! X Pull seat backrest release strap : in the
Only install a child seat in the second-row direction of arrow.
middle seat position if the outboard seat belt
buckle is not obstructed or overlapped by the
child seat. Not all child seats, including some
Mercedes-Benz approved child seats, can be
used in this seating position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for more
information.
Do not use the LATCH anchors or seat belt
buckle for the outboard seats in conjunction
with a child seat in the second-row middle
seat position. Child seats in the middle
seating position must only be secured by the
middle seat position seat belt inserted into
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 60
60 Occupant safety
X Fold seat backrest ; forward to seat no longer be supported properly or positioned

cushion = as far as necessary for you to to provide its intended benefit. That could
access anchorage ring ?. cause serious or even fatal injuries.
X Lower the head restraint if necessary

(Y page 88).
Safety and security
Make sure top tether strap B can pass

freely between the head restraint and top
of the seat backrest.
X Install the child restraint system and
tighten top tether strap B according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type

X Guide top tether strap B between head
restraint and top of the seat backrest.
X Securely fasten hook A, which is part of G Warning!
top tether strap B, to anchorage ring ?. Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
Make sure
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
Rtop tether strap B is not twisted face or neck.
Rthe head restraint is installed and A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
positioned such that top tether strap B proper seat belt positioning for children over
can pass freely between the head restraint 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where
and top of the seat backrest a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
Rtop
booster.
tether strap B is positioned between
the seat backrest and the cargo Install child seat according to manufacturer’s
compartment cover blind (if installed) instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached to both
Rtop tether strap B is positioned between
anchors.
the seat backrest and the cargo net (if
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
installed)
loose during an accident which could result in
i For safety, make sure hook A is attached serious injury or death to the child.
to anchorage ring ? beyond the safety Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
catch, as illustrated. child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
X Fold seat backrest up and push backwards Each of the outboard second-row seats and
until it engages audibly. third-row seats has two LATCH-type anchors
for the installation of a LATCH-type child seat
G Warning! with matching mounting fittings.
After installing the top tether strap, make sure
Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be used
the seat backrest is in an upright position and
and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat
is locked properly.
belt system. Install child seat according to the
If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the manufacturer’s instructions.
seat backrest could fold. The child seat would
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 61
Occupant safety 61
The LATCH-type anchors on the outboard

second-row seats are covered with
upholstery blends.
Safety and security

X Remove anchorage ring covers = from
anchors ? of the third-row seat on which
a child seat is to be installed.
Information sign ; indicates the position of
X Install a LATCH-type child seat according
anchor :.
to the manufacturer’s instructions.
X Move the respective outboard second-row A rigid connection between the child seat
seat backrest to an upright position and the body of the vehicle is established.
(Y page 87).
X Push the upholstery blend to the side. Child safety
X Install a LATCH-type child seat according
to the manufacturer’s instructions. Child safety locks
A rigid connection between the child seat G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
and the body of the vehicle is established.
The LATCH-type anchors on the third-row
G Warning!
seats are blended with covers. Children could open a rear door from the
inside. This may cause serious personal injury
or an accident. Therefore, secure the rear
doors with the child safety locks whenever
children are riding in the back seats of the
vehicle.
The child safety locks on the rear doors

enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear
door from the inside. You can open the rear
door from the outside when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 62
62 Panic alarm
The rear door windows can no longer be

operated using the respective switch
located in the rear doors.
You can still operate the rear door windows
using the switches located on the door
Safety and security
control panel of the driver’s door.

X Deactivating: Press override switch :
again.
The switch disengages from its recessed
position back to its original position.
The rear door windows can be operated
X Securing: Press the lever down in direction
again using the respective switch located
of arrow ;.
in the rear doors.
X Check to make sure the child safety locks
For more information on power windows, see
are working properly. the “Controls in detail” section
X Releasing: Press the lever up in direction (Y page 106).
of arrow :.
Override switch Panic alarm

With the override switch you can disable the
rear door window switches in the rear door
panels. This can be useful, for instance, when
you have children riding in the rear passenger
compartment.
G Warning!
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear door
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
window opening.
X Activating: Press and hold !
button : for at least 1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
X Deactivating: Press ! button : again.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
or
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
inside the vehicle.
X Activating: Press override switch :.
The switch engages in recessed position.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 63
Driving safety systems 63
i USA only: achieved with winter tires, or snow chains

This device complies with Part 15 of the as required.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: Safety notes
1. This device may not cause harmful G Warning!
Safety and security

interference, and
The following factors increase the risk of
2. this device must accept any accidents:
interference received, including RExcessive speed, especially in turns
interference that may cause undesired
operation. RWet and slippery road surfaces
Any unauthorized modification to this RFollowing another vehicle too closely
device could void the user’s authority to The driving safety systems described in this
operate the equipment. section cannot reduce these risks or prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
i Canada only: vehicle. They cannot increase braking or
This device complies with RSS-210 of steering efficiency beyond that afforded by
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
the following two conditions: or the traction afforded.
1. This device may not cause interference, Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
and prevent accidents.
2. this device must accept any The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the
interference received, including driving safety systems described in this
interference that may cause undesired section must never be exploited in a reckless
operation of the device. or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
Any unauthorized modification to this the user’s safety or the safety of others.
device could void the user’s authority to Always adjust your driving style to the
operate the equipment. prevailing road and weather conditions and
keep a safe distance to other road users and
objects on the street.
Driving safety systems If a driving system malfunctions, other driving
safety systems may also switch off. Observe
Introduction indicator and warning lamps that may come
This section contains information about the on as well as messages in the multifunction
following driving safety systems: display that may appear.
RABS (Antilock Brake System)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) ABS
REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
G Warning!
i In winter operation, the maximum Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
effectiveness of most of the driving brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the
systems described in this section is only brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 64
64 Driving safety systems
and significantly reduces braking If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock
effectiveness. during hard braking, reducing steering
capability and extending the braking distance.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
lock during braking. This allows you to
Safety and security
BAS
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of G Observe Safety notes, see page 63.
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
of road surface conditions. emergency situations. If you apply the brakes
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will very quickly, the BAS provides full brake
respond even to light brake pressure. boost automatically, thereby potentially
The ABS indicator lamp ! indicator lamp reducing the braking distance.
in the instrument cluster comes on when you X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the the emergency braking situation is over.
engine is running. The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
Braking When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
At the instant one of the wheels is about to function again as normal. The BAS is then
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the deactivated.
brake pedal. The pulsation indicates that the G Warning!
ABS is in the regulating mode. If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake functions, but without the additional brake
pedal while you feel the pulsation. boost available that the BAS would normally
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure provide in an emergency braking maneuver.
yields the advantages provided by the ABS, Therefore, the braking distance may increase.
namely braking power and the ability to steer
the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an EBP
indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving. The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
enhances braking effectiveness by allowing
Emergency brake maneuver the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion
of the braking effort in straight-line braking
X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake without a loss of vehicle stability.
pedal.
G Warning!
G Warning! If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system will
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safety still function with full brake boost. However,
systems such as the BAS or the ESP® are also the rear wheels could lock up during
switched off. Observe indicator and warning emergency braking situations, for example.
lamps that may come on as well as messages You could lose control of the vehicle and
in the multifunction display that may appear. cause an accident.
Adapt your driving style to the changed
driving characteristics.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 65
Driving safety systems 65
ESP® Mercedes-Benz Center. You could

otherwise seriously damage the brake
G Observe Safety notes, see page 63. system or the transfer case which is not
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
operational as soon as the engine is running. Warranty.
Safety and security

It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the ! Because the ESP® operates
road surface) and handling. automatically, the engine and ignition must
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
The ESP® recognizes that the vehicle deviates
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
from the direction of travel as intended by the
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking
driver. By applying brakes to individual
brake is being tested on a brake test
wheels and by limiting the engine output, the
dynamometer. Such testing should be no
ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The
longer than 10 seconds.
ESP® is especially useful while driving off and
Active braking action through the ESP®
on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking and
system which is not covered by the
steering maneuvers.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The ESP® warning lamp d in the
instrument cluster comes on when you switch ! The ESP® will only function properly if you
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine use wheels of the recommended tire size
is running. as specified in the “Technical data” section
The ESP® warning lamp d in the of this Operator’s Manual.
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
i The Distronic system and cruise control
engaged.
switch off automatically when the ESP®
G Warning! engages.
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ESP® warning lamp d flashing in the Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
follows:
The 4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction
RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as
System) is a component of the ESP®. The
possible.
4-ETS improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator available traction, especially under slippery
pedal. road conditions by applying the brakes to a
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the spinning wheel. In addition, more power is
prevailing road conditions. transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
When you switch off the ESP®, the 4-ETS is
still enabled.
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
prevent accidents resulting from excessive
speed. Switching off the ESP®
G Warning!
! Only conduct operational or performance
The ESP® should not be switched off during
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
normal driving other than in the
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 66
66 Driving safety systems
circumstances described below. Disabling

the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
Safety and security
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off

the ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for
example
Rwhen driving with snow chains
X With the engine running, press ESP®
Rin deep snow
switch : until the ESP® warning lamp
Rin sand or gravel d in the instrument cluster comes on.
G Warning! The ESP® is switched off.
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the G Warning!
aforementioned circumstances do not apply When the ESP® warning lamp d is
anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid switched off or is not operational due to a
or a wheel is spinning. malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
When you switch off the ESP®, driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
Rthe ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle road conditions and to the non-operating
Rthe engine output is not limited, which status of the ESP®.
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
into surfaces for better grip ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
Rthe 4-ETS will still apply the brakes to a extended period with the ESP® switched
spinning wheel off. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you
are braking
Rthe cruise control or the Distronic system Switching on the ESP®
cannot be activated
X Press ESP® switch : until the ESP®
Rthe cruise control or the Distronic system
switch off if activated warning lamp d in the instrument
cluster goes out.
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or You are now again in normal driving mode
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® with the ESP® switched on.
warning lamp d in the instrument
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will ESP® trailer stabilization
then not stabilize the vehicle.
If the trailer you are towing should begin to
sway, the rig can only be stabilized by
immediately applying the brakes hard.
Steering during this maneuver will not help to
stabilize the rig.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 67
Anti-theft systems 67
The ESP® will assist you in such situations. In the event that the engine cannot be
The ESP® recognizes when the trailer starts started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
swaying and will apply the brakes to reduce charged), the system is not operational.
the vehicle speed to a non-critical speed that Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
allows the vehicle-trailer combination to Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
stabilize. USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Safety and security

The ESP® trailer stabilization is functional at
vehicle speeds above approximately 40 mph
Anti-theft alarm system
(65 km/h) when the ESP® is switched on.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
G Warning! visual and audible alarm is triggered when
The system will not be able to assist when the someone opens
trailer jackknifes
Ra door
Rif the ESP® has switched off due to a
Rthe tailgate
malfunction
Rthe hood
Ron wet or icy roads
Ron
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
roads with slippery surface
element, a door, for example, is closed
Rin sand or gravel immediately.
Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip The alarm system will also be triggered when
over before the system recognizes swaying of Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical
the trailer. key
Ra door is opened from the inside
Anti-theft systems To cancel the alarm after it has been
triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
Immobilizer (Y page 68).
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized i If the alarm stays on for more than
persons from starting your vehicle. 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
When leaving the vehicle, always take the call to the Response Center automatically.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The The Tele Aid system will initiate the call
engine can be started by anyone with a valid provided that
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid
service
Activating
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
X With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey properly
from the starter switch.
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
supply and GPS coverage are available
open the driver’s door.
Deactivating
X Switch on the ignition.
i Starting the engine will also deactivate
the immobilizer.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 68
68 Anti-theft systems
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of

the vehicle.
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
Safety and security
X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the

SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash three times to
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
system is armed.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, a door or the tailgate may not be
properly closed.
Close the respective element.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
i Unless you open a door or the tailgate
within approximately 40 seconds after
unlocking the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
rearmed.
Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
X Press button % or & on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Grasp an outside door handle.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 69
69
Vehicle equipment .............................. 70

Locking and unlocking ....................... 70
Starter switch positions ..................... 79
Seats .................................................... 81
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 91
Mirrors ................................................. 93
Memory function ................................. 96
Controls in detail
Lighting ................................................ 97
Wipers ................................................ 103
Power windows ................................. 106
Driving and parking .......................... 110
Automatic transmission ................... 115
Transfer case .................................... 122
Instrument cluster ............................ 122
Control system .................................. 123
Driving systems ................................ 142
Overview of climate control sys-
tem functions and air vents ............. 162
Climate control ................................. 164
3-zone automatic climate control . . . 170
Rear window defroster ..................... 180
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 181
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ...................................... 184
Loading and storing .......................... 186
Useful features ................................. 201
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 70
70 Locking and unlocking
Vehicle equipment SmartKey

Your vehicle comes supplied with two
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
features, standard or optional, potentially removable mechanical key.
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rthe doors
features described in this manual. Rthe tailgate
Controls in detail
Rthe fuel filler flap

Locking and unlocking
Notes
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the
doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system
is disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. The locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
system is armed. : & Lock button
All doors and the tailgate must be closed. ; F Unlock button for tailgate
i If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle = % Unlock button
with the SmartKey, the batteries in the
SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is i USA only:
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is This device complies with Part 15 of the
drained. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
RCheck the batteries in the SmartKey and following two conditions:
replace them if necessary. 1. This device may not cause harmful
RUse the mechanical key to unlock the interference, and
driver’s door. 2. this device must accept any
RUse the mechanical key to lock the interference received, including
vehicle. interference that may cause undesired
operation.
RHave the vehicle battery and the vehicle
battery connections checked at an Any unauthorized modification to this
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 71
i Canada only: KEYLESS-GO

This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
the following two conditions: with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
with remote control and a removable
1. This device may not cause interference, mechanical key.
and The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
2. this device must accept any the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is
Controls in detail
interference received, including checked every time you grasp an outside door
interference that may cause undesired handle.
operation of the device. When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle
Any unauthorized modification to this unlocks
device could void the user’s authority to Rthe doors
Rthe fuel filler flap
Factory setting Rthe tailgate
X Global unlocking: Press button %. i USA only:
Unless you open a door or the tailgate within This device complies with Part 15 of the
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
the vehicle: following two conditions:
RThe vehicle will be locked again. 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
RThe antitheft alarm system will be rearmed.
2. this device must accept any
X Global locking: Press button &. interference received, including
Selective setting operation.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish Any unauthorized modification to this
to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing device could void the user’s authority to
button % will then only unlock the driver’s operate the equipment.
door and the fuel filler flap.
i Canada only:
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
This device complies with RSS-210 of
% and & simultaneously for Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
approximately 6 seconds until the battery the following two conditions:
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
1. This device may not cause interference,
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
and
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
2. this device must accept any
flap: Press button % once.
interference received, including
X Global unlocking: Press button %
twice. operation of the device.
X Global locking: Press button &.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 72
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO Find the SmartKey or change its present
RYou
location immediately (e.g. place it on the
can also use the SmartKey with
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
pocket).
(Y page 70).
RIf you have started the engine with the
RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
turn it off again by
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Controls in detail
with button &).

button
RAlways carry the SmartKey with you.
- inserting the SmartKey into the starter
RNever store the SmartKey together with: switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
- Electronic items such as a mobile phone and the automatic transmission is in park
or another SmartKey position P
- Metallic objects such as coins or metal RThe vehicle could be inadvertently
foil unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
Doing so could impair the function of the of the vehicle and
KEYLESS-GO system. - an outside door handle is splashed with
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey water
must be located outside the vehicle within or
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the - you attempt to clean an outside door
tailgate. handle
RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more
RRemember that the engine can be started
than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is
deactivated. Pull an outside door handle by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
and switch on the ignition once to activate inside the vehicle.
the KEYLESS-GO function. Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away
from the vehicle, the system may no longer If you leave the SmartKey behind when
recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle exiting and locking the vehicle, no message
cannot be locked or the engine started via appears in the multifunction display.
the KEYLESS-GO system. Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
no SmartKey outside the vehicle):
(e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle,
the SmartKey) the message Key Detected In Vehicle
appears in the multifunction display. The
- when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/
vehicle will not be locked.
stop button or trying to lock the vehicle
with the lock button on an outside door
handle the message Key Not Factory setting
Detected appears in the multifunction X Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door
display handle.
- with the engine running, the red message
Key Not Detected appears in the
multifunction display while driving off
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 73
Unless you open a door or the tailgate within Checking SmartKey batteries
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe antitheft alarm system will be rearmed.
Controls in detail
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
X Press button & or % on the
SmartKey.
Battery check lamp : comes on briefly to
X Global locking: Press lock button : on an indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in
order.
outside door handle.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
Selective setting are discharged.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish X Replace the batteries (Y page 310).
to reprogram the SmartKey. Grasping the
driver’s outside door handle will then only i You can obtain the required batteries at
unlock the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap. any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
i If the batteries are checked within signal
% and & simultaneously for
range of the vehicle, pressing button
approximately 6 seconds until the battery & or % will lock or unlock the vehicle
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
accordingly.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door Loss of the SmartKey
handle. If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
X Global unlocking: Grasp any outside door you should do the following:
handle other than the driver’s outside door
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
handle.
X Global locking: Press lock button : on an
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
outside door handle.
mechanical key to your car insurance
company immediately.
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to supply you with a replacement.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 74
Opening the doors from the inside turning at vehicle speeds of above 9 mph
(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself
You can open a door from the inside even out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is
when it is locked unless it is secured with the on a test stand.
child safety lock (Y page 61).
Open door only when conditions are safe to i You can also activate or deactivate the
do so. automatic central locking using the control
system (Y page 137).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking from the inside

You can lock or unlock the vehicle from the
inside using the central locking switches. This
can be useful, for example, if you want to lock
the vehicle before starting to drive.
The central locking switches do not lock or
Example illustration driver’s door
unlock the fuel filler flap.
The switches are located in each front door.
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
a door from the inside will trigger the anti-
theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 68).
X Front doors: Pull on inside door
handle ; on the respective front door.
If the door was locked, locking knob : will
move up.
X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
respective rear door to unlock door.
X Pull on the inside door handle on the X Locking: Press central locking switch ;.
respective rear door. When all doors and the tailgate are closed,
the vehicle locks.
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
Automatic central locking switch :.
The doors and the tailgate lock automatically You can open a locked front door from the
when the vehicle is set into motion. inside at any time. Open door only when
You can open a locked front door from the conditions are safe to do so.
inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
The doors are designed to unlock
automatically after an accident if the force of
the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 75
If the vehicle was previously locked with the Closing the tailgate from the outside
central locking switch
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a G Warning!
front door is opened from the inside To prevent possible personal injury, always
Rand the SmartKey is set to selective keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
settings, only the front door opened from compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
Controls in detail
the inside is unlocked
children are around.
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will not
unlock using the central unlocking switch.
Tailgate
G Warning!
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
X Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on
A minimum height clearance of 7.20 ft handles :.
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate. X Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it.
Once the tailgate touches the latch, the
Opening the tailgate from the outside tailgate will pull itself shut automatically.
Opening the tailgate from the inside

G Warning!
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle. Children could open the tailgate from
the inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
! Always make sure there is sufficient

overhead clearance.
X Pull on handle :. You can unlock the tailgate from the third-row
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The seats and then open it manually.
vehicle must be unlocked.
X Pull tailgate upwards to open.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 76
In vehicles with power tailgate, you can

Ropen and close the tailgate from the inside
and the outside electrically
Rlimit the opening height of the tailgate
Rinterrupt the opening/closing procedure at
any time by
- pressing or pulling the door-mounted
Controls in detail
remote tailgate opening/closing switch

- pulling the outside handle on the tailgate
X Push handle : in direction of arrow ; and - pressing the tailgate closing switch
hold it there. - pressing the KEYLESS-GO locking/
X From this position, lift handle : in closing switch
direction of arrow = and hold it there. Notes for operating the tailgate with the
The tailgate is released and can be opened SmartKey:
manually.
You can also open, close, and stop the
i If you do not open the tailgate within a few tailgate by pressing button F on the
seconds, the tailgate lock will engage again SmartKey.
automatically. Additionally, the tailgate will The prerequisites for this are:
relock automatically if the vehicle was RNo SmartKey is inserted in the starter
locked when the tailgate was released from switch.
the inside. RKEYLESS-GO: The vehicle’s on-board
If the tailgate lock does not engage electronics must have status 0
automatically and, if applicable, the tailgate (Y page 80).
does not relock after a few seconds, you
have to close the tailgate manually Opening the tailgate from the outside
(Y page 75).
You can unlock and open the tailgate
simultaneously from the outside when the
Power tailgate vehicle is stationary.
X Press and hold button F on the
G Warning!
SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the begins to open.
engine is running and while driving. Among While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) warning sounds.
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Pull on the
! The tailgate swings open upwards handle (Y page 75).

automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 7.20 ft
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 77
Closing the tailgate from the outside

G Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the
Controls in detail
cargo compartment opening when closing the
children are around. To stop the closing Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
procedure, do one of the following:
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/ X Press tailgate closing switch : or press
closing switch on the driver’s door. and hold button F on the SmartKey until
RPress
the tailgate begins to close.
the tailgate closing switch.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing object while closing, the closing procedure is
switch. stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
RPull outside handle on the tailgate. happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter example.
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics Closing the tailgate and locking the
have status 0): Press button F on the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
SmartKey. KEYLESS-GO)
Do not leave the SmartKey in the vehicle. You
may lock yourself out. G Warning!
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the make sure no one is in danger of being
tailgate will lock automatically when it is injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
closed. The turn signal lamps flash three always keep hands and fingers away from the
times to confirm locking. cargo compartment opening when closing the
children are around. To stop the closing
procedure, do one of the following:
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/
closing switch on the driver’s door.
RPress the tailgate closing switch.
RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch.
RPull outside handle on the tailgate.
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 78
have status 0): Press button F on the Opening/closing the tailgate from the
SmartKey. inside
You can close the tailgate and lock the vehicle Opening
simultaneously from the outside using the G Observe Safety notes, see page 76.
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
Controls in detail
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with

the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
Monitor the opening procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured.
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
When the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics
Make sure you have the SmartKey with you.
have status 0): Press button F on the
X Press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
SmartKey.
switch : briefly.
The tailgate closes. You can unlock and open the tailgate
Once the tailgate and all doors are closed: simultaneously from the driver’s seat when
RThe vehicle locks. the vehicle is stationary.
RThe turn signals flash three times to
confirm locking.
RThe locking knobs in the doors move
down.
RThe anti-theft alarm system is armed.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing, the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
example.
X Pull remote tailgate opening/closing
The closing process is stopped if the system
cannot recognize a SmartKey with KEYLESS- switch : until the tailgate begins to open.
GO anymore. Make sure the SmartKey with While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
KEYLESS-GO is within approximately 3 ft warning sounds.
(1 m) of the tailgate. Repeat the closing
Closing
procedure if necessary.
The tailgate remains unlocked when a G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized G Warning!
inside the vehicle to prevent a possible Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
inadvertent lockout. In this case, the turn the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
signals will not flash and the anti-theft alarm
will be triggered when the tailgate is opened.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 79
Starter switch positions 79
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch. X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to in the tailgate (Y page 77) until you hear a
make sure no one is in danger of being short acoustic signal.
injured. The opening height of the tailgate is limited.
To interrupt the closing procedure, press or The tailgate will now stop at the stored
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch. position when opened.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an Deactivating
Controls in detail
object while closing, the closing procedure is X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch
stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may in the tailgate (Y page 77) until you hear
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for two short, consecutive acoustic signals.
example.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2. Starter switch positions
X Press remote tailgate opening/closing
SmartKey
switch : until the tailgate begins to close.
While the tailgate is closing an acoustic G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
warning sounds.
X Interrupting the closing procedure:
Press or pull remote tailgate opening/
closing switch :.
Limiting opening height of tailgate

You can limit the opening height of the
tailgate in the upper opening range. This can
be useful, for example, when the space above
the tailgate is not sufficient.
Starter switch
Activating g For removing SmartKey
X Open the tailgate: Pull on handle 1 Power supply for some electrical
(Y page 75) or press and hold button consumers, e.g. radio
F on the SmartKey until the tailgate 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
opens. consumers) and driving position
X Stop opening procedure: When the 3 Starting position
tailgate is in the desired position, press
tailgate closing switch (Y page 77) or pull When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
on handle once more. (except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
X You can also press or pull the remote
signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the
tailgate opening/closing switch instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
(Y page 78) to stop the opening procedure. instrument cluster fails to come on when the
ignition is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after starting
the engine or comes on while driving, refer to
“Lamps in instrument cluster” (Y page 299).
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 80
80 Starter switch positions
X Always remove the SmartKey from the the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s
starter switch when the engine is not in electrical systems can be switched on or
operation. the engine can be started using the
This will help to prevent accelerated vehicle KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
battery discharge or a completely
discharged vehicle battery.
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be
Controls in detail
sufficiently charged.
X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if
necessary.
or
X Get a jump start.
i If the SmartKey does not belong to the

vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the : KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
starter switch. However, the ignition does ; Starter switch
not switch on and the engine does not start.
X Insert the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
into the starter switch (if not inserted
KEYLESS-GO already).
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. park position P.
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO X Do not depress the brake pedal.
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be
inserted in the starter switch and the
SmartKey present in the vehicle.
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
without depressing the brake pedal
corresponds to the various starter switch
positions (Y page 79).
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
with the brake pedal firmly depressed will KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
start the engine (Y page 110). = USA only
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be ? Canada only
pulled out of the starter switch easily. You can
then insert the SmartKey into the starter Position 0
switch.
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
not need to be removed from the starter have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
switch when you leave the vehicle.
However, always take the SmartKey with
you when you leave the vehicle. As long as
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 81
Seats 81
Position 1 Seats
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Safety notes
once.
This supplies power for some electrical G Warning!
consumers, such as radio functions. In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
vehicle is put into motion:
stop button
Controls in detail
Rseat adjustment
Ronce more, the ignition (position 2) is
Rhead restraint adjustment
switched on
Rtwice Rsteering wheel adjustment
more the power supply is again
switched off Rrear view mirror adjustment
Rfastening of seat belts
Ignition (or position 2)
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button G Warning!
twice. Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
This supplies power for all electrical Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
consumers. the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
All lamps (except low-beam headlamp Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
indicator lamp, high-beam headlamp backrest in an excessively reclined position as
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator this can be dangerous. You could slide under
lamps unless activated) in the instrument the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument it, the seat belt would apply force at the
cluster fails to come on when the ignition abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
is switched on, have it checked and or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the belts provide the best restraint when the
instrument cluster remains on after wearer is in a position that is as upright as
starting the engine or comes on while possible and seat belts are properly
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument positioned on the body.
cluster” (Y page 299).
G Warning!
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/ Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
stop button once, the power supply is again correctly fasten your seat belt.
switched off. Observe the following points:
RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steering
wheel.
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possible
with the driver still able to operate the
controls properly.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 82
82 Seats
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
close to the head as possible. The center of restraints. Head restraints are intended to
the head restraint must support the back of help reduce injuries during an accident.
the head at eye level.
RNever place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being Seat adjustment
adjusted. ! When moving the seats, make sure there
Controls in detail
Failure to do so could result in an accident are no items in the footwell or behind the
and/or serious personal injury. seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats and/or the items.
G Warning!
The power seats can be operated at any time. Power seats
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked ! When the second-row seats are folded
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a forward, e.g. for cargo volume expansion,
vehicle could result in an accident and/or the front seats may not be moved to the
serious personal injury. rearmost position. Otherwise you could
damage the front and second-row seats.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are ! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and
safer when properly restrained in the rear head restraint height, make sure the sun
seating positions than in the front seating visor is folded up. If the head restraint is in
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that the uppermost position, it could hit and
children be placed in the rear seats whenever damage the sun visor.
i Vehicles without memory function:
seated and properly secured in an The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler after either front door has been opened.
restraint, or booster seat recommended for The counter resets each time
the size and weight of the child. For additional Ryou open or close a front door
information, see “Children in the vehicle”. Ryou insert the SmartKey into the starter
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is switch
Ryou remove the SmartKey from the
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child starter switch
restraint. Ryou switch the ignition on or off
Just like in vehicles with memory function,
G Warning!
the power seats can be operated at any
For your protection, drive only with properly time when the ignition is switched on.
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close i The memory function (Y page 96) lets
to the head as possible and the center of the you store the settings for the seat position
head restraint supports the back of the head together with the settings for the steering
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for wheel (electrical) and exterior rear view
injury to the head and neck in the event of an mirrors.
accident or similar situation.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 83
Seats 83
the lowest non-use position and have the

occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
! Do not attempt to remove front seat head

restraints. They can only be removed by
qualified technicians. We recommend that
you have this work carried out by an
Controls in detail
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the
switch forward or backward in direction of
arrow A.
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
forward or backward in direction of
arrow ?.
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
in direction of arrow =.
X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or X Raising: Adjust the height of head
down in direction of arrow ; until your restraint : by pulling it upward.
upper legs are lightly supported.
If head restraint : is fully retracted, press
X Head restraint height (vehicles with
release button ; in direction of arrow and
memory function): Press the switch up or pull head restraint : upward.
down in direction of arrow :.
X Lowering: Press release button ; in
Head restraint height adjustment, direction of arrow and press down on head
manual restraint :.
This feature is only available in vehicles
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
without memory function.
G Warning!
G Warning!
Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment
For your protection, drive only with properly Package: When adjusting the head restraint,
positioned head restraints. make sure your fingers do not become caught
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close between the head restraint cushion and the
to the head as possible and the center of the monitor. Failing to do so may lead to injury.
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
With a third-row seat occupied, make sure to
move the respective head restraint up from
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 84
84 Seats
Easy-entry feature for third-row seats

The releases for the easy-entry feature are
located on the entry side and the back of each
outboard second-row seat.
Controls in detail
X While seated, reach behind you with both

hands and find lower edge of the head
restraint.
X Push or pull on the lower edge of the head
restraint cushion to the desired position.
X Pull and hold easy-entry lever : in
direction of arrow at resistance point.
Easy-entry/exit feature for third-row The seat backrest folds forward.
seats X Push the seat forward as far as it will go.
This feature allows for easier access to and You should now have sufficient space to
exit from the vehicle’s third-row seats. access the vehicle’s third-row seat.
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, the second-row
seat backrests must be properly locked either
in the upright position or, when using the
expanded cargo volume, in the fully folded
position while the vehicle is in motion.
! 7-seat vehicles:
Do not use the driver’s side easy-entry/exit
feature for third-row seats when the
second-row middle seat is in armrest Easy-entry/exit position
position. Otherwise, the seat belt outlet of
the second-row middle seat could damage X Enter the vehicle.
the seat backrest of the outboard seat. For information on how to fold down the
second-row seats completely, see
! Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment “Expanding cargo volume” (Y page 189).
Package:
When using the easy-entry/exit feature, a Easy-exit feature for third-row seats
fully raised head restraint could hit the
The easy-exit straps are located on the rear
monitor when the seat is moving forward.
of each outboard second-row seat base.
Lower the head restraint or hold on to the
seat backrest to prevent damage.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 85
Seats 85
Rthe outboard second-row seats are

properly locked
Rthe seat backrests of the outboard second-
row seats are in an upright position and are
properly locked
An outboard second-row seat is properly
locked only when lock status indicator : is
Controls in detail
in hinged position and red marking ; is
barely visible.
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
X To exit the vehicle when seated on a third- locked, the seat could move forward and the
row seat, pull up and hold easy-exit seat backrest could fold. You could slide
strap :. under the seat belt during braking, vehicle
The second-row seat backrest folds maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide
forward. under it, the seat belt would apply force at the
X Push second-row seat forward a far as it will
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries.
go.
Easy-entry/exit position Seat unlocked

X Exit the vehicle. When the seat is unlocked, lock status
For information on how to fold down the indicator : is extended and red
second-row seats completely, see marking ; is clearly visible.
“Expanding cargo volume” (Y page 189). X When the seat is unlocked, push seat
backrest back until the seat audibly
Returning outboard second-row seats engages.
to their original position
G Warning!
When occupants have entered or exited the
vehicle using the easy-entry/exit feature,
before driving off make sure
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 86
86 Seats
seating positions than in the front seating

position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
Controls in detail
the size and weight of the child. For additional

information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
Seat locked A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
When the seat is locked, lock status are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
indicator : is in hinged position and red or the child is not properly secured in the child
marking ; is barely visible. restraint.
Rear seat adjustment

Lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the driver’s seat
G Warning!
lumbar support to help enhance support to Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
your spine. backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and seat
belts are properly positioned on the body.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
Never place hands under the seat or near any
moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
X Curvature position: Use button : to
After adjusting rear seats, make sure
move the curvature up and button = to
Rthe seats are properly locked
move it down.
X Degree of curvature: Use button ; to Rthe seat backrests are in an upright position
lessen the curvature and button ? to and are properly locked

increase it. An outboard second-row seat is properly
Rear seats barely visible.
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
G Warning!
locked, the seat could move forward and the
seat backrest could fold. You could slide
safer when properly restrained in the rear
under the seat belt during braking, vehicle
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 87
Seats 87
maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide Seat backrest tilt (outboard second-

under it, the seat belt would apply force at the row seats)
Controls in detail
X While seated, pull adjustment handle : in
direction of arrow to resistance point and
Seat locked hold it there.
When the seat is locked, lock status X To move seat backrest back, lean lightly
indicator : is in hinged position and red against the seat backrest.

marking ; is barely visible. X To move seat backrest forward, lean
forward with adjustment handle : pulled
Fore and aft adjustment (outboard and held at resistance point.
second-row seats) The seat backrest will move forward
against your back.
X Release adjustment handle : when the
seat backrest has reached the desired
position.
To make sure the seat backrest has
engaged, lean firmly against the seat
backrest.
Seat backrest tilt (third-row seats)
X Pull up adjustment handle : in direction

of arrow and hold it there.
X Move seat to the desired position.
X Release adjustment handle :.
The seat must engage audibly.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 88
88 Seats
X While seated, pull adjustment handle : in X Raising: Manually adjust the height of head
direction of arrow and hold it there. restraint : by pulling it upward to the
X To move seat backrest back, lean lightly desired position.
against backrest. X Lowering: Push release button ; and
X To move seat backrest forward, lean press down on head restraint :.
forward with adjustment handle : pulled.
i The head restraint of the second-row
The seat backrest will move forward middle seat and the third-row seat head
against your back.
Controls in detail
restraints are adjusted in the same

X Release adjustment handle : when the manner.
seat backrest has reached the desired
position. i The tilt of the second-row head restraints
X To make sure the seat backrest has is adjusted in the same manner as the front-
engaged, lean firmly against the backrest. seat head restraints, see “Head restraint
adjustment” (Y page 83).
Head restraint height The tilt of the head restraint of the second-
row middle seat and the third-row seat
G Warning! head restraints cannot be adjusted.
With the second-row middle seat or a third-
row seat occupied, make sure to move the Head restraints, removing and
respective head restraint up from the lowest installing
non-use position and have the occupant
adjust the head restraint properly. G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
positioned head restraints. restraints installed when the rear seats are
occupied. Head restraints are intended to
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
help reduce injuries during an accident.
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head With the second-row middle seat or a third-
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for row seat occupied, make sure to move the
injury to the head and neck in the event of an respective head restraint up from the lowest
accident or similar situation. non-use position and have the occupant
adjust the head restraint properly.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it
is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
i When removing or installing the head

restraint of an outboard second-row seat,
Outboard second-row seat head restraint
adjust the seat to the rear as far as possible
(Y page 87) and fold the seat backrest
(Y page 84) forward.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 89
Seats 89
X Fold the armrest down to the lowest and

then to the desired position until it
engages.
X To readjust the armrest to a higher
position, move armrest up to the desired
position until it engages.
i To readjust the armrest to a lower
Controls in detail
position, you must first fold up the armrest
again and repeat the steps above.
Seat position for removal of head restraints from 7-seat vehicles

outboard second-row seats You can use the seat backrest of the second-
row middle seat as an armrest for the
Removing
outboard seats.
X Pull head restraint : to its uppermost
position. G Warning!
X Press release button ; and pull out head The folded second-row middle seat is
restraint :. intended to serve as an armrest only. Do not
fold the second-row middle seat and allow
Installing occupants to use the folded second-row
middle seat as a footrest while driving. All
X Insert head restraint : into openings on
vehicle occupants must keep both feet on the
the seat backrest.
floor in front of their seat. Otherwise,
i On the outboard second-row seats, the occupants could slide under the seat belt in a
guide bar with the detent must be on the collision. If occupants slide under it, the belt
left. would apply force at the abdomen or neck.
That could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
X Push head restraint : down until it audibly Do not fold the second-row middle seat and
engages. allow occupants to use the folded second-row
X Push release button ; and adjust head middle seat as a table while driving. Objects
restraint : to the desired position placed on the folded second-row middle seat
(Y page 88). may move freely during braking, vehicle
maneuvers, or an accident and be thrown
i The head restraint of the second-row around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown
middle seat and the third-row seat head around in the vehicle interior may cause an
restraints are installed in the same manner. accident and/or serious personal injury.
Armrests X Before folding the seat, lower the head

restraint of the second-row middle seat
6-seat vehicles (Y page 88) completely.
The second-row seat armrests can be folded
up, when loading for example, and adjusted.
X Folding up: Move the armrest into a
vertical position until it engages.
X Adjusting: With the armrest folded up,
disengage the armrest by pushing it
towards the rear slightly.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 90
90 Seats

X Seat cushion depth: Adjust the seat
cushion depth to the length of your upper
leg using switch :.
X Seat backrest contour: Adjust the
contour of the seat backrest to the desired
position using W or X.
X Move the seat backrest support cushion to
Controls in detail
the bottom with button ? or to the center

with button =.
X Pull seat backrest release strap : in X Seat backrest side bolsters: Adjust the
direction of arrow. side bolsters so that they provide good

X Completely fold seat backrest ; forward
lateral support using switch ;.
so that it rests on seat cushion = (armrest
position).
Seat ventilation
Armrest position
The blue indicator lamps ; in seat ventilation
switch : come on to show which ventilation
Multicontour seat level you have selected.
The multicontour seat has a movable seat i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built into can be activated using the summer opening
the seat backrest to provide additional feature (Y page 108).
lumbar and side support.
X Switching on: Press respective seat
ventilation switch :.
Three blue indicator lamps ; in seat
ventilation switch : come on.
X Switching off: Press seat ventilation
switch : repeatedly until all indicator
lamps ; go out.
If there is insufficient voltage the seat
ventilating switches off automatically.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 91
Multifunction steering wheel 91
Seat heating X Continue pressing respective seat heating

switch : until desired seat heating level is
reached.
X Switching off: Press respective seat
heating switch : repeatedly until all
indicator lamps ; go out.
If one or more of indicator lamps ; in
respective seat heating switch : are
Controls in detail
flashing, there is insufficient voltage available
since too many electrical consumers are
turned on. The seat heating switches off
automatically.
Front seat heating switches
The seat heating will switch back on again
The switches for the outboard second-row automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
seat heating are located in the rear center available.
console.
Multifunction steering wheel

Safety notes
G Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the steering wheel adjustment
feature locked could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Rear seat heating switches The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature can be operated at any time.
The red indicator lamps ; in front or rear
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
seat heating switch : come on to show in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
which heating level you have selected. vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
The seat heating switches from level 3 (high) vehicle could result in an accident and/or
to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes. serious personal injury.
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
Make sure
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, the
seat heating switches off automatically. arms slightly bent at the elbows
X Switch on the ignition. Ryou can move your legs freely
X Switching on: Press respective seat Rall displays (including malfunction and
heating switch :. indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
Three red indicator lamps ; in the are clearly visible
respective seat heating switch : come on.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 92
92 Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel adjustment, manual Easy-entry/exit feature

This feature allows the driver an easier entry
into and exit from the vehicle. When entering
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is
in its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
or deactivated in the Comfort submenu of the
Controls in detail
control system (Y page 137).

G Warning!
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
X Unlocking: Pull release handle : out to wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
its stop limit. activated.
X Move steering wheel to the desired To stop steering wheel movement do one of
position. the following:
X Locking: Push release handle : back to RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
its original position. RPress one of the memory position buttons.
X Make sure the steering wheel is securely RPress memory button M.
locked by trying to move it up and down as
well as in and out before driving off. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical
feature, which could result in an accident
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,

the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
will also return to its last set position when
you insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once with the driver’s door closed.
i The last set steering wheel position is
X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move stored when the ignition is switched off or
stalk in direction of arrows :. the position is stored in memory
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down: (Y page 97).
Move stalk in direction of arrows ;. With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
i You can store the settings for the steering remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
wheel with the memory function The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
(Y page 96). you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position 1.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 93
Mirrors 93
i When the current position for the steering X Switch on the ignition.
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the X Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the
steering wheel will no longer be able to stalk in direction of arrow :.
move upward when the easy-entry/exit Indicator lamp = comes on.
feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly i The steering wheel heating may be
interrupted when the engine is started. suspended temporarily. However, indicator
lamp = remains on. The steering wheel
G Warning!
Controls in detail
heating is suspended when the
Let the system complete the adjustment temperature of the vehicle interior is above
procedure before setting the vehicle in 86‡ (30†). It is also suspended when the
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must temperature of the steering wheel is above
be completed before setting the vehicle in 95‡ (35†).
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel When these conditions do not apply
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose anymore, steering wheel heating
control of the vehicle. continues.
Crash-responsive exit aid X Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of

stalk in direction of arrow ;.
When you open the driver’s door after an Indicator lamp = goes out.
accident has occurred, the steering column
moves up. The position of the SmartKey in the i Indicator lamp = flashes or goes out in
starter switch is insignificant. This function case of power surge or undervoltage or if
facilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicle the steering wheel heating malfunctions.
occupants.
The crash-responsive exit aid can only be i The steering wheel heating switches off
triggered when the easy-entry/exit feature is automatically when you remove the
activated via the control system. SmartKey from the starter switch or, on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, when you
switch off the ignition and open the driver’s
Heated steering wheel door.
The steering wheel heating warms up the For more information on the steering wheel,
leather area of the steering wheel. see “Multifunction steering wheel”
(Y page 123).
Mirrors
Notes
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a good
view of the road and traffic conditions.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 94
94 Mirrors
Interior rear view mirror X Switch on the ignition.

X Press button : for the driver’s side
X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually. exterior rear view mirror or button = for
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare The indicator lamp in the respective button
position comes on for approximately 15 seconds.
If you do not make adjustments to the
Controls in detail
selected exterior rear view mirror within

15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.
You will then have to select the desired
exterior rear view mirror again before
adjustments can be made. Adjustments
can only be made with the indicator lamp
for the respective exterior rear view mirror
button illuminated.
X Press adjustment button ; up, down, left
or right according to the desired setting.
X Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by
moving lever : towards the windshield. ! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed. hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
Exterior rear view mirrors ! Vehicle with power folding exterior rear
view mirrors:
G Warning! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
Exercise care when using the passenger-side forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from front),
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a press fold button to fold mirrors in, then
wider field of view). Objects in mirror are press fold button again to fold mirrors out.
closer than they appear. Check your interior Do not force mirrors by hand as this may
rear view mirror and glance over your damage the adjustment mechanism.
shoulder before changing lanes. The mirror housing is then properly
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
the usual manner.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

rear view mirrors will be heated
automatically.
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors

The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s
side and the interior rear view mirror will
respond automatically to glare when the
ignition is switched on and incoming light
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 95
Mirrors 95
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the X Shift the automatic transmission into
interior rear view mirror. reverse gear R.
The rear view mirrors will not react if the The passenger-side exterior rear view
automatic transmission is set to reverse gear mirror moves to the preset parking
R or the interior lighting is switched on. position.
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
G Warning! view mirror with adjustment button ; so
The auto-dimming function does not react if that you see the rear wheel and the road
Controls in detail
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors curb.
in the interior rear view mirror. The exterior rear view mirror parking
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior position is stored.
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, when transporting cargo
Calling up the parking position
which covers the rear window.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles X Switch on the ignition.
(incident light) could blind you. As a result, X Press button =, to select the passenger-
you may not be able to observe traffic side exterior rear view mirror.
conditions and could cause an accident. X Shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
Exterior rear view mirror parking mirror moves to the stored parking
position position.
For more convenient parking, you can set the The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so returns to its previously stored driving
that you can see the rear wheel and the road position
curb. R10 seconds after you have put the gear
selector lever out of reverse gear R
Setting and storing the parking position
Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a
speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
Rimmediately when you press button : to
select the driver’s side exterior rear view
mirror
Power folding exterior rear view

mirrors
! Before you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold in the exterior rear
X Switch on the ignition. view mirrors. Otherwise they may get
X
damaged.
Press button =, to select the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 96
96 Memory function
Folding in and out automatically

The function must be activated in the fold-in
function for the exterior rear view mirrors of
the Convenience submenu (Y page 138).
The exterior rear view mirrors fold in
automatically as soon as the vehicle is locked
from the outside.
Controls in detail
The exterior rear view mirrors fold out

automatically as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or front passenger
door are subsequently opened. X Switch on the ignition.
X Folding in: Briefly press button :.
Synchronizing
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
The power folding rear view mirrors may have
to be synchronized after the vehicle battery i At speeds above approximately 30 mph
has been disconnected or discharged. If the (47 km/h), you will not be able to fold the
exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly exterior mirrors in.
upon locking or unlocking the vehicle, do the X Folding out: Briefly press button :.
following: Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
X Make sure the power folding function in the
! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
control system is activated (Y page 138).
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
X When power folding function is
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the
activated and the exterior rear view front), press button : to fold mirrors in.
mirrors still do not fold properly: Fold Then press button : again to fold mirrors
each exterior rear view mirror in completely
out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
(Y page 96).
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
X Fold each exterior rear view mirror out
The mirror housing is then properly
completely (Y page 96).
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
When the exterior rear view mirrors fold the usual manner.
properly upon locking the vehicle, the exterior
Make sure both rear view mirrors are folded
mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise repeat
out before driving off.
the above steps.
Folding in and out manually Memory function

The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
Notes
they are not folded out completely.
With the memory function you can store up
to three different configurations per front
seat.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 97
Lighting 97
Each memory position button on the driver’s driver’s side, also wait for the steering
side can store all of the following settings: wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to
RSeat position move to the stored position.
RSteering wheel position i Releasing the memory position button
RExterior rear view mirrors’ position stops movement to the stored positions
immediately.
G Warning!
Controls in detail
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function while Lighting
driving could cause the driver to lose control Notes
of the vehicle.
i If you drive in countries with left-hand
Each memory position button on the front driving, you must have the headlamps
passenger side can store the setting of the modified for symmetrical low beams.
seat position. Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon

headlamps:
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increase
usable illumination over conventional
headlamps because they follow the
curvature of the road ahead. The beams of
the active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift to
either side according to the vehicle’s
steering angle and speed.
Storing positions into memory Exterior lamp switch

X Adjust the seats.
X On the driver’s side, also adjust the
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
X Press memory button M once and within
3 seconds press memory position button
1, 2 or 3.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.
1 W Standing lamps, left
2 X Standing lamps, right
Recalling positions from memory
3 $ Off
X Press and hold desired memory position Daytime running lamp mode
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has moved 4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode
to the stored position completely. On the Daytime running lamp mode
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 98
98 Lighting
5 T Parking lamps (also tail lamps, RInstrument panel lamps

license plate lamps, side marker RGreen indicator lamp L in the
lamps and instrument panel lamps) instrument cluster
6 L Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
headlamps
switch to position $.
7 N Front fog lamps
8 R Rear fog lamp
Automatic headlamp mode
Controls in detail
i The exterior lamps (except standing The following lamps come on and go out
lamps or parking lamps) go out automatically depending on the brightness of
automatically when you remove the the ambient light:
SmartKey from the starter switch or open RLow-beam headlamps
the driver’s door with the ignition switched
off. RTail lamps
When the parking lamps or the rear fog RParking lamps
lamp are switched on and you remove the RLicense plate lamps
SmartKey from the starter switch and open
RSide marker lamps
the driver’s door, an acoustic signal
sounds.
G Warning!
In addition the message Switch Off
If the exterior lamp switch is set to Ã, the
Lights appears in the multifunction
headlamps will not automatically come on
display.
under foggy conditions.
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate
lamp manually.
headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to
! Failure to switch off the parking lamps L when driving or when traffic and/or
when leaving the vehicle may result in a ambient lighting conditions require you to do
discharged battery. so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch
Low-beam headlamps from position Ã to L with the vehicle
at a standstill in a safe location. Switching
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on from Ã to L will briefly switch off the
and off with the exterior lamp switch. headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
X Switch on the ignition. ambient lighting conditions may result in an
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp accident.
switch to position L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid
The following lamps come on: to the driver. The driver is responsible for the
RLow-beam headlamps operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.
RTail lamps X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
RParking lamps switch to position Ã.
RLicense plate lamps
RSide marker lamps
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 99
Lighting 99
The following lamps come on and go out Canada only

depending on the brightness of the ambient With the exterior lamp switch in position
light with the SmartKey in starter switch $ or Ã, you cannot switch on the high-
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop beam headlamps.
button pressed once: The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
Rtail lamps X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
Rparking lamps switch to position L to permit activation
Controls in detail
Rlicense plate lamps of the high-beam headlamps.
Rside
When the engine is running, and you
marker lamps
Rshift from a driving position to neutral
When the engine is running, the low-beam
position N or park position P with the
headlamps will also come on and turn off
vehicle at a standstill, the low-beam
automatically.
headlamps will go out with a delay of
Canada only: High-beam headlamps are only 3 minutes
available with the exterior lamp switch in
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
position L.
T, the low-beam headlamps, the tail
and parking lamps, the license plate lamps
Daytime running lamp mode
and the side marker lamps come on
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. L, the manual headlamp mode has
In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode priority over the daytime running lamp
is deactivated by default. mode
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps come on
using the control system, see “Switching (Y page 97).
daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA
only)” (Y page 134). USA only
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position You can only switch on the high-beam
$ or Ã. headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.
When the engine is running, the low-beam The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
headlamps come on. X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
In low ambient lighting conditions, the switch to position L or Ã to permit
following lamps will come on additionally: activation of the high-beam headlamps.
RTail lamps When the engine is running, and you turn the
RParking lamps exterior lamp switch to position T or
L, the manual headlamp mode has
RLicense plate lamps priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
RSide marker lamps The corresponding exterior lamps come on
With the daytime running lamp mode (Y page 97).
activated and the engine running, you cannot
switch off the low-beam headlamps manually. Fog lamps
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position Ã.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 100
100 Lighting
G Warning! Combination switch

In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position Ã to L with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from Ã to L will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
result in an accident.
Controls in detail
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps

and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations Turn signals
regarding permissible lamp operation.
X Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow ; or ?.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position The corresponding turn signal indicator
T or L (Y page 97). lamp ! or # in the instrument
X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the cluster flashes.
exterior lamp switch to first stop. The combination switch resets automatically
The green indicator lamp N in the after major steering wheel movements.
exterior lamp switch comes on.
i To signal minor directional changes such
X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
as changing lanes, press the combination
exterior lamp switch to second stop.
switch only to point of resistance and
The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
release. The corresponding turn signal
green and the yellow indicator lamp R
lamps will flash three times.
in the exterior lamp switch come on.
X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
High beam
lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
its stop. X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
L (Y page 97).
Locator lighting and night security X Switching on: Push the combination
illumination switch in direction of arrow :.

The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp
Locator lighting and night security K in the instrument cluster comes on.
illumination are described in the “Control
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch
system” section, see “Switching locator
in direction of arrow = to its original
lighting on or off” (Y page 135) and
“Switching night security illumination position.
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or i Also note the information on high-beam
off” (Y page 135). headlamps with activated automatic
headlamp mode (Y page 98) or the daytime
running lamp mode (Y page 99).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 101
Lighting 101
High-beam flasher and

X Switching on: Pull the combination switch Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the
briefly in direction of arrow =. windshield with washer fluid five times
The counter resets when you switch off the
headlamps.
Hazard warning flasher For information on filling up the washer
The hazard warning flasher can be switched reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
Controls in detail
on at all times, even with the SmartKey cleaning system” (Y page 226).
removed from the starter switch.
The hazard warning flasher comes on
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps
automatically when an air bag deploys.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
improve illumination of the area in the
direction into which you are turning.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only operate
Rin low ambient lighting conditions
Rat vehicle speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h)
Rwith the front fog lamps switched off
Rwhen the engine is running
X Switching on: Press hazard warning
flasher switch :. Switching on
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
i With the hazard warning flasher activated L or Ã.
and the combination switch set for either or
left or right turn, only the respective left or X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
right turn signals will operate when the
(Y page 99).
ignition is switched on.
X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
X Switching off: Press hazard warning depending on whether you are turning left
flasher switch : again. or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on. If
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
you have switched on the turn signal for
activated automatically, press hazard
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
warning flasher switch : to switch it off.
other direction, the corner-illuminating
front fog lamp on the side of the turn signal
comes on.
Headlamp cleaning system
or
The headlamps will be cleaned with a high- X Turn the steering wheel in the desired
pressure water jet automatically when the direction.
engine is running and you have Driving forward: The front fog lamp on the
Rswitched on the headlamps side of your steering direction comes on.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 102
102 Lighting
Driving in reverse: The front fog lamp Interior lighting in the front
opposite to your steering direction comes
on.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the
steering angle, even if you did not switch on
either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating
front fog lamps came on automatically, they
Controls in detail
will also go out automatically depending on

the steering angle and vehicle speed.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
temporarily come on on both sides of the
vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one
direction and then again in the other direction
shortly thereafter.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
remains lit for a short time only. It then goes
out automatically.
Switching off : p Left front reading lamp on/off

X Switch off the left or right turn signal. ; v Rear interior lighting on/off
or = ~ Automatic control on/off
X Steer straight ahead. ? c Front interior lighting on/off
A p Right front reading lamp on/off
i There may be a brief delay before the
B Front interior lighting
corner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.
C Front reading lamps
D Front interior lighting
Automatic control
X Activating: Press button ~.
Button ~ disengages and sits flush with
the other buttons.
The interior lighting comes on when you
Runlock the vehicle
Rremove the SmartKey from the starter

switch (Interior Lighting Delayed
Shut-off must be switched on
(Y page 136))
Ropen a door
Ropen the tailgate
The interior lighting goes out after a short
time.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 103
Wipers 103
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps Second-row reading lamps

go out automatically after approximately
5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed
or in starter switch position 0.
X Deactivating: Press button ~.
Button ~ engages.
Controls in detail
Manual control
! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
extended period of time with the engine X Switching rear reading lamps on/off:
turned off could result in a discharged Press second-row reading lamp : where
battery. indicated by the arrow.
X Switching front interior lighting on/
Third-row reading lamps and interior
off: Press switch c.
lighting
X Switching rear interior lighting on/off:
Press switch v.
X Switching front reading lamps on/off:
Press respective switch p.
Emergency lighting
The interior lighting comes on automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Switching off:
X Press button ~.
: p Right third-row reading lamp on/off
or
; p Left third-row reading lamp on/off
X Press hazard warning flasher switch
= Left third-row reading lamp
(Y page 101).
? Rear interior lighting
or
X
A Right third-row reading lamp
Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
i The rear interior lighting is switched on
and off using the button on the front
Interior lighting in the rear overhead control panel (Y page 102).
! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
Wipers
extended period of time with the engine Notes
turned off could result in a discharged
battery. ! Do not operate the wipers when the
windshield/rear window is dry. Dust that
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 104
104 Wipers
accumulates on a windshield/rear window When you select intermittent wiping, the rain
might scratch the glass and/or damage the sensor is activated. The rain sensor sets a
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry suitable wiping interval depending on the
windshield/rear window. If it is necessary wetness of the sensor surface automatically.
to operate the wipers in dry weather
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an
conditions, always operate the wipers with
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
washer fluid.
taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will
Controls in detail
operate in the presence of water sprayed

Windshield wipers
on the windshield, and windshield wipers
X Observe notes on page (Y page 103). may be damaged as a result.
Switching on/off ! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on

the surface of the rain sensor or optical
effects may cause the windshield wipers to
wipe in an undesired fashion. This could
then damage the windshield wiper blades
or scratch the windshield. You should
therefore switch off the windshield wipers
when weather conditions are dry.
X Turn the combination switch to position
Ä or Å.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are controlled by the rain sensor
Combination switch automatically.
1 $ Windshield wipers off Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
2 Ä Slow intermittent wiping6 vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
3 Å Fast intermittent wiping7 opened. This protects persons getting into or
out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
4 ° Slow continuous wiping
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all
5 ¯ Fast continuous wiping
doors are closed and
B í Single wipe/ î Wiping with Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
washer fluid position D or reverse gear R
X Switch on the ignition. or
X Turn the combination switch to the desired Rthe wiper setting is changed using the
position, depending on the intensity of the combination switch
rain.
Intermittent wiping
Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet
weather conditions or in the presence of
precipitation.
6 Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.

7 Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 105
Wipers 105
Single wipe 3 Intermittent wiping

X Press the combination switch briefly in 4 Rear window wiper off
direction of arrow B to the resistance 5 Wiping rear window with washer fluid
point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid. X Turn rear window wiper switch : to the
desired position.
Controls in detail
Wiping with washer fluid
X Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow B past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with washer
fluid.
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with Rear window wiper indicator B appears in
washer fluid every now and then even when the lower multifunction display when the rear
it is raining. window wiper is activated.
For information on filling up the washer For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 226). cleaning system” (Y page 226).
For information on cleaning the headlamps
with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
system” (Y page 101). Problems with wipers
! If anything blocks the wipers (leaves,
snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.
Rear window wiper/washer
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a
X Observe notes on page (Y page 103). safe location, and
The rear window wiper engages automatically R- remove the SmartKey from the starter
when the automatic transmission is shifted switch
into reverse gear R with the windshield wipers
or
switched on.
- turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the
driver’s door open, starter switch is in
position 0, same as with SmartKey
removed from starter switch)
- engage the parking brake
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
RRemove blockage.
Combination switch RTurn the wipers on again.
: Rear window wiper switch
2 Wiping rear window with washer fluid
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 106
106 Power windows
If the windshield wipers fail to function at if the switch was pulled past the resistance
all with the combination switch in position point and released, by either pressing or
Ä or Å, pulling the respective switch.
Rset the combination switch to the next The closing of the hinged quarter windows can
higher wiper speed be immediately halted by pressing or pulling
Rhave
the switch.
the windshield wipers checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz If a window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path in a circumstance where you
Controls in detail
Center
are closing the windows by pressing and
holding button & on the SmartKey or by
Power windows pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside door handle,
Opening and closing the automatic reversal function will not
operate.
The door windows and the hinged quarter
windows are opened and closed electrically. Activate the override switch when children
The switches for all door windows and the are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
hinged quarter windows are located on the children may otherwise injure themselves,
driver’s door control panel. The switches for e.g. by becoming trapped in the window
the respective door windows are located on opening.
the front passenger door and the rear doors.
The hinged quarter windows can be operated G Warning!
from the driver’s seat only. Do not keep any part of your body up against
the window pane when opening a window. The
i Operating the rear door windows from downward motion of the pane may pull that
the rear is not possible when you activate part of your body down between the window
the override switch (Y page 62). pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. there is a risk of entrapment, release the
switch and pull it to close the window.
G Warning!
When opening or closing the windows, make i You can also open or close the windows
sure there is no danger of anyone being using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening
harmed by the opening/closing procedure. feature” (Y page 108) and “Convenience
The door windows are equipped with the closing feature” (Y page 108).
express operation and automatic reversal
function. If in express operation mode a door i After switching off the ignition or
window encounters an obstruction that removing the SmartKey from the starter
blocks its path, the automatic reversal switch, you can operate the windows until
function will stop the door window and open you open the driver’s or front passenger
it slightly. door. If no door was opened you can
The door windows operate differently when operate the windows for up to 5 minutes.
the switch is pulled and held. See the “Closing
when a door window is blocked” section in
this chapter for details.
The closing of a door window can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 107
Power windows 107
If the door window is blocked again and opens

slightly:
X Immediately after the door window was
blocked, pull and hold the respective
switch upward until the door window is fully
closed.
The door window closes without automatic
reversal function.
Controls in detail
G Warning!
Pulling and holding the switch to close the
door window immediately after it had been
Door windows
blocked two times will cause the door window
X Switch on the ignition. to close without any reversal function for as
X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold long as you hold the switch.
switch : to ? to the resistance point.
The corresponding window moves Hinged quarter windows
downward or upward until you release the
switch.
X Opening: Press switch A and release.
X Express operation: Press or pull Both hinged quarter windows open
switch : to ? past the resistance point completely.
and release.
X Closing: Pull switch A and release.
The corresponding window opens or closes
completely. Both hinged quarter windows close
completely.
X Stopping during express operation:
Press or pull the respective switch again. i When the obstruction sensor detects that
a hinged quarter windows is blocked during
Closing when a door window is blocked the closing process, they will stop and open
G Warning! slightly.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped X Halting closing process: Press or pull
and be seriously or even fatally injured when switch A once more during the closing
closing a door window with greater force or process.
without automatic reversal function. The hinged quarter windows will stop and
open completely.
If the upward movement of a door window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the i For your safety, the hinged quarter
door window will stop and open slightly. windows cannot be opened again until
X
4 seconds have passed.
Immediately after the door window has
stopped because it was blocked, pull and
hold the respective switch upward until the
door window is fully closed.
Synchronizing door windows
The door window closes with greater force. The door windows must be synchronized after
the battery has been disconnected or if the
door windows cannot be fully closed (express
operation).
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 108
108 Power windows
Each door window must be synchronized Vehicles with panorama roof with
separately. power tilt/sliding panel
X Close all doors. When roller sunblinds are extended:
X Press and hold button % on the
X Pull and hold switch :, ;, = or ?
SmartKey.
(Y page 107) until the respective door The vehicle unlocks.
window is closed. The windows open and the roller sunblinds
The door window opens again slightly.
Controls in detail
begin to retract after approximately

X Pull and hold the respective switch once 1 second.
more immediately until the door window is X With the windows opened and the roller
closed completely. sunblinds fully retracted, press and hold
X Hold the respective switch for button % on the SmartKey again.
approximately 1 second. The tilt/sliding panel opens.
The door window is synchronized.
X Release button % on the SmartKey to
interrupt the opening procedure.
Summer opening feature When roller sunblinds are retracted:
When the weather is warm, you can ventilate X Press and hold button % on the
the vehicle before driving off by SmartKey.
simultaneously The vehicle unlocks.
Ropening the door windows The windows and the tilt/sliding panel
opens after approximately 1 second.
Ropening the hinged quarter windows X Release button % on the SmartKey to
Ropening the tilt/sliding sunroof interrupt the opening procedure.
Ropening the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel and roller sunblinds
The summer opening feature can only be Convenience closing feature
activated via the remote control of the When locking the vehicle, you can
SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close simultaneously close
proximity to the driver’s outside door handle. Rthe door windows
X Aim the transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
Rthe hinged quarter windows
the driver’s outside door handle.
Rthe tilt/sliding sunroof
Vehicles without panorama roof with Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
power tilt/sliding panel panel
X Press and hold button % on the Afterward, you can extend the roller
SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/ sunblinds of the panorama roof with power
sliding sunroof have reached the desired tilt/sliding panel.
position. G Warning!
The vehicle unlocks. When closing the windows and the tilt/sliding
X Release button % on the SmartKey to sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/
interrupt the opening procedure. sliding panel, make sure there is no danger of
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 109
Power windows 109
anyone being harmed by the closing Vehicles with panorama roof with power
procedure. tilt/sliding panel
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows: When tilt/sliding panel is opened:
RRelease button & to stop the closing X Press and hold button & on the
procedure. To open, press and hold button SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/
%. To continue the closing procedure sliding panel are closed completely.
after making sure that there is no danger of X Press and hold button & on the
Controls in detail
anyone being harmed by the closing SmartKey again.
procedure, press and hold button &. The roller sunblinds extend.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: X Release button & on the SmartKey to
RRelease the lock button on the outside door

interrupt the closing procedure.
handle to stop the closing procedure. When tilt/sliding panel is closed:
RImmediately pull on the same outside door X Press and hold button & on the
handle and hold firmly. The windows and SmartKey until the windows and the roller
the tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof sunblinds are closed completely.
with power tilt/sliding panel will open for X Release button & on the SmartKey to
as long as the door handle is held but the interrupt the closing procedure.
door not opened.
With KEYLESS-GO
With SmartKey
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to located outside the vehicle within
the driver’s outside door handle. approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door.
X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the X Close all doors.
driver’s outside door handle.
Vehicles without panorama roof with
Vehicles without panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
power tilt/sliding panel
X Press and hold the lock button on an
X Press and hold button & on the outside door handle (Y page 73) until the
SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/ windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof are
sliding sunroof are closed completely. closed completely.
X Release button & on the SmartKey to X Release the lock button on the outside door
interrupt the closing procedure. handle to interrupt the closing procedure.
Vehicles with panorama roof with power

tilt/sliding panel
When tilt/sliding panel is opened:
X Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (Y page 73) until the
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 110
110 Driving and parking
windows and the tilt/sliding panel are Starting the engine

closed completely.
X Press and hold the lock button on an G Warning!
outside door handle again. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
The roller sunblinds extend. health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
X Release the lock button on the outside door monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
handle to interrupt the closing procedure. unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
Controls in detail
When tilt/sliding panel is closed: as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
X Press and hold the lock button on an If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
outside door handle (Y page 73) until the entering the vehicle while driving, have the
windows and the roller sunblinds are cause determined and corrected
closed completely. immediately. If you must drive under these
X Release the lock button on the outside door conditions, drive only with at least one
handle to interrupt the closing procedure. window fully open at all times.
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Safety notes
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
the objects could get caught between the : Button for selecting park position P
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
j Park position
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury. k Reverse gear
i Neutral position
G Warning! h Drive position
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering For more information on how to operate the
systems. In this case, it is important to keep gear selector lever, see “Automatic
in mind that a considerably higher degree of transmission” (Y page 115).
effort is necessary to brake and steer the X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. park position P.
The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P
(Y page 118).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 111
Driving and parking 111
With SmartKey
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X Gasoline engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 3 (Y page 79) and
release it.
The engine starts automatically.
X Diesel engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
Controls in detail
starter switch to position 2 (Y page 79).
Preglow indicator lamp % in the
instrument cluster comes on. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
X As soon as preglow indicator lamp % : USA only
goes out, turn the SmartKey in the starter ; Canada only
switch to position 3 and release it.
The engine starts automatically. X Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button is inserted in the starter switch
i If the engine is at operating temperature, (Y page 80).
preglow indicator lamp % may not stay
on and you can start the engine without i To start the engine with the SmartKey
preglowing. instead of the KEYLESS-GO function,
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
With KEYLESS-GO from the starter switch. Proceed as
described in “With SmartKey”
G Warning! (Y page 111).
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the X Depress the brake pedal during the starting
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave procedure.
children unattended in the vehicle, as they
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Gasoline engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do start/stop button once.
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, The engine starts automatically.
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A X Diesel engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO
child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could start/stop button once.
result in an accident and/or serious personal The engine preglows and starts
injury. automatically.
You can start your vehicle without the i If the engine is at operating temperature,
SmartKey in the starter switch using the the time the engine needs to preglow is
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. reduced.
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
Starting difficulties
! Remember that extended starting
attempts can drain the battery.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 112
The engine does not start. You can hear Driving off
the starter.
There could be a malfunction in the engine G Warning!
electronics or in the fuel supply system. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
Carry out the following steps:
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
X If you are starting the engine with the control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter this type of loss of control.
Controls in detail
switch to position 0 and repeat the starting

procedure. ! Do not run a cold engine at high engine
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS- speeds. Running a cold engine at high
GO: Close any doors that may be open to engine speeds may shorten the service life
allow for better detection of the SmartKey. of the engine. This is not covered by the
or Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
! If an acoustic warning sounds and the
message Release Parking Brake
X Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio
appears in the multifunction display when
signals from another source may be
driving off, you have forgotten to release
interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.
the parking brake.
X Repeat the starting procedure.
Release the parking brake.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts: ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Limited Warranty.
The engine does not start. You cannot
! Simultaneously depressing the
hear the starter.
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
The battery may not be charged sufficiently. reduces engine performance and causes
X Get a jump start (Y page 336). premature brake and drivetrain wear which
If the engine will not start despite a jump is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
start: Limited Warranty.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz i Once the vehicle is in motion, the
Center or call Roadside Assistance. automatic central locking function engages
The starter has been exposed to excessive and the locking knobs in the doors move
temperatures. down.
X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes. The automatic central locking function can
X Repeat the starting procedure. be switched off(Y page 137).
If the engine does not start after several Automatic transmission

starting attempts:
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz G Warning!
Center or call Roadside Assistance. It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 113
Driving and parking 113
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the Problems while driving
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose The engine runs erratically and misfires
control of the vehicle and hit someone or RGasoline engine: An ignition cable may be
something. Only shift into gear when the damaged.
engine is idling normally and when your right
RThe engine electronics may not be
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
operating properly.
Controls in detail
RGasoline engine: Unburned gasoline may
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R or park position P when the have entered the catalytic converter and
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the damaged it.
automatic transmission could be damaged. X Give very little gas.
X X Have the problem checked at an authorized
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever can now be used. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.
The coolant temperature is above
248‡ (120†)
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
park position P is only possible with the the engine.
brake pedal depressed.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
Without the brake pedal depressed, the
as possible.
gear selector lever can be moved up or
X Turn off the engine immediately.
down. However, the parking pawl remains
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
X Wait for the gear selection process to necessary (Y page 225).
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
In case of accident
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
X Release the brake pedal. If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. X Do not start the engine under any
After a cold start, the automatic transmission circumstances.
shifts at a higher engine speed. This allows X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
the catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or roadway.
the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to reach X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
its operating temperature earlier.
If the extent of the damage cannot be
For more information on driving, see “Driving determined:
instructions” (Y page 253).
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
If no damage on major assemblies, fuel
system, and engine mount can be
determined:
X Start the engine in the usual manner.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 114
Parking automatic transmission out of park position

P, either of which could result in an accident
G Warning! and/or serious personal injury.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system. These materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Controls in detail
Vehicle movement may result in serious

personal injury or damage to the vehicle or
vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do the
following before turning off the engine and
leaving the vehicle:
RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.
REngage the parking brake.
X Releasing: Pull on release handle :.
RShift the automatic transmission into park When the ignition is switched on or the
position P. engine is running, the brake warning lamp
RSlowly release the brake pedal. $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) in
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the
the instrument cluster goes out.
X Engaging: Step on parking brake
front wheels towards the road curb.
pedal ; firmly.
RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
When the engine is running, the brake
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from
warning lamp $ (USA only) or J
the starter switch, or press the KEYLESS-
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
GO start/stop button.
comes on.
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
Turning off the engine
Parking brake
G Warning!
G Warning! Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle has come to a complete stop. With the engine
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock not running, there is no power assistance for
up. You could lose control of the vehicle and the brake and steering systems. In this case,
cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s it is important to keep in mind that a
brake lights do not light up when the parking considerably higher degree of effort is
brake is engaged. necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
G Warning! i If the engine cannot be turned off as

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the described, see “Emergency engine
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with shutdown” (Y page 342).
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could position P.
release the parking brake and/or shift the X Engage the parking brake.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 115
Automatic transmission 115
i Always engage the parking brake in G Warning!

addition to shifting the automatic Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
transmission into park position P. only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically.
i Observe instructions if you want the
automatic transmission to remain in Always shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N, see “Remaining in park position P before turning off the engine.
neutral position N” (Y page 117). Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
Controls in detail
could result in an accident and/or serious
With SmartKey personal injury.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to i In an emergency you can turn off the
position 0. engine while driving by pressing and
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
switch. for approximately 3 seconds.
When you turn off the engine using the If you have started the engine with the
SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey from KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot
the starter switch or open a front door, the turn it off as described above:
automatic transmission will shift into park
position P automatically.
button from the starter switch.
G Warning! X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone The engine turns off. The starter switch is
only will shift the automatic transmission into in position 0 (Y page 79).
Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine. Automatic transmission
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
Introduction
personal injury. For information on driving with an automatic
transmission, see “Driving and parking”
With KEYLESS-GO (Y page 110).
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. G Warning!
With the driver’s door closed, the starter Make sure absolutely no objects are
switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
door opened, the starter switch is set to Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
position 0, same as the SmartKey removed obstacles. If there are any floormats or
from the starter switch (Y page 79). carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
When you turn off the engine using the still have sufficient clearance.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
front door, the automatic transmission will the objects could get caught between the
shift into park position P automatically. pedals. You could then no longer brake or
injury.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 116
116 Automatic transmission
! Allow the engine to warm up under low something. Only shift into gear when the
load use. Do not place full load on the engine is idling normally and when your right
engine until the operating temperature has foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
been reached.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ! Only shift the automatic transmission into
extended period when driving off on reverse gear R or park position P when the
slippery road surfaces. vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
This may cause serious damage to the automatic transmission could be damaged.
Controls in detail
engine and the drivetrain which is not

covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited ! The vehicle must be stopped when you
Warranty. shift the automatic transmission
Rdirectly between drive position D and
i During the brief warm-up, transmission reverse gear R
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or
Rdirectly between reverse gear R and
oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up drive position D
more quickly to operating temperature. Rdirectly into park position P
Otherwise the automatic transmission
could be damaged.
Gear selector lever
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle”
(Y page 119).
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Without the brake pedal depressed, the
gear selector lever can be moved up or
down, but the parking pawl remains
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission i The gear selector lever always returns to
: Button for selecting park position P its original position.
j Park position The current transmission position P, R, N,
k Reverse gear or D appears in the multifunction display
i Neutral position (Y page 118).
h Drive position
Shifting into park position P
G Warning! X With the vehicle at a standstill, press
It is dangerous to shift the automatic button : on the gear selector lever.
transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than SmartKey: When you turn off the engine using
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
the SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
from the starter switch or open a front door,
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
the automatic transmission will shift into park
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
position P automatically.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 117
KEYLESS-GO: When you turn off the engine G Warning!

using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and When leaving the SmartKey in the starter
open a front door, the automatic transmission switch, do not leave children unattended in
will shift into park position P automatically. the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch
G Warning! on the ignition which could result in
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone unsupervised use of vehicle equipment.
only will shift the automatic transmission into Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could
result in an accident and/or serious personal
Controls in detail
injury.
Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine. With SmartKey:
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
personal injury.
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
i Moving the gear selector lever up or down X Shift the automatic transmission into
shifts the automatic transmission out of neutral position N.

park position P. X Release the brake pedal.
Shifting into neutral position N X Switch off the ignition and leave the
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the SmartKey in the starter switch.
brake pedal. With KEYLESS-GO:
X Move the gear selector lever up or down to X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
the resistance point to select neutral X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
position N.
When you turn off the engine, the automatic X Shift the automatic transmission into park
transmission will shift into neutral position
position P.
N automatically.
X Release the brake pedal.
SmartKey: Removing the SmartKey from the
starter switch or opening a front door after
turning off the engine will shift the automatic button from the starter switch.
transmission into park position P X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
automatically. X Switch on the ignition.
KEYLESS-GO: Opening a front door after X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
turning off the engine will shift the automatic pressed.
transmission into park position P X Shift the automatic transmission into
automatically. neutral position N.
Remaining in neutral position N X Release the brake pedal.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral position N, e.g. when taking X Switch off the ignition and leave the
the vehicle through an automatic conveyor- SmartKey in the starter switch.
type car wash, observe the following
instructions.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 118
Shifting into reverse gear R X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
X Select program mode S.
brake pedal.
X Move the gear selector lever up past the X Do not limit the gear range.
resistance point. X Drive off carefully.
Effect
Shifting into drive position D
B Park position
Controls in detail
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the Shift the automatic transmission
brake pedal. into park position P only when the
X Move the gear selector lever down past the vehicle is stopped. The park position
resistance point. is not intended to serve as a brake
when the vehicle is parked. Rather,
the driver should always engage the
Shifting procedure parking brake in addition to shifting
The automatic transmission selects individual the automatic transmission into
gears automatically, depending on park position P to secure the
Rthe selected gear range (Y page 119) vehicle.
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
Rthe selected program mode C/S
malfunctioning, the automatic
(Y page 120)
transmission could remain locked in
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal park position P.
Rthe vehicle speed X Have the vehicle’s electrical
With drive position D selected, you can system checked at an authorized

influence transmission shifting by limiting or Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
extending the gear range. possible.
C Reverse gear
Transmission positions Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the
The current transmission position appears in vehicle is stopped.
the multifunction display.
: Transmission position indicator

If the current transmission position does not
appear in the multifunction display due to a
malfunction, for example, make sure that the
automatic transmission is in the desired
position.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 119
Effect Rocking the vehicle
A Neutral position Rocking the vehicle by shifting the automatic

transmission directly between drive position
No power is transmitted from the D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle
engine to the drive axle. When the stuck in mud or snow. The engine control
brakes are released, the vehicle can system of this vehicle electronically limits
be moved freely (pushed or towed). directly shifting the automatic transmission
To avoid damage to the between drive position D and reverse gear R
Controls in detail
transmission, never shift the to very low speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph
automatic transmission into neutral (9 km/h). To shift the automatic transmission
position N while driving. directly between drive position D and reverse
Exception: If the ESP® is switched gear R, move the gear selector lever up or
off or malfunctioning, shift the down past the resistance point.
automatic transmission into neutral
position N if the vehicle is in danger Working on the vehicle
of skidding.
G Warning!
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
When working on the vehicle, engage the
for any other reason with the parking brake and shift the automatic
automatic transmission in neutral transmission into park position P. Otherwise
position N can result in the vehicle could roll away which could result
transmission damage that is not in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Towing a trailer
7 Drive position
X When you tow a trailer, shift into a lower
The automatic transmission shifts
gear range manually if the automatic
automatically. All forward gears are
transmission hunts between gears on
available.
inclines.
A lower gear range and reduction of speed
reduces the potential to overload or to
Driving tips
overheat the engine.
Kickdown For more information on trailer towing, see
“Trailer towing” (Y page 256).
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X U.S. vehicles: Fully depress the Gear ranges
accelerator pedal.
With the automatic transmission in drive
Depending on the engine speed the
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
range, see “One-touch gearshifting”
gear.
(Y page 120).
X Canada vehicles: Depress the accelerator
pedal past the point of resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 120
The current gear range appears in the The current program mode appears in the
multifunction display. multifunction display.
Controls in detail
: Gear range indicator : Program mode indicator
Effect You should only change the program mode

when the automatic transmission is in park
= With this selection you can use the position P.
braking effect of the engine. The last selected program mode (C or S) is
5 Allows the use of the engine’s active when the engine is restarted.
braking effect when driving X Press the program mode selector switch
Ron steep downgrades repeatedly until the letter of the desired
program mode appears in the multifunction
Rin mountainous regions display.
Runder extreme operating
Selecting program mode C means:
conditions
RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both
4 For maximum use of the engine’s forward and reverse, except when driving
braking effect on very steep or off with full throttle.
lengthy downgrades. RTraction and driving stability are improved
on icy roads.
RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give
Automatic shift program
more gas. The engine then operates at
lower revolutions and the wheels are less
likely to spin.
Selecting program mode S means that
upshifts occur later.
One-touch gearshifting
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range using the steering wheel gearshift
Program mode selector switch control.
C Comfort For comfort driving
S Sport For standard driving
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 121
i If you press on the accelerator pedal

when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
the automatic transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limit

X Pull and hold right gearshift control ; until
Controls in detail
the gear range indicator disappears from
Steering wheel gearshift control The automatic transmission will shift from
the current gear range directly into drive
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel position D.
gearshift control when the automatic
transmission is in park position P, neutral
Shifting into optimal gear range
position N, or reverse gear R.
X Pull and hold left gearshift control :.
Limiting gear range The automatic transmission will select the
gear range suited for optimal acceleration
G Warning! and deceleration automatically. This will
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in involve shifting down one or more gears.
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent Emergency operation (limp-home
this type of loss of control. mode)
X Briefly pull left gearshift control :. If vehicle acceleration becomes less
The automatic transmission will shift into responsive or sluggish or the automatic
the next lower gear as permitted by the transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
shift program. This action simultaneously transmission is most likely operating in limp-
limits the gear range of the automatic home (emergency operation) mode. In this
transmission. mode only second gear and reverse gear R
can be selected.
i To avoid overrevving the engine when X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
downshifting, the automatic transmission X Shift the automatic transmission into park
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s
position P.
maximum speed would be exceeded.
X Turn off the engine.
Extending gear range X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.

X Restart the engine.
X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;.
The automatic transmission will shift into
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
the next higher gear as permitted by the
R.
shift program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the automatic X Have the automatic transmission checked
transmission. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as

soon as possible.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 122
122 Instrument cluster
Transfer case Rwarning/indicator lamps

Rmalfunction/warning messages
The vehicle is equipped with all-wheel drive
Rfailure of any systems
(4MATIC). Both the front and rear axles are
powered at all times when the vehicle is being Driving characteristics may be impaired.
operated. If you must continue to drive, do so with added
! Only conduct operational or performance caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such Benz Center as soon as possible.
Controls in detail

Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
system or the transfer case which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
! Because the ESP® operates

automatically, the engine and ignition must
: To dim instrument cluster illumination
dynamometer. Such testing should be no ; Reset button
longer than 10 seconds. = To brighten instrument cluster
Active braking action through the ESP® illumination
may otherwise seriously damage the brake For information on changing the instrument
system which is not covered by the cluster settings, e.g. the language, see
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. (Y page 132).
Instrument cluster Activating the instrument cluster

Introduction The instrument cluster is activated when you
Ropen the driver’s door
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster” Rswitch on the ignition
(Y page 28). Rpress button :, ; or =
G Warning!
i Opening the driver’s door or pressing
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
button :, ; or = without switching on
display is inoperative. the ignition activates the instrument
cluster illumination only for 30 seconds.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as
Rspeed
Routside temperature
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 123
Control system 123
Adjusting the instrument cluster Control system

illumination
Introduction
X To brighten illumination: Press and hold
button = until the desired level of The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 1 (Y page 79).
illumination is reached.
X To dim illumination: Press and hold
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
button : until the desired level of
vehicle settings.
Controls in detail
illumination is reached.
For example, you can use the control system
i The instrument cluster illumination is to find out when your vehicle is next due for
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit maintenance service, to set the language for
ambient light conditions. messages in the instrument cluster display,
The instrument cluster illumination will also and much more.
be adjusted automatically when you switch G Warning!
on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
i With the exterior lighting switched on, the conditions must always be his/her primary
brightness of the switches in the center focus when driving.
console will also be adjusted when using For your safety and the safety of others,
button : or =. selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit
Resetting trip odometer it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
X Make sure you are viewing the standard
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
display (Y page 126) in the multifunction
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
display.
14 m) every second.
X Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (Y page 122) until the The control system relays information to the
trip odometer is reset. multifunction display.
Tachometer Multifunction steering wheel

The red marking on the tachometer The displays in the multifunction display and
(Y page 29) denotes excessive engine speed. the settings in the control system are
controlled by using the buttons on the
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, multifunction steering wheel.
as it may result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
interrupted if the engine is operated within
the red marking.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 124
124 Control system
Press button briefly

& to move within a menu
* Within Audio/DVD menu to
select previous or next track,
scene or stored station
Within Telephone menu to
switch to the phone book and
Controls in detail
select a name or number
Press and hold button

& Within Audio/DVD menu to
* select previous or next track
with quick search or to select
previous or next station in
station list or wave band
Within Telephone menu to
start the quick search in the
phone book
: Multifunction display
; Press button Press button
6 to answer a call A to turn Voice Control System
off9, see separate operating
to dial8 instructions
to redial8
~ to end a call
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
to reject an incoming call the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel will alter what appears in the
Press button
multifunction display.
W to select submenus in the The information available in the multifunction
X Settings menu display is arranged in menus and
to set values accompanying functions and submenus.
to set the volume The individual functions are then found within
the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
Press button under Audio/DVD menu, for example).
? to turn Voice Control System These functions serve to call up relevant
on9, see separate operating information or to customize the settings for
instructions your vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
= Press button functions within each menu, as being
V to select next or previous menu arranged in a circular pattern.
U
8 Function only available in telephone menu.

9 Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 125
Control system 125
X Press button V or U repeatedly to = Transmission position/gear range

pass through each menu one after the indicator
other. ? Automatic transmission program mode
X Press button * or & repeatedly to indicator
pass through each function display, one A Outside temperature or digital
after the other, in the current menu. speedometer
In the Settings menu, instead of functions, For more information on menus displayed in
you will find a number of submenus for calling
Controls in detail
the multifunction display, see “Menus and
up and changing settings. For instructions on submenus” (Y page 126).
using these submenus, see “Settings menu”
(Y page 130).
The number of menus available in the system
depends on which optional equipment is
installed in your vehicle.
Multifunction display
: Trip odometer
; Main odometer
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 126
126 Control system
Menus and submenus

Controls in detail
i The headings used in the menus table are Function

designed to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical to E Trip computer menu (Y page 139)
those shown in the multifunction display.
F Telephone menu (Y page 140)
The first function displayed in each menu
will automatically show you which part of
the system you are in.
Standard display menu
Function
: Standard display menu
(Y page 126)
; Audio/DVD menu (Y page 128)
= Navigation menu (Y page 129)
? AIRMATIC/Compass menu Standard display
(Y page 129) In the standard display, trip odometer : and
main odometer ; appear in the
A Distronic menu (Y page 129)
B Vehicle status message X If you see another display, press button
memory10 menu (Y page 130) V or U repeatedly until the standard
C Settings menu (Y page 130) display appears.
X Press button & or * to select the
D Distance warning function menu
functions in the Standard display menu.
(Y page 138)
10 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 127
Control system 127
The following functions are available: The engine should not be operated with a
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning coolant temperature above 248‡
system (Y page 232) (Canada only) (120†). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
RChecking tire inflation pressure with the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Advanced TPMS (Y page 232) (USA only)
RChecking coolant temperature Calling up digital speedometer or
(Y page 127) outside temperature
Controls in detail
RCalling up digital speedometer or outside You can select whether the digital
temperature (Y page 127) speedometer or the outside temperature
RCalling up maintenance service indicator appears in the multifunction display
display (Y page 262) (Y page 133).
G Warning!
Checking coolant temperature The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
G Warning!
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Driving when your engine is overheated can
Indicated temperatures just above the
cause some fluids which may have leaked into
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
could be seriously burned.
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine the digital speedometer or the outside
if you see or hear steam coming from it. temperature appears in the multifunction
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from display.
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until

the coolant temperature appears in the
Digital speedometer
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-

and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
Outside temperature
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 128
128 Control system
Audio/DVD menu X Selecting next or previous stored

station: Press button * or & briefly
The functions in the Audio/DVD menu to select a stored station.
operate the audio or video equipment which
X Selecting next or previous station in the
you have currently switched on.
station list: Press and hold button * or
The following functions are available:
& to select a station.
RSelecting radio station (Y page 128) X Selecting next or previous station in
ROperating audio devices/audio media wave band (Only if no station list is
Controls in detail
(Y page 128) available): Press and hold button * or

ROperating video DVD (Y page 129) & to select a station.
If no audio equipment is currently switched You can only store new stations using the
on, the message AUDIO Off appears in the corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
multifunction display. separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
Selecting radio station You can also operate the radio in the usual
manner.
The HD Radio with SIRIUS Satellite Radio is
treated as a radio application. Operating audio devices/audio media
For more information on HD Radio with
X Switch on the COMAND system and select
SIRIUS Satellite Radio, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions. the audio device or audio media. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
Additional optional satellite radio equipment instructions.
and a subscription to a satellite radio service
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
provider are required for satellite radio
operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes- the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
Benz Center for details and availability for multifunction display.
your vehicle.
radio. Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
the currently tuned station appears in the
Example illustration
: Disc number
; Current track
X Selecting next or previous track: Press

button * or & briefly.
X Selecting a track from the track list
(quick search): Press and hold button
* or &.
: Wave band setting and stored memory
position The current track does not appear during
Audio AUX mode operation.
; Station frequency
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 129
Control system 129
Operating video DVD Please refer to separate COMAND system

operating instructions for instructions on how
to activate the route guidance system.
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
system operating instructions.
AIRMATIC/Compass menu
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
multifunction display. The AIRMATIC/Compass menu displays the
AIRMATIC messages and the direction into
Controls in detail
which you are currently driving.
one of the following messages appears in
Vehicles without AIRMATIC:
: Disc number
; Current scene
X Press button * or & to select a

scene.
Vehicles with AIRMATIC:

Navigation menu
The Navigation menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
the Navigation menu appears in the
The message shown in the multifunction
display depends on the status of the For information on AIRMATIC, see
navigation system: “AIRMATIC” (Y page 153).
RWith the COMAND system switched off, For information on the compass, see
the message NAVI Off appears in the “Compass” (Y page 216).
RWith the COMAND system switched on Distronic menu
but route guidance not activated, the
direction of travel and, if applicable, the Use the Distronic menu to display the
name of the street currently traveled on current settings for your Distronic system.
appear in the multifunction display. The information shown in the multifunction
RWith
display depends on whether the Distronic
the COMAND system switched on
system is activated or deactivated.
and route guidance activated, the
direction of travel and maneuver Please refer to the “Driving systems” section
instructions appear in the multifunction of this manual (Y page 145) for instructions
display. on how to activate Distronic.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 130
130 Control system
Vehicle status message memory For malfunction and warning messages,

menu see “Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display” (Y page 274).
Use the Vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning i After you have scrolled through all
messages that may be stored in the memory. recorded status messages, the first
Such messages appear in the multifunction recorded message appears again.
display and are based on conditions or Should the vehicle’s system record any
system status the vehicle’s system has
Controls in detail
conditions while driving, the number of

recorded. messages will reappear in the multifunction
The Vehicle status message memory menu display when the SmartKey in the starter
only appears if messages have been stored. switch is turned to position 0 or removed
G Warning! from the starter switch. With KEYLESS-GO,
the number of messages will reappear when
Malfunction and warning messages are only
you turn off the engine by pressing the
indicated for certain systems and are
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open the
intentionally not very detailed. The
driver’s door.
malfunction and warning messages are
simply a reminder with respect to the Except for high-priority messages, the vehicle
operation of certain systems. They do not status message memory will be cleared when
replace the owner’s and/or driver’s you switch off the ignition.
responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s
operating safety. Have all required
maintenance and safety checks performed on Settings menu
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized Introduction
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the
malfunction and warning messages. In the Settings menu there are two
functions: The function To reset, press
X Press button V or U repeatedly until reset button for 3 seconds, with which
the Vehicle status message memory you can reset all the settings to the original
menu appears in the multifunction display. factory settings and a collection of submenus
If conditions have occurred causing status with which you can make individual settings
messages to be recorded, the number of for your vehicle.
messages appears in the multifunction The following settings and submenus are
display. available in the Settings menu:
RResetting to factory settings
(Y page 131)
RSubmenus in the Settings menu
(Y page 131)
RInstrument cluster submenu
(Y page 132)
RTime/Date submenu (Y page 133)
X Press button & or *.
The stored messages will now be displayed RLighting submenu (Y page 134)
in the order in which they have occurred. RVehicle submenu (Y page 137)
RComfort submenu (Y page 137)
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 131
Control system 131
Resetting to factory settings Submenus in the Settings menu

You can reset the settings of all submenus to X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the factory settings. the Settings menu appears in the
For safety reasons, the function Lamp multifunction display.
Circuit Headlamp in the Lighting X Press button &.
submenu cannot be reset while driving. The collection of the submenus appears in
The following message appears in the the multifunction display. There are more
Controls in detail
multifunction display: submenus than can be displayed
Settings simultaneously.
Cannot be
completely reset
to factory settings
when engine is running.
the Settings menu appears in the
X Press button X.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
X Scroll down with button X, scroll up
with button W.
X With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use button & to access the
X Press the reset button in the instrument individual functions within that submenu.
cluster (Y page 122) for approximately X Once within the submenu, use button
3 seconds. & to move to the next function or button
* to move to the previous function
within that submenu.
X Use button W or X to change the
settings of the respective function.
The following lists show what settings can be
changed within the various menus. Detailed
instructions on making individual settings can
X Press the reset button once more. be found on the following pages.
The settings you have changed will not be
Instrument cluster submenu
reset unless you confirm the action by
RSelecting speedometer/odometer display
pressing the reset button a second time. After
approximately 5 seconds, the Settings mode (Y page 132) (Canada only)
menu reappears in the multifunction display. RSelecting digital speedometer display
mode (Y page 132)
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 132
132 Control system
RSelecting language (Y page 133) RSelecting language (Y page 133)

RSelecting display (digital speedometer or RSelecting display (digital speedometer or
outside temperature) for status indicator outside temperature) for status indicator
(Y page 133) (Y page 133)
Time/Date submenu Selecting speedometer/odometer

RSetting the time (Y page 133) display mode (Canada only)
Controls in detail
RSetting the date (Y page 134)

Lighting submenu multifunction display.
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on X Press button &.
or off (USA only) (Y page 134) X Move the selection marker with button
RSwitching locator lighting on or off W or X to the Instrument
(Y page 135) Cluster submenu.
RSwitching night security illumination X Press button & or * repeatedly until
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or the message Display Unit
off (Y page 135) Speedometer/Odometer appears in the
RSwitching
interior lighting delayed shut-off
The selection marker is on the current
on or off (Y page 136)
setting.
Vehicle submenu
RSwitching automatic central locking on or
off (Y page 137)
Comfort submenu
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 137)
RActivating/deactivating seat belt X Press button W or X to set
adjustment feature (Y page 138) speedometer/odometer unit to Km or
RSwitching fold-in function for exterior rear Miles.
view mirrors on or off (Y page 138)
Selecting digital speedometer display
mode
Instrument cluster submenu
Access the Instrument Cluster submenu the Settings menu appears in the
via the Settings menu. Use the multifunction display.
Instrument Cluster submenu to change X Press button &.
the instrument cluster display settings.
X Move the selection marker with button
The following functions are available: W or X to the Instrument
RSelecting speedometer/odometer display Cluster submenu.
mode (Y page 132) (Canada only) X Press button & or * repeatedly until
RSelecting digital speedometer display the message Display Unit Digital
mode (Y page 132)
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 133
Control system 133
Speedometer appears in the multifunction X Move the selection marker with button
display. W or X to the Instrument
The selection marker is on the current Cluster submenu.
setting. X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Status Line Display
appears in the multifunction display.
setting.
Controls in detail
X Press button W or X to set digital
speedometer unit to Km or Miles.
Selecting language
X Press button V or U repeatedly until X Press button W or X to select the
the Settings menu appears in the desired setting.
multifunction display. The selected display is then shown
X Press button &. continuously in the status indicator (lower
X Move the selection marker with button display).
W or X to the Instrument The other display now appears in the
Cluster submenu. Standard display menu (Y page 126).
the message Language appears in the Time/Date submenu
multifunction display. Access the Time/Date submenu via the
The selection marker is on the current Settings menu. Use the Time/Date
setting. submenu to change the time and date display
settings.
RSetting the time (Y page 133)
RSetting the date (Y page 134)
If your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND
system and navigation module, see separate
X Press button W or X to select the COMAND system operating instructions for
language to be used for the multifunction information on how to set the time and date.
display messages. Setting the time
Selecting display (digital speedometer or This function is not available if your vehicle is
outside temperature) for status indicator equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module.
X Press button &.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 134
134 Control system

X Press button &.
W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until Example illustration for setting the month
Controls in detail
the message Clock Set Hour or Clock

X Press button W or X to set the
Set Minute(s) appears in the
multifunction display. month, day, or year.
setting. Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle.
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
Example illustration for setting the hour
or off (USA only) (Y page 134)
RSwitching locator lighting on or off
X Press button W or X to set the hours (Y page 135)
or minute(s).
RSwitching night security illumination on or
Setting the date off (Y page 135)
This function is not available if your vehicle is RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off
equipped with the COMAND system and on or off (Y page 136)
navigation module.
Switching daytime running lamp mode on
or off (USA only)
multifunction display. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
X Press button &. the Settings menu appears in the

X Press button &.
W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
W or X to the Lighting submenu.
the message Date Set Month, Date Set
Day, or Date Set Year appears in the X Press button & or * repeatedly until
multifunction display. the message Daytime Running Lamps

The selection marker is on the current appears in the multifunction display.
setting. The selection marker is on the current
setting.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 135
Control system 135

RSide marker lamps
RFront fog lamps
The locator lighting goes out when the driver’s
door is opened.
If you do not open the driver’s door after
X Press button W or X to switch the unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the
Controls in detail
daytime running lamp mode On or Off. lamps will go out automatically after
With daytime running lamp mode switched on approximately 40 seconds.
and the exterior lamp switch in X Press button V or U repeatedly until
position $ or Ã, the low-beam the Settings menu appears in the
headlamps are switched on when the engine multifunction display.
is running. X Press button &.
In low ambient light conditions the following X Move the selection marker with button
lamps will come on additionally: W or X to the Lighting submenu.
RParking lamps X Press button & or * repeatedly until
RTail lamps the message Surround Lighting
RLicense
Function appears in the multifunction
plate lamps
display.
RSide marker lamps The selection marker is on the current
For more information on the daytime running setting.
lamp mode, see (Y page 99).
For safety reasons, changing the setting for
the daytime running lamp mode is not
possible while the vehicle is in motion.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Settings can only be made with
engine off. X Press button W or X to switch the
For safety reasons, resetting all the functions locator lighting function On or Off.
of all submenus to the factory settings while X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
driving (Y page 131) will not deactivate the Ã when exiting the vehicle.
daytime running lamp mode. The locator lighting feature is activated.
Switching locator lighting on or off
Switching night security illumination
With the locator lighting feature activated, the (Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on
exterior lamp switch in position Ã and the or off
interior lighting in automatic mode, the
Use this function to set whether you would
following lamps will come on during darkness
like the exterior lamps to remain on for
when the vehicle is unlocked using button
15 seconds during darkness after exiting the
% on the SmartKey:
vehicle and closing all doors.
RParking lamps
RTail lamps
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 136
136 Control system
With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature You can temporarily deactivate the
activated and the exterior lamp switch in headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
position Ã before the engine is turned off, X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
the following lamps will come on when the SmartKey in the starter switch to position
engine is turned off: 0.
RParking lamps X Then turn it to position 2 and back to
RTail lamps position 0.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
Controls in detail

deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as
RSide marker lamps you start the engine.
RFront fog lamps
Switching interior lighting delayed shut-
If, after turning off the engine, you do not off on or off
open a door or do not close an opened door, Use this function to set whether you would
the lamps will automatically go out after like the interior lighting to remain on for
60 seconds. 10 seconds during darkness after you have
X Press button V or U repeatedly until removed the SmartKey from the starter
the Settings menu appears in the switch.
multifunction display. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
X Press button &. the Settings menu appears in the
X Move the selection marker with button multifunction display.
W or X to the Lighting submenu. X Press button &.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until X Move the selection marker with button
the message Headlamp Delayed Shut- W or X to the Lighting submenu.
off appears in the multifunction display. X Press button & or * repeatedly until
The selection marker is on the current the message Interior Lighting
setting. Delayed Shut-off appears in the
setting.
X Press button W or X to switch the

headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or
Off.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position X Press button W or X to switch the
Ã before turning off the engine. interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is On or Off.
activated.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 137
Control system 137
Vehicle submenu The following functions are available:

Access the Vehicle submenu via the RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu (Y page 137)
to set the automatic central locking. RActivating/deactivating the seat belt
adjustment feature (Y page 138)
Switching automatic central locking on or
off RSwitching fold-in function for exterior rear
Use this function to switch the automatic view mirrors on or off (Y page 138)
Controls in detail
central locking on or off. With the automatic
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
central locking activated, the vehicle is
locked centrally at a vehicle speed of Use this function to activate and deactivate
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 92).
X Press button V or U repeatedly until G Warning!
the Settings menu appears in the You must make sure no one can become
multifunction display. trapped or injured by the moving steering
X Press button &. wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
X Move the selection marker with button activated.
W or X to the Vehicle submenu. To stop steering wheel movement do one of
the following:
the message Automatic Door Locking RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
appears in the multifunction display. RPress one of the memory position buttons.
RPress memory button M.
setting.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident

X Press button W or X to switch the the Settings menu appears in the
automatic central locking On or Off. multifunction display.
X Press button &.
Comfort submenu X Move the selection marker with button
Access the Comfort submenu via the W or X to the Comfort submenu.

Settings menu. X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Easy-entry Function
setting.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 138
138 Control system
Switching fold-in function for exterior

rear view mirrors on or off
Use this function to set the exterior rear view
mirrors to be folded in automatically when
you lock your vehicle.
With this function set to On and the exterior
rear view mirrors folded in using the button
X Press button W or X to activate (On) on the door control panel (Y page 95), the
Controls in detail
or deactivate (Off) the easy-entry/exit exterior rear view mirrors will not fold out
feature. when you switch on the ignition. You will then
have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors
Activating/deactivating seat belt using the button on the door control panel
adjustment feature (Y page 95).
Use this feature to set the seat belts to be Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
adjusted automatically with the driver’s or folded out completely before driving off.
front passenger seat belt fastened and the X Press button V or U repeatedly until
starter switch in position 2.
For more information on the seat belt multifunction display.
adjustment feature, see (Y page 51). X Press button &.
the Settings menu appears in the W or X to the Comfort submenu.
X Press button &.
the message Fold In Mirrors When
Locking appears in the multifunction
W or X to the Comfort submenu. display.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until The selection marker is on the current
the message Belt Adjustment appears in setting.
setting.

function On or Off.
X Press button W or X to active (On) or

deactivate (Off) the seat belt adjustment Distance warning function
feature.
In vehicles equipped with Distronic, you can
determine whether the distance warning
function is to be enabled or disabled. With this
function set to On, the system will alert you
when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 139
Control system 139
slower vehicle moving in your vehicle’s path RDistance to empty (Y page 140)
and the danger of a collision exists, even RCurrent fuel consumption (Y page 140)
when the Distronic is switched off.
When you enter the Trip computer menu,
you will always see the fuel consumption
the message Distance Warning appears statistics since start first.
in the multifunction display.
Fuel consumption statistics since start
setting.
Controls in detail
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the

distance warning function On or Off.
: Distance driven since start
; Time elapsed since start
= Average speed since start
? Average fuel consumption since start
All statistics stored since the last engine start
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
: Symbol for activated distance warning SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
function position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
If the distance warning function is switched Resetting will not occur if you turn the
on you will see the symbol Ä in the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this
Standard display. When the distance warning time period.
function is switched off the symbol Ä will
not appear. Fuel consumption statistics since last
reset
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
Trip computer menu
Use the Trip computer menu to call up multifunction display.
statistical data on your vehicle. X Press button & or * repeatedly until
The following information is available: the message From Reset appears in the
RFuel consumption statistics since start multifunction display.
(Y page 139)
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
(Y page 139)
RResetting fuel consumption statistics
(Y page 140)
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 140
140 Control system
: Distance driven since last reset

Controls in detail
; Time elapsed since last reset Current fuel consumption

= Average speed since last reset X Press button U or V repeatedly until
? Average fuel consumption since last reset the message From Start appears in the
Resetting fuel consumption statistics X Press button & or * repeatedly until
X
the message Consumption appears in the
Press button U or V repeatedly until
The current fuel consumption appears in
the reading that you want to reset appears
X Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster until the respective
values are reset to 0.
The fuel consumption statistics reset
automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.
Telephone menu
Distance to empty
G Warning!
X Press button U or V repeatedly until A driver’s attention to the road must always
the message From Start appears in the be his/her primary focus when driving. For
multifunction display. your safety and the safety of others, we
X Press button & or * repeatedly until recommend that you pull over to a safe
the message Range: appears in the location and stop before placing or taking a
multifunction display. telephone call. If you choose to use the
The calculated remaining driving range telephone while driving, please use the hands-
based on the current fuel tank level free device and only use the telephone when
appears in the multifunction display. weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
vehicle at the fuel pump C appears using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
instead of the remaining driving range. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
You can connect your telephone to the

COMAND system via Bluetooth®, see
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 141
Control system 141
separate COMAND system operating Dialing a number from the phone book
instructions.
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
X Switch on the COMAND system. you may select and dial a number from the
Refer to separate COMAND system phone book at any time.
operating instructions. X Press button U or V repeatedly until
X Press button U or V repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the
the message TEL appears in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
One of the following messages will appear the desired name appears in the
in the multifunction display: multifunction display.
RNo Service: No network is available.
If you press and hold button & or
RBluetooth Ready: The telephone has * for longer than 1 second, the system
not been connected to the COMAND scrolls rapidly through the list of names
system via Bluetooth® yet. until you release the button again.
X Connect the telephone to the The stored names are displayed in
COMAND system via Bluetooth®. alphabetical order.
RReady or name of the network provider
(if available): The telephone has found a
network and is ready for use. You can
operate it using the control system.
Answering a call
: Selected name from the phone book
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you can answer a call at any time. In the X Press button 6.
multifunction display you will then see the The control system dials the selected
following message, or if available, the caller phone number.
ID (number or name):
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
provider, the name of the party (if stored in
your phone book) you are calling will
appear in the multifunction display.
The control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
or
X Press button 6. X Press button ~ if you do not want to
You have answered the call. make the call.
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming

call
X Press button ~.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 142
142 Driving systems
Redialing Cruise control

The control system stores the most recently The cruise control maintains the speed you
dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the set for your vehicle automatically.
need to search through your entire phone The use of the cruise control is recommended
book. for driving at a constant speed for extended
X Press button U or V repeatedly until periods of time.
the message TEL appears in the The currently set speed or last set speed
Controls in detail
multifunction display. (“Resume” function) appears in the status

X Press button 6. indicator of the multifunction display:
The first number in the redial memory RUSA only: e.g. Cruise 55 Miles
RCanada only: e.g. ¯ 90 Km/h
the desired number or name appears in the G Warning!
multifunction display. The cruise control is a convenience system
X Press button 6. designed to assist the driver during vehicle
The control system dials the selected operation. The driver is and must always
phone number. remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
Driving systems and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a constant speed.
Introduction
RThe use of the cruise control can be
This section describes the following driving dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
systems of your vehicle: traffic because conditions do not allow safe
RCruise control driving at a constant speed.
RDistronic RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
RDistance warning function (only available
changes in tire traction can result in wheel
with Distronic)
spin and loss of control.
RHill-start assist system RDeactivate the cruise control when driving
RRear-axle level control in fog.
RAIRMATIC The “Resume” function should only be
RAll-wheel drive (4MATIC) operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
RParktronic system this particular preset speed.
RRear view camera
The driving safety systems ABS, BAS, EBP and
ESP® are described in the “Safety and
security” section (Y page 63).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 143
Driving systems 143
G Warning! The vehicle speed displayed in the

When the cruise control is braking, the brake speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
pedal is retracted (i.e. depressed setting for the cruise control system.
automatically). The pedals’ range of motion
must not be impeded by any obstacles: Setting current speed
RDo not place any objects in the footwell. X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
RMake
speed.
sure that the floormats and carpets
Controls in detail
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
are securely in place.
direction of arrow : or press in direction
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake
of arrow ;.
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
You could otherwise cause an accident and pedal.
injure yourself and/or others.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
the grade eases, the set speed will be
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed by braking with the
vehicle’s brake system. In addition, on
longer downhill grades the automatic
transmission will downshift automatically.
Canceling cruise control

: Setting current or higher speed X Depress the brake pedal.
; Setting current or lower speed or
= Canceling the cruise control X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
? Activating the cruise control or resuming direction of arrow =.
to last set speed The last set speed is stored for later use.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
Activating cruise control when the engine is turned off.
You can activate the cruise control at a The cruise control switches off automatically
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). when you depress the brake pedal or you
engage the parking brake.
You cannot activate the cruise control
The cruise control switches off automatically
Rwhen you brake and an acoustic warning will sound when
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park (30 km/h)
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral Rthe ESP® is in operation
position N
Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off
switch
due to a malfunction
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 144
144 Driving systems
Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
malfunction lever up to the resistance point in direction
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into of arrow :.
neutral position N while driving X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
control lever down to the resistance point
Observe additional messages in the
in direction of arrow ;.
multifunction display that may appear.
X Release the cruise control lever.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
Controls in detail
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief

accelerate or decelerate.
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
control will resume the last set speed. Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:
10 km/h) increments
Changing the set speed
i The set speed value is increased or
G Warning! decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment increments each time you lift or press the
until the vehicle has made the necessary cruise control lever up or down past the
adjustments. resistance point.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
a value that the prevailing road conditions and lever up past the resistance point in
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden direction of arrow :.
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others. control lever down past the resistance
point in direction of arrow ;.
You can increase or decrease the set speed X Release the cruise control lever.
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in The new speed is set and the vehicle will
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments. accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
When you use the cruise control lever to it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
decelerate, the brake system will brake the has reached the set speed.
vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. Setting stored speed (Resume
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: function)
1 km/h) increments G Warning!
i The set speed value is increased or The set speed stored in memory should only
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) be set again if prevailing road conditions and
increments each time you lift or press the legal speed limits permit. Possible
cruise control lever up or down to the acceleration or deceleration differences
resistance point. arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 145
Driving systems 145
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in You could otherwise cause an accident and
direction of arrow ?. injure yourself and/or others.
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored. G Warning!
X Remove your foot from the accelerator The Distronic is a convenience system. Its
pedal. speed adjustment reduction capability is
The last stored speed is deleted from memory intended to make cruise control more
when the engine is turned off. effective and usable when traffic speeds vary.
Controls in detail
It is not however, intended to, nor does it,
replace the need for extreme care.
Distronic The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
Safety notes importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe
When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise stopping distance, always remains with the
control increases the driving convenience driver.
afforded by the cruise control while traveling The Distronic cannot take street and traffic
on expressways and other major roadways. conditions into account. Complex driving
RIf the Distronic distance sensor detects a situations are not always fully recognized by
slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your the Distronic. This could result in wrong or
vehicle speed will be reduced so that you missing distance warnings.
follow that vehicle at your preset following
distance. G Warning!
The Distronic adaptive cruise control is not a
RIf there is no vehicle directly ahead of you, substitute for active driving involvement. It
the Distronic will function in the same way does not react to pedestrians or on stationary
as standard cruise control (Y page 142). objects, nor does it recognize or predict the
G Warning! lane curvature or the movement of preceding
vehicles.
The Distronic requires familiarity with its
operational characteristics. We strongly The Distronic can only apply 20% of the
recommend that you review the following maximum braking power of the vehicle.
information carefully before operating the It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
system. be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
conditions. Additionally, the driver must
G Warning! provide the steering, braking and other driving
When the Distronic is braking, the brake pedal inputs necessary to remain in control of the
is retracted (i.e. depressed automatically). vehicle.
The pedals’ range of motion must not be High-frequency sources such as toll stations,
impeded by any obstacles: speed measuring systems etc. can cause the
RDo not place any objects in the footwell. Distronic system to malfunction.
RMake sure that the floormats and carpets G Warning!
are securely in place. The Distronic cannot take road and traffic
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake conditions into account. Only use the
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped. Distronic if the road, weather and traffic
conditions make it advisable to travel at a
constant speed.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 146
146 Driving systems
G Warning! Distronic will also not respond to oncoming

Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on vehicles.
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction Switch off the Distronic:
can result in wheel spin and loss of control. Rwhen changing from the left to the right
The Distronic does not function in adverse lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in
sight and distance conditions. Do not use the the left lane
Distronic during conditions of fog, heavy rain,
Rwhen entering a turn lane or highway off
snow or sleet.
Controls in detail
ramp
G Warning! Rin complex driving situations, such as in
The Distronic cannot take weather conditions highway construction zones
into account. Switch off the Distronic or do In these situations, the Distronic will continue
not switch it on if: to maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or The Distronic is designed and intended only
ice. The wheels could lose traction while to maintain a set speed and keep a set
braking or accelerating, and the vehicle distance from moving objects in front of it.
could skid.
Rthe Distronic system sensor cover is dirty i This device has been approved by the FCC
or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
or fog, for example. The distance control sensor is intended for use in an automotive
system functionality could be impaired. radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
altering of the device will void any
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
warranties, and is not permitted by the
conditions even while the Distronic is
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able
any non-approved way.
to recognize dangerous situations until it is
too late. This could cause an accident in which Any unauthorized modification to this
you and/or others could be injured. device could void the user’s authority to
G Warning!
The “Resume” function should only be Distronic displays in the speedometer
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
G Warning!
Close attention to road and traffic conditions
is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not the Distronic is activated.
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed. When the Distronic is activated, one or two
The Distronic will not react to stationary cruise control speed segments come on
objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle around set speed :.
in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). The
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 147
Driving systems 147
The vehicle speed displayed on the Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
setting on the Distronic system. warning sound is intended as a final caution
in which you should intercede with your own
braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
operation of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking. This will result in
Controls in detail
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact being
avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
G Warning!
When the Distronic detects a vehicle directly The Distronic brakes your vehicle with a
ahead, the cruise control speed maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).
segments ; appear in the speedometer. This corresponds to approximately 20% of the
These segments represent the difference maximum deceleration of your vehicle.
between the set speed of your vehicle : and You must also apply the brakes yourself to
the speed of the preceding vehicle =. avoid a collision. The Distronic brakes the
If the Distronic calculates that there is a vehicle in an effort to restore the preset
danger of collision, the distance warning lamp distance or to maintain the set speed. The
· in the instrument cluster comes on and brake pedal is automatically applied as this
an intermittent warning sounds. happens which results in the brake pedal
X Immediately apply the brakes to avoid a
moving
collision. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
Under no circumstances should the driver including the area under the brake pedal.
await the intermittent warning sound Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
before braking. movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the Distronic system.
The intermittent warning sound ceases and
the distance warning lamp · goes out Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
when the necessary distance to the vehicle – your foot could become caught.
ahead is established again.
Distronic menu in the control system
G Warning!
An intermittent warning sounds and the Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the
distance warning lamp · in the instrument current settings for your Distronic system.
cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system The information shown in the multifunction
calculates that the distance to the vehicle display depends on whether the Distronic
ahead and your vehicle’s current speed system and/or the distance warning function
indicate that the Distronic will not be capable are activated or deactivated.
of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain i To activate or deactivate the Distronic
the preset following distance, which creates system, see (Y page 148) or see
a danger of a collision. (Y page 150).
To activate or deactivate the Distance
warning function, see (Y page 138).
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 148
148 Driving systems

one of the following two displays appears
Distronic deactivated
When the Distronic is deactivated, you will
see the standard Distronic display in the
Controls in detail
: Setting current or higher speed

; Setting current or lower speed
= Deactivating the Distronic
? Activating the Distronic or resuming to
the last set speed
: Preceding vehicle, if detected
; Actual distance to the preceding vehicle Activating Distronic
= Preset distance threshold to the
You can activate the Distronic when the
preceding vehicle
vehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h)
? Your vehicle and 110 mph (180 km/h).
When the Distronic is activated, one or two
Distronic activated cruise control speed segments around the set
When the Distronic is activated :, you will speed in the speedometer dial are
see the set speed ; in the multifunction illuminated. The multifunction display will
display for approximately 5 seconds. The show a message such as
following display appears in the multifunction DISTRONIC 55 MPH
display. (Canada: DISTRONIC 90 km/h).
After approximately 5 seconds the currently
set speed appears in the status indicator of
the multifunction display:
RUSA only: e.g. DTR 55 Miles
RCanada only: e.g. DTR 90 km/h
If the Distronic is not activated after the
cruise control lever is pulled in direction of
After approximately 5 seconds the currently
arrow ? (Y page 148), you will see the
set speed ; appears in the status indicator
of the multifunction display: message DISTRONIC Off in the
DTR XXX Miles
In the following cases you cannot activate the
Cruise control lever Distronic:
Rup to 2 minutes after starting the engine
The Distronic system is operated by means of
the cruise control lever. Rwhen you brake
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 149
Driving systems 149
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park When you use the cruise control lever to
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral decelerate, the brake system will brake the
position N vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
Rwhen the ESP® is switched off or has
switched off due to a malfunction Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
The vehicle speed displayed on the 1 km/h) increments
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed i The set speed value is increased or
Controls in detail
setting on the Distronic system. decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments each time you lift or press the
Setting the current speed cruise control lever up or down to the
X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired resistance point.
speed. X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in lever up to the resistance point in direction
direction of arrow : or depress in of arrow : (Y page 148).
direction of arrow ; (Y page 148). X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
X Remove your foot from the accelerator control lever down to the resistance point
pedal. in direction of arrow ; (Y page 148).
i If you do not take your foot off of the
accelerator pedal and continue to The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate past the set speed, the following accelerate or decelerate.
message will appear in the multifunction
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:
display:
10 km/h) increments
DISTRONIC Override
The distance to a slower moving vehicle in i The set speed value is increased or
front of you will not be set. Your vehicle decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
speed will then be determined only by the increments each time you lift or press the
accelerator pedal position. cruise control lever up or down past the
resistance point.
Changing the set speed X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
lever up past the resistance point in
G Warning!
direction of arrow : (Y page 148).
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
until the vehicle has made the necessary
adjustments.
control lever down past the resistance
point in direction of arrow ;
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
(Y page 148).
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration The new speed is set and the vehicle will
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
or serious injury to you and others. it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
has reached the set speed.
You can increase or decrease the set speed
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 150
150 Driving systems
Setting stored speed (Resume function) Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
G Warning!
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions and
neutral position N while driving
legal speed limits permit. Possible The cruise control speed segments in the
acceleration or deceleration differences speedometer dial goes out and an acoustic
arising from returning to the preset speed warning will sound. Observe additional
Controls in detail
could cause an accident and/or serious injury messages in the multifunction display that
to you and others. may appear.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in G Warning!

direction of arrow ? (Y page 148). Distronic switches off and releases the brakes
If no speed is stored, the current speed is when the vehicle decelerates below the
set and stored. minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) by
operation of the system. At that time the
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
driver must apply the brakes in order to
pedal.
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a
stop.
Deactivating Distronic
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
X Depress the brake pedal. deactivate the Distronic. After a brief
or acceleration (e.g. for passing), the Distronic
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in will resume the last set speed.
direction of arrow = (Y page 148).
The cruise control speed segments in the Setting the following distance in
speedometer dial will go out and the Distronic
following message appears briefly in the
You can set the specified following distance
multifunction display: DISTRONIC Off
for Distronic by varying the time setting
The last set speed is stored for later use. between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time
The last stored speed is deleted from memory setting and the current speed of your vehicle,
when the engine is turned off. Distronic calculates and sets the required
The Distronic switches off automatically following distance to the preceding vehicle.
when you depress the brake pedal or you The set distance will be shown in the
engage the parking brake. In this case, the multifunction display.
cruise control speed segments in the
speedometer dial will go out. G Warning!
The Distronic also switches off automatically It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
when select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph style and applicable laws and driving
(30 km/h) recommendations for safe following distance.
Rthe ESP® is in operation
Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 151
Driving systems 151
The Distronic regulates only the distance

between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it, but does not register stationary
objects in the road, e.g.:
Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
Ra disabled vehicle
Ran oncoming vehicle
Controls in detail
The driver must always be alert, observe all
traffic and intercede as required by means of
steering or braking the vehicle.
X Increasing distance: Turn distance
setting switch : in direction of arrow =. G Warning!
Increasing the distance setting tells The Distronic should not be used in snowy or
Distronic to maintain a greater following icy road conditions.
distance to the preceding vehicle.
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
X Decreasing distance: Turn distance system is a dirty Distronic system sensor
setting switch : in direction of arrow ;. cover (located in the hood grille), especially
Decreasing the distance setting tells at times of snow and ice or heavy rain.
Distronic to maintain a shorter following In such a case, the Distronic will switch off,
distance to the preceding vehicle. and the message DISTRONIC Currently
Unavailable – See Operator’s Manual
Driving with Distronic appears in the multifunction display.
This section describes a number of driving For cleaning and care of the Distronic system
situations where special precaution is sensor cover, see (Y page 265).
required on the part of the driver. Be prepared i If the message DISTRONIC Available
to brake in such situations. Braking will Again appears during driving, the dirt (e.g.
deactivate the Distronic system. slush) has dissolved; the Distronic works
G Warning! again, if you reactivate it (Y page 148).
The Distronic works to maintain the speed Turns and bends
selected by the driver unless a moving
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g.
following another vehicle ahead of you at your
set distance).
This means that:
RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after
you have changed lanes.
RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, the Distronic
could lose sight of the preceding vehicle.
In turns or bends, the Distronic may not
Your vehicle could then accelerate to the
detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may
previously selected speed.
detect one too soon. This may cause your
vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 152
152 Driving systems
Offset driving have not yet been detected by the Distronic.

There will be insufficient distance to the
preceding vehicles.
Distance warning function

This function warns you at a vehicle speed of
above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) in
the following cases:
Controls in detail
RAt the current speed, the distance between

your vehicle and the preceding vehicle is
too low for several seconds. The distance
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from warning lamp · in the instrument
your direct line of travel may not be detected cluster comes on.
by the Distronic. There will be insufficient RYou are gaining on a preceding vehicle
distance to the preceding vehicle. rapidly. An intermittent warning sounds
and the distance warning lamp · in the
Lane changing
instrument cluster comes on.
If these warnings are issued, you must apply
the brakes to maintain a safe distance and
avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle.
When depressing the brake pedal, the
warning sound ceases. The warning sound
will also cease when the distance to the
preceding vehicle is sufficient again without
applying the brakes. In this case, the distance
warning lamp · will also go out.
G Warning!
The Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
If the distance warning lamp · in the
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
instrument cluster comes on while driving
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
Narrow vehicles immediate attention on the part of the driver
is required. As required by the traffic
situation, apply the brakes and navigate
around a possible obstacle. However, do not
drive by relying on the distance warning
function, as this will result in an emergency
braking application. This will not always
enable you to avoid a collision, especially
when traveling on varying road surface
conditions and with varying driver reaction.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the distance warning
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles function. This could result in wrong or missing
traveling near the outer edges of the lane distance warnings.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 153
Driving systems 153
X Activating/deactivating: Activate or vehicle level at the rear axle constant,

deactivate the distance warning function in independent of the load.
the control system (Y page 138). i Observe the information on towing a
When activated, the distance warning
trailer, see “Trailer towing” (Y page 256).
function indicator Ä appears in the
AIRMATIC
Controls in detail
Hill-start assist system The AIRMATIC lets you select the chassis and
suspension setup. The chassis and
G Warning! suspension setup adjusts the damping
The hill-start assist system is not designed to behavior and the ride height for your vehicle.
function as a parking brake. It does not The AIRMATIC consists of two components.
prevent the vehicle from moving when parked The Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
on an incline. (Y page 153) and the vehicle level control
Always engage the parking brake in addition (Y page 154).
to shifting the automatic transmission into
park position P.
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
On uphill grades, the hill-start assist system
maintains the pressure in the brake system The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) is
for approximately 1 second after you have controlled electronically and operates
released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can continuously. It adjusts the damping
start off smoothly without the vehicle moving characteristics to the current operating and
immediately after releasing the brake pedal. driving conditions. The damping is adjusted
individually for each wheel. Driving safety and
X Depress the brake pedal.
tire comfort are increased.
The fine tuning of the damping is dependent
position D or reverse gear R. on:
X Release the brake pedal.
Ryour driving style
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
Rroad surface conditions
The hill-start assist system is inactive
Ryour personal settings
Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
grades
Rwith the automatic transmission in neutral
position N
Rwith the parking brake engaged
Rif the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Rear-axle level control

The rear-axle level control adjusts the vehicle The following settings are available:
level for the rear axle. The rear-axle level
RAUTO (for normal driving situations)
control is beneficial because it keeps the
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 154
154 Driving systems
Indicator lamps ; and = are off. is opened and will continue after the door is
RSPORT (for sporty driving) closed again.
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
! Keep in mind that on rough or uneven
RCOMF (for comfort driving)
roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level
Indicator lamp = comes on. may cause the vehicle underbody to come
X Start the engine. in contact with the road and result in
X Press ADS switch : repeatedly until the damage to the vehicle underbody. Always
Controls in detail
desired suspension tuning is reached. make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground
clearance before adjusting it to a lower
The setting remains stored when you turn off
level.
the engine.
! Before jacking up the vehicle with
equipment that lifts one or more of the
Vehicle level control wheels completely off of the ground,
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride remove the SmartKey from the starter
height. switch.
The all-around vehicle level control provides
i The activation threshold is defined by the
best possible suspension and constant
ADS setting (Y page 153).
ground clearance. The vehicle lowers at high
speed automatically in order to increase
driving safety and to reduce fuel
consumption.
Changes to the vehicle level should be made
while the vehicle is moving. The vehicle will
then reach the set level as fast as possible.
When you park the vehicle and the ambient
temperature changes, the vehicle level may
change visibly. When the temperature drops,
the vehicle lowers. When the temperature
rises, the vehicle raises.
The vehicle begins adjusting to the set vehicle Basic settings
level as soon as the doors or tailgate are
unlocked or opened or closed with the vehicle The following vehicle chassis ride heights can
unlocked. be selected using vehicle level control
For major changes in vehicle level, the engine switch : in the center console:
must be running. Level Driving situation
G Warning! Raised level For driving on rough roads.
Make sure no one is near the wheel housing Indicator lamp ; is on.
or under the vehicle when you lower the
vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs could Highway For driving on paved roads
become wedged into or under the vehicle. level in fair or better condition.
For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be Indicator lamp ; is off.
lowered with all doors and the tailgate closed.
Lowering is interrupted if a door or the tailgate
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 155
Driving systems 155
i The third available level is the highspeed When indicator lamp ; is off:
level that is set automatically. X Press switch :.
The following is the approximate change in Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle
ride height for each of the level settings: adjusts to the raised level.
Level Ride height The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
Raised level +1.97 in (50 mm) being set:
Controls in detail
Highway +/-0 in (0 mm)
level
Highspeed -0.78 in (-20 mm)
level
i The vehicle is lowered to the highspeed

level automatically if the vehicle speed is i The message can be cleared by pressing
above 70 mph (112 km/h) or if the vehicle the V, U, & or * button on
speed stays between 60 mph (96 km/h) the multifunction steering wheel.
and 70 mph (112 km/h) for
approximately 20 seconds. When the raised level is reached, indicator
lamp ; comes on continuously and the
i The highspeed level is not available when following message appears in the
towing a trailer. For more information on multifunction display for approximately
towing a trailer, see “Trailer towing” 5 seconds:
(Y page 256).
i Obey local speed limits. Use prudent

driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.
Raised level
Only select the raised level if appropriate for The vehicle level is set to highway level
the driving situation encountered. Otherwise automatically when the vehicle speed is
the fuel consumption may increase and/or exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h).
the handling characteristics of the vehicle
may be unfavorable. Highway level
i You can select the raised level at speeds ! Keep in mind that on rough or uneven
up to 25 mph (40 km/h). At higher speeds, roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level
the message Á Level Selection may cause the vehicle underbody to come
Not Permitted appears in the in contact with the road and result in
multifunction display. damage to the vehicle underbody. Always
make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground
X Start the engine.
clearance before adjusting it to a lower
level.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 156
156 Driving systems
X Close all doors and the tailgate. improves traction in conjunction with the
X Start the engine. ESP® (Y page 65) and the Electronic Traction
System (4-ETS) (Y page 65).
When indicator lamp ; is on:
X Press switch :. G Warning!
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient
traction:
adjusts to the highway level.
RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as
The following message appears in the
Controls in detail
multifunction display while the level is possible.

being set: RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents
resulting from excessive speed.
i The message can be cleared by pressing
the V, U, & or * button on ! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so
the multifunction steering wheel. could damage the transfer case, which is
When the highway level is reached, indicator not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
lamp ; goes out and the following message Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the
ground. Observe instructions for towing the
appears in the multifunction display for
vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
approximately 5 seconds:
! Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
system and/or the transfer case which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
The vehicle level raised from highspeed level Warranty.
to highway level automatically when the
vehicle speed falls below 40 mph (64 km/h). i In winter operation, the maximum
In the raised level, the vehicle level is lowered effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only
to the highway level automatically when the achieved with winter tires (Y page 251) or
vehicle speed is exceeding 25 mph snow chains as required.
(40 km/h).
Parktronic system
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) The Parktronic system is an electronic
In vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC), parking aid with ultrasonic sensors designed
both axles are powered at all times when the to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
vehicle is being operated. The 4MATIC The Parktronic system indicates the relative
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 157
Driving systems 157
distance between the vehicle and an obstacle parking and other critical maneuvers always
visually and audibly. remains with the driver.
The Parktronic system is activated
automatically when G Warning!
Ryou switch on the ignition Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
and
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
Ryou release the parking brake injured.
Controls in detail
and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive ! Special attention must be paid to objects
position D, reverse gear R, or neutral with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
position N (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds objects may not be detected by the system
above approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At and can damage the vehicle.
lower speeds, the Parktronic system
During parking maneuvers, pay special
activates again.
attention to objects located above or below
The Parktronic system also deactivates when the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,
you shift the automatic transmission into painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
park position P or engage the parking brake. Parktronic system will not detect such
The Parktronic system monitors the objects at close range and damage to your
surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors vehicle or the object may result.
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper. ! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of
the Parktronic system.
Range of the sensors
To function properly, sensors : must be free

of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
sensors : regularly. Be careful not to
scratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaning
the driving systems sensors” (Y page 265).
G Warning!
The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the need
for extreme care. The responsibility during
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 158
158
Controls in detail Driving systems
Front area warning indicators

Front sensors
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) Rear area warning indicators
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for left
If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle side : and right side ; of the vehicle. The
in this range, all the distance warning Parktronic system is ready to measure when
segments illuminate and you hear a warning the yellow readiness indicators = are
signal. If the obstacle is closer than the illuminated.
minimum distance, the actual distance may The current transmission position determines
no longer be indicated by the Parktronic which warning indicator will be activated.
system.
Current Warning indicator
Warning indicators transmission
position
Visual signals indicate the relative distance
between the sensors and an obstacle. D Front area activated
R or N Front and rear area
activated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one or

more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 159
Driving systems 159
RFront area: An intermittent acoustic Trailer towing

warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds
The rear Parktronic sensors will be
will sound as the first red distance segment
deactivated when you have established the
illuminates. A constant acoustic warning
electrical connection between your vehicle
lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound
and the trailer you are about to tow.
for the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic ! The distance between the sensors in the
transmission is shifted into park bumpers and an obstacle is referred to as
Controls in detail
position P or the parking brake is engaged. the minimum range of the Parktronic. A
RRear area: An intermittent acoustic trailer hitch will reduce the distance to an
warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds obstacle. Keep this in mind to avoid any
will sound as the first red distance segment damage.
illuminates. A constant acoustic warning
lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound Parktronic system malfunction
for the second red distance segment. The There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
signal is canceled when the automatic system, if only the red distance segments
transmission is shifted into drive illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds.
position D, or park position P, or the The Parktronic system will switch off
parking brake is engaged. automatically after 20 seconds and indicator
lamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on.
Switching the Parktronic system on/ X Have the Parktronic system checked at an
off authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
The Parktronic system switches on as possible.
automatically when the ignition is switched If only the red distance segments illuminate
on. and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,
ice, snow and slush). Another cause could be
interference from other radio or ultrasonic
signals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers). The Parktronic system will
switch off automatically after 20 seconds and
indicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch :
comes on.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(Y page 265).
X Switching off: Press Parktronic X Switch on the ignition.
switch :. or
Indicator lamp ; comes on. X Check the Parktronic system operation at
X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch : another location to rule out interference
again. from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
Rear view camera

The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 160
160 Driving systems
The area behind the vehicle appears in the Rthe immediate surroundings are
COMAND system display as a mirror image, illuminated with fluorescent light (the
like in the rear view mirror. display may flicker)
In addition, the rear view camera contains Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,
guidelines to help you with driving in reverse. e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from
G Warning! the cold (lens condensation)
Make sure no persons or animals are in or Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered
Controls in detail
near the area in which you are parking/ Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
In this case, have the position and setting
injured.
of the camera checked by a qualified
G Warning! specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you contact a Mercedes-
The rear view camera is only an aid and may
Benz Center for this purpose.
display obstacles
Rfrom
Do not use the rear view camera in these
a distorted perspective
situations. Otherwise you could injure
Rinaccurately yourself or others and/or damage property
Rmay not display obstacles at all including your vehicle while parking/
maneuvering.
The rear view camera does not relieve you of
the responsibility to be cautious. Take care G Warning!
and pay careful attention. The rear view
Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if
camera may not show objects which are
you are color-blind or have impaired color
Rvery close to the rear bumper vision.
Runder the rear bumper Only use rear view camera if you can see and
Rabove
distinguish all colored guidelines shown by
the tailgate handle
rear view camera on the COMAND system
You are responsible for safety at all times and display.
must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
you could endanger yourself and/or others.
G Warning!
The rear view camera either will not function
or will not function to its full capability if
Rthe tailgate is open
Rit is raining very hard, snowing or foggy

Rit is night or you are parking/maneuvering Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice,
your vehicle in an area where it is very dark snow, and slush to function properly. Clean
Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white the camera lens regularly. Being careful not
light to scratch or damage the camera lens, see
“Cleaning the rear view camera lens”
(Y page 266).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 161
Driving systems 161
Switching on/off Red guideline = indicates an approximate

X
distance of 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
Switching on: Switch on the ignition.
vehicle. Yellow guidelines ; indicate an
X Switch on the COMAND system. approximate distance of 3 ft (1 m) from the
X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse rear of the vehicle. Blue guidelines :
gear R. indicate the approximate width required for
The COMAND system display will show the the vehicle.
area behind the vehicle with guidelines.
i The image from the rear view camera will
Controls in detail
G Warning! no longer be displayed if you select another
Please note that objects which do not touch function on the COMAND system while
the ground may appear to be further away reverse gear R is engaged. To display the
than they actually are, for example: image again, disengage and reengage
Rthe
reverse gear R.
bumper of a vehicle parked behind you
Ra trailer hitch X Switching off: Shift the automatic
Rthe
transmission into park position P, neutral
back of a truck
position N, or drive position D.
In such cases, you should not use the
guidelines to judge the distance. You may
misjudge the distance which increases the
risk of impacting the objects.
Even when the object you approach is directly
on the ground do not approach the object any
closer than the red guideline.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 162
162 Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Your vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
Climate control (Y page 164) 3-zone automatic climate control
Controls in detail
USA only (Y page 170)
Canada only (Y page 172)

The climate control combines an automatic The 3-zone automatic climate control
heating and ventilation system with a cooling combines an automatic heating and
system. You can adjust the automatic ventilation system with a cooling system.
climate control separately for the driver’s You can adjust the 3-zone automatic climate
and passenger side. control separately for each zone in the
vehicle.
Rear automatic climate Air vents

control (Y page 174)
G Warning!
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature). This
may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
The rear automatic climate control allows vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
separate climate settings for the rear area of unprotected skin.
compartment.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 163
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents 163
For best possible performance of the climate Side air vents

control:
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris.
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from
obstruction.
Controls in detail
i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.
Example illustration driver’s side
Center air vents : Left side defroster air vent, fixed
; Left side air vent, adjustable
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left side air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel =
upward or downward.
Rear center console air vents
: Left center air vent, adjustable

; Right center air vent, adjustable
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable right center air vent
? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left center air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =
and ? upward or downward. : Rear climate control panel
; Right rear center air vent, adjustable
= Left rear center air vent, adjustable
When the front climate control panel is
switched on or off, the air supply through the
rear center air vents is also switched on or
off.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 164
164 Climate control
B-pillar air vents Air vents below rear quarter windows

Controls in detail
Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control
(second row) only (second and third row) only
: Side air vent, adjustable : Defrost air vent for rear quarter window,
; Thumbwheel for air volume control fixed
; Air vent, adjustable
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel ; to = Thumbwheel for air volume control
the left or to the right.
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel =
upward or downward.
Climate control
Control panel
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 165
Climate control 165
Function Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature control, driver’s i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 168)
side (22†).
; Air distribution and air volume i Switches on the automatic (Y page 167)
(automatic mode) mode. The indicator lamp in
button Ã comes on.
Controls in detail
= Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 168)
only until the windshield or the
side windows are clear again.
? Increasing air volume (Y page 168)
A Air distribution (directs air (Y page 168)
through the windshield and side
air vents)
B AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 167)
conditioning. The indicator
lamp in button Á comes
on.
Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 170)
is possible to continue to heat
or ventilate the interior.
C Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 168)
side (22†).
D ± Rear climate control on/
off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off
(USA only)
^ Rear climate control on/
off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off
(Canada only)
E Air distribution (directs air (Y page 168)
through center and side air
vents)
F Air distribution (directs air (Y page 168)
through the footwells and side
air vents)
G Air volume display
H Decreasing air volume (Y page 168)
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 166
166 Climate control
I Rear window defroster (Y page 180)
J Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 169)
short time, e.g. in a tunnel.
Otherwise, the windows can
fog up due to lack of fresh air.
Controls in detail
K Interior temperature sensor

L Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate (Y page 166)
control system. The indicator
lamp in button ^ goes out.
Notes on climate control impairing visibility and endangering you and

others.
The climate control is operational whenever
the engine is running. You can operate the Keep the air intake grille in front of the
climate control system in either the windshield free of snow and debris.
automatic or manual mode. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
selected interior temperature and the current interior before driving off, see “Summer
outside temperature. opening feature” (Y page 108). The climate
control will then adjust the interior
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
temperature to the set value much faster.
are filtered out before outside air enters the
passenger compartment through the air
distribution system.
Deactivating the climate control
G Warning! system
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
G Warning!
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged When the climate control system is switched
off, the outside air supply and circulation are
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
also switched off. Only choose this setting for
and the windows could fog up, impairing
a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog
visibility and endangering you and others.
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
and others.
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
X Deactivating: Press button ^.
The air conditioning will not engage (no The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
(Y page 167).
i You can also press button ^ on the
G Warning! climate control panel.
Follow the recommended settings for heating
and cooling given on the following pages.
Otherwise the windows could fog up,
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 167
Climate control 167
If you press button ¦ to reactivate the X Press button Á again.

climate control system, the defrosting The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
mode is activated. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
Deactivating the rear climate control are harmful to the ozone layer.
from the front
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated
X Deactivating: Press button ±. again, this indicates that the air
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Controls in detail
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
X Reactivating: Press button ±. compressor has turned off.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Air conditioning
Automatic mode
The air conditioning is operational while the
engine is running and cools the interior air to When operating the climate control system in
the temperature set by the operator. In automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies air volume and air distribution are adjusted
the interior air and helps prevent window automatically.
fogging. In automatic mode, cooling with
dehumidification is switched on. This function
G Warning! can be switched off if necessary.
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather G Warning!
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up If you switch off the air conditioning, the
more quickly. Window fogging may impair vehicle will not be cooled when weather
visibility and endanger you and others. conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
i Condensation may drip out from visibility and endanger you and others.
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction. X Set the desired temperature
(Y page 168).
Deactivating X Activating: Press button Ã.
It is possible to deactivate the air The air volume and air distribution are
conditioning. The interior air will then no adjusted automatically.
longer be cooled or dehumidified.
X Press button Á. i The settings for the passenger side are
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. also used for the rear passenger
compartment.
The cooling function switches off after a
short delay. X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.
Activating The automatic operation of air volume
switches off. The selected blower speed is
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 168
168 Climate control
shown in air volume display G Adjusting air volume

(Y page 164).
X Decreasing/increasing: Press button
or I or K.
X Press air distribution button ¯, P, or The automatic mode is switched off. The
O. selected blower speed is shown in air
The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out. volume display G (Y page 164).
The automatic operation of air distribution When using the Voice Control System, the
switches off.
Controls in detail
blower speed reduces automatically. When

the Voice Control System is not used
anymore, the blower speed increases to the
Setting the temperature previously selected level.
You can adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting Front defroster
in small increments, preferably starting at You can use this setting to defrost the
72‡ (22†). windshield, for example if it is iced up.
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn You can also defog the windshield and the
temperature control : and/or C side windows.
(Y page 164) slightly clockwise or
i Keep this setting selected only until the
counterclockwise.
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
Adjusting air distribution Activating
The air distribution can be adjusted manually. X Press button ¦.
The symbols on the buttons represent the The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
following functions:
The climate control switches to the
Symbol Function following functions automatically:
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
¯ Directs air to the windshield and
power, depending on outside
side air vents
temperature
P Directs air through the center Rair flows onto the windshield and the
and side air vents front door windows (side air vents must
O Directs air to the footwells and be open)
side air vents Rthe air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
X
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for air-
Press the desired air distribution button
drying
¯, P, or O.
Adjustments
The automatic mode is switched off. Air
distribution is controlled according to the You can adjust the air volume and the
desired button. temperature when the front defroster is
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 169
Climate control 169
X Press button I to decrease or button Air recirculation mode

K to increase air volume to the desired
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
level.
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
The air volume decreases/increases to the from the outside (e. g. before driving through
next lower/higher blower speed and a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
heating switches to the temperature that outside air and recirculates the air in the
was set before the front defroster was passenger compartment.
switched on.
Controls in detail
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out. G Warning!
The indicator lamp in button Á comes Fogged windows impair visibility,
on. endangering you and others. If the windows
or begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
X Turn temperature control : and/or C
clear interior window fogging. If interior
(Y page 164) slightly in any direction. window fogging persists, make sure the air
Heating switches to the temperature that conditioning is activated, or press button
was set before the front defroster was ¦.
switched on.
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out. X Activating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in button Á comes The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
on.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
i The air conditioning compressor remains automatically at high outside
on even if the indicator lamp in button temperatures.
¦ goes out. This helps to prevent the The indicator lamp in button d is not lit
windshield from fogging. when the air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically.
Deactivating A quantity of outside air is added after
X Press button ¦ again. approximately 30 minutes.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. If you have turned off the air conditioning
Defrosting is turned off. or the outside temperature is below 41‡
The previous settings are once again in (5†), the air recirculation mode will not
effect. The air conditioning compressor switch on automatically.
remains switched on. X Deactivating: Press button d.
i To deactivate, you can also press button The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
^ or Ã.
Windshield fogged on the outside

X Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 104).
X Press air distribution button P or O.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 170
170 3-zone automatic climate control
i The manually selected air recirculation Regardless of the temperature and air
mode is deactivated automatically: volume set on the climate control panel, an
Rafter5 minutes if the outside interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡
temperature is below approximately (22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
41‡ (5†) protect the vehicle battery.
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and X Activating: Switch off the ignition.
air-drying are turned off X Press button Á.
Controls in detail
Rafter30 minutes if the outside The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
temperature is above approximately X Deactivating: Press button Á again.
41‡ (5†) The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The residual heat is deactivated automatically
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Residual heat and ventilation
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
Rif the battery voltage drops
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of Rif the coolant temperature is too low
the residual heat produced by the engine.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and
the battery voltage.
3-zone automatic climate control

Control panels
USA only
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 171
3-zone automatic climate control 171
side (22†).
button Ã comes on.
Controls in detail
= Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 178)
? Increasing air volume (Y page 178)
A Air distribution (directs air (Y page 177)
through the windshield and side
air vents)
B AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 175)
on.
Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 180)
C Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 176)
side (22†).
D Operating the rear climate (Y page 175)
control from the front
E Air distribution (directs air (Y page 177)
through center and side air
vents)
F Air distribution (directs air (Y page 177)
through the footwells and side
air vents)
G Air volume display
H Decreasing air volume (Y page 178)
I Rear window defroster (Y page 180)
J Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 179)
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 172
K Interior temperature sensor
L Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate (Y page 175)
control system. The indicator
Controls in detail
Canada only
side (22†).
button Ã comes on.
= Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 177)
(directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
? Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 178)
A Increasing air volume (Y page 178)
B Rear window defroster (Y page 180)
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 173
C Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 177)
(directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
D Operating the rear climate (Y page 175)
control from the front
Controls in detail
E Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 176)
side (22†).
F Automatic climate control on/ i Switches on the climate (Y page 175)
off control system. The indicator
G Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 177)
(directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)
H Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 177)
(directs air through center and
side air vents)
I AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 175)
on.
Residual heat ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 180)
J Display
K Decreasing air volume (Y page 178)
L Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 179)
M Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 177)
(directs air through center and
side air vents)
N Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 177)
(directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 174
O Interior temperature sensor
P Adopting driver’s side settings (Y page 180)
for all zones
Rear automatic climate control Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
Controls in detail
are filtered out before outside air enters the

passenger compartment through the air
distribution system.
G Warning!
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
: Increasing air volume
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
; Temperature control Center.
= Air distribution and air volume (automatic
mode) The air conditioning will not engage (no
? Air distribution (directs air through the cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
side air vents) (Y page 175).
A Air distribution (directs air through the G Warning!
footwells and side air vents) Follow the recommended settings for heating
B Rear automatic climate control on/off and cooling given on the following pages.
C Decreasing air volume Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Notes on 3-zone automatic climate
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
control
windshield free of snow and debris.
With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
climate control determines the relation of the
interior before driving off, see “Summer
sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
opening feature” (Y page 108). The climate
the inside temperature for every individual
control will then adjust the interior
zone.
temperature to the set value much faster.
The automatic climate control is operational
whenever the engine is running. It cools the
vehicle’s interior according to the angle and
intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside
temperature and the selected temperature.
You can operate the automatic climate
control in either the automatic or manual
mode.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 175
Deactivating the climate control The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
system In display J, you will see the Y symbol
followed by ON and MODE. The MODE display
G Warning! is cleared and the indicator lamp in button
When the climate control system is switched X goes out after approximately
off, the outside air supply and circulation are 3 seconds.
also switched off. Only choose this setting for
The rear climate control switches on.
a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog
Controls in detail
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
and others. Deactivating the rear climate control
from the rear
Deactivating the front climate control X Deactivating: Press button ^.
X Deactivating: Press button ^. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
Canada only: Display J (Y page 172) is The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
cleared.
X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
Air conditioning
i You can also press button ^ on the The air conditioning is operational while the
climate control panel. engine is running and cools the interior air to
If you press button ¦ to reactivate the the temperature set by the operator. In
climate control system, the defrosting addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
mode is activated. the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
Deactivating the rear climate control
from the front G Warning!
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
USA only vehicle will not be cooled when weather
X Deactivating: Press button ±. conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. more quickly. Window fogging may impair
X Reactivating: Press button ±.
visibility and endanger you and others.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
i Condensation may drip out from
Canada only underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
X Deactivating: Press button X. not an indication of a malfunction.
In display J (Y page 172), you will see the
Deactivating
Y symbol followed by MODE for It is possible to deactivate the cooling
approximately 3 seconds. function of the climate control system. The
X Within these 3 seconds press button interior air will then no longer be cooled or
^. dehumidified.
In display J, you will see the Y symbol X Press button Á.
followed by OFF. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.

The rear climate control is switched off. The cooling function switches off after a
X Reactivating: Press button X.
short delay.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 176
Activating i The settings for the passenger side are

also used for the rear passenger
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
compartment.
dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning. X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
X Press button Á again.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on. The automatic air volume is switched off
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant and is controlled according to the desired
setting. The automatic air distribution
Controls in detail
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which

are harmful to the ozone layer. remains switched on.
or
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated X Press an air distribution button Z11,
again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The M11, \11, P, ¯12, c11 or
compressor has turned off. O.
Have the air conditioning checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The automatic air distribution is switched
off and is controlled according to the
desired position. The automatic air volume
Automatic mode remains switched on.
You can switch the climate control system on Automatic mode with rear climate
and off for each zone of the passenger control panel
compartment as desired.
X Activating: Press button Ã.
When operating the climate control system in
automatic mode, the interior air temperature, The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
air volume and air distribution are adjusted The temperature, air volume and air
automatically. distribution are adjusted automatically.
In automatic mode, cooling with X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
dehumidification is switched on. This function The automatic air volume is switched off
can be switched off if necessary. and is controlled according to the desired
setting. The automatic air distribution
G Warning! remains switched on.
If you switch off the air conditioning, the or
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
X Press button M or P.
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
The automatic air distribution is switched
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
off and is controlled according to the
visibility and endanger you and others.
desired position. The automatic air volume
X Set the desired temperature remains switched on.
(Y page 176).
X Activating: Press button Ã.
Setting the temperature
You can set the air temperature for each of
the 3 zones separately.You should raise or
lower the temperature setting in small
11 Canada only
12 USA only
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 177
increments, preferably starting at 72‡ Rear temperature with rear climate

(22†). control panel
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control ; (Y page 174)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
Adjusting air distribution
Controls in detail
USA only
The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
Front temperature with front climate
control panel Symbol Function
¯ Directs air to the windshield and
USA only
side air vents
temperature control : and/or C P Directs air through the center
(Y page 170) slightly clockwise or and side air vents
counterclockwise. O Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents
Canada only
X Press the desired air distribution button
temperature control : and/or E
(Y page 172) slightly clockwise or ¯, P, or O.
counterclockwise. The automatic mode is switched off. The
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
on.
Rear temperature with front climate
control panel
Canada only
USA only
The air distribution can be adjusted
X Press button ±. separately on each side of the passenger
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn compartment.
temperature control C (Y page 170) The symbols on the buttons represent the
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise. following functions:
Canada only
X Press button X.
In display J (Y page 172) you will see the
Y symbol.
temperature control E (Y page 172)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 178
Symbol Symbol Function When using the Voice Control System, the
blower speed reduces automatically. When
Driver’s Passenger
the Voice Control System is not used
side side
anymore, the blower speed increases to the
Z M Directs air to previously selected level.
the windshield
and side air
vents Front defroster
Controls in detail
\ P Directs air You can use this setting to defrost the

through the windshield, for example if it is iced up.
center, side You can also defog the windshield and the
and rear side windows.
passenger i Keep this setting selected only until the
compartment windshield or the side windows are clear
air vents again.
c O Directs air to
the footwells Activating
and side air X Press button ¦.
vents
The climate control switches to the
X Press the desired air distribution button following functions automatically:
Z, \, or c for the driver’s side, Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
or M, P, or O for the passenger power, depending on outside
side. temperature
The automatic mode is switched off. The Rair flows onto the windshield and the
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
front door windows (side air vents must
on.
be open)
Rthe air conditioning compressor
Adjusting air volume switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for air-
USA only drying
X Decrease/increase: Press button I or
K. Adjustments
The automatic mode is switched off. The You can adjust the air volume and the
selected blower speed is shown in air temperature when the front defroster is
volume display G (Y page 170). switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
Canada only
X Press button I to decrease or button
X Decrease/increase: Press button I or K to increase air volume to the desired
K. level.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
The air volume decreases/increases to the
selected blower speed appears in display
next lower/higher blower speed and
J (Y page 172).
heating switches to the temperature that
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 179
was set before the front defroster was X Press buttons O/c13 and P/
switched on. \13.
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
The indicator lamp in button Á comes
on. Air recirculation mode
or Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
X Turn temperature control : and/or C unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
(USA only) (Y page 170) or : and/or E
Controls in detail
from the outside (e. g. before driving through
(Canada only) (Y page 172) slightly in any a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
direction. outside air and recirculates the air in the
Heating switches to the temperature that passenger compartment.
was set before the front defroster was
G Warning!
switched on.
Fogged windows impair visibility,
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
endangering you and others. If the windows
The indicator lamp in button Á comes begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
on. air recirculation mode immediately should
i The air conditioning compressor remains clear interior window fogging. If interior
on even if the indicator lamp in button window fogging persists, make sure the air
¦ goes out. This helps to prevent the conditioning is activated, or press button
windshield from fogging. ¦.
X Activating: Press button d.

Deactivating
X Press button ¦ once more.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
automatically at high outside
Defrosting is turned off.
temperatures.
The previous settings are once again in
The indicator lamp in button d is not lit
effect. The air conditioning compressor
when the air recirculation mode is switched
remains switched on.
on automatically.
i To deactivate, you can also press button A quantity of outside air is added after
^ or Ã. approximately 30 minutes.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
Windshield fogged on the outside or the outside temperature is below 41‡
X
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not
Switch the windshield wipers on
switch on automatically.
(Y page 104).
X Press button Ã. X Deactivating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Air volume and air distribution are
controlled separately for each zone.
If the automatic air volume and air
distribution are switched off:
13 Canada only
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 180
180 Rear window defroster
i The manually selected air recirculation Using driver-side settings for all
mode is deactivated automatically: temperature zones
Rafter5 minutes if the outside This feature is only available in Canada
temperature is below approximately vehicles.
41‡ (5†) You can use the settings of the driver’s side,
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and such as temperature, air volume and air
air-drying are turned off distribution, for all temperature zones. These
Controls in detail
Rafter30 minutes if the outside settings only need to be made once and the
temperature is above approximately climate control system will automatically
41‡ (5†) regulate the settings for all temperature
zones quickly and comfortably.
At outside temperatures above 79‡ (26†) X Activating: Adjust the air temperature, air
the system will not automatically switch back volume and air distribution.
to outside air. A quantity of outside air is
X Press button ¸.
added after approximately 30 minutes.
The driver-side settings are used for all
Residual heat and ventilation temperature zones.
X Deactivating: Press button ¸ again.
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine. i If you manually set the temperature, air
volume or air distribution for the passenger
i How long the system will provide heating side or the rear passenger compartment
depends on the coolant temperature and when the MONO setting is active, the
the battery voltage. MONO setting will be switched off.
Regardless of the temperature and air
volume set on the climate control panel, an
interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡ Rear window defroster
(22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
protect the vehicle battery. G Warning!
X Activating: Switch off the ignition. Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving.
X Press button Á.
Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
X Deactivating: Press button Á again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The rear window defroster uses a large
The residual heat is deactivated amount of power. To keep the battery drain
automatically: to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The
Rwhen the ignition is switched on defroster is switched off automatically after
Rafter approximately 30 minutes some time of operation depending on the
Rif the battery voltage drops outside temperature.
Rif the coolant temperature is too low
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 181
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 181
X Switch on the ignition. shatter. This may result in an opening in the

X Switching on: Press button ª on the roof.
respective climate control panel. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. their seat belts or not wearing them properly
X Switching off: Press button ª again. may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury for
The rear window defroster switches off when
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
the battery voltage is too low. The indicator
entire body parts or portions of them may
Controls in detail
lamp in button ª flashes. Too many
protrude from the passenger compartment.
electrical consumers may be operating
simultaneously.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
X Switch off consumers that are currently not
transport any objects with sharp edges
needed if required. which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there
Power tilt/sliding sunroof is snow or ice on the roof, as this could
Opening and closing result in malfunctions.
If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. sunroof due to a malfunction contact
G Warning! Roadside Assistance or an authorized
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof, make sure there is no danger of ! Please keep in mind that weather
anyone being harmed by the opening/closing conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
procedure. Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
express operation and automatic reversal the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding could be damaged which is not covered by
sunroof is blocked during the closing the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop
and open slightly. i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently sunroof using the SmartKey or the
when the sunroof switch is pressed and held. KEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer
See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof opening feature” (Y page 108) and
is blocked” section for details. “Convenience closing feature”
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ (Y page 108).
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by
i After switching off the ignition or
releasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroof
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch was moved past the resistance point
switch, you can operate the tilt/sliding
and released, by moving the sunroof switch in
sunroof until you open the driver’s or front
any direction.
passenger door. If no door was opened you
G Warning! can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for up
to 5 minutes.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 182
182 Power tilt/sliding sunroof
i Express opening is not available when the

tilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/
sliding sunroof must be closed first.
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open,

resonance noises may result in addition to
the usual wind noises. They are caused by
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
Controls in detail
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these

noises, change the position of the tilt/
sliding sunroof or open a window slightly.
Sunroof switch
: Raising Raising
; Opening
X Raising manually: Press and hold the
= Closing sunroof switch to the resistance point in
With the sunroof closed or raised, you can direction of arrow :.
slide the sunroof screen forward and back. X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow : and release.
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
i Express raising is not available when the
tilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/sliding
sunroof must be closed first.
Sunroof screen
X Switch on the ignition. Closing
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the
Opening sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow =.
X Opening manually: Press and hold the
X Release the sunroof switch when the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow ;. desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To close the tilt/
X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached. sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroof
switch past the resistance point in
X Express operation: To open the tilt/
direction of arrow = and release.
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow ; and release. Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 183
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 183
Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is Synchronizing

blocked
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
G Warning!
Rafter the battery has been disconnected or
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
discharged
and be seriously or even fatally injured when
closing the tilt/sliding sunroof with greater Rafter a malfunction
force or without automatic reversal function. Rif the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
Controls in detail
smoothly
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by ! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof will or synchronized, contact an authorized
stop and open slightly. Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof Assistance.
has stopped and opened because it was X Vehicles with SmartKey: Switch off the
blocked, pull and hold the sunroof switch ignition and remove the SmartKey from the
in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding starter switch.
sunroof is fully closed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes with greater ignition and open the driver’s door. This
force. puts the starter switch in position 0, same
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again and as with the SmartKey removed from the
opens slightly: starter switch. The driver’s door then can
X
be closed again.
Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
X Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding sunroof
was blocked and has opened, pull and hold
the sunroof switch in direction of arrow from the fuse box (Y page 340).
= until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully X Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.
closed. X Switch on the ignition.
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes without X Press and hold the sunroof switch in
automatic reversal function.
direction of arrow : (Y page 182) until the
G Warning! tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
Pulling and holding the sunroof switch to rear.
close the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately X Keep holding the sunroof switch in
after it had been blocked two times will cause direction of arrow : for approximately
the tilt/sliding sunroof to close without any 1 second.
reversal function for as long as you hold the X Check the express operation feature
sunroof switch. (Y page 182).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closes
completely, the roof is synchronized.
Otherwise repeat the above steps.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 184
184 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Panorama roof with power tilt/ Opening and closing the panorama
sliding panel roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Extending and retracting the roller G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
sunblinds
G Warning!
The roller sunblinds only operate with the tilt/ When opening or closing the tilt/sliding panel,
sliding panel closed. The front and rear roller make sure there is no danger of anyone being
sunblind cannot be operated individually. harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
Controls in detail
G Warning! The tilt/sliding panel is equipped with the

When extending the roller sunblinds, make express operation and automatic reversal
sure no one is in danger of being injured by function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding
the extending procedure. The extending of the panel is blocked during the closing procedure,
roller sunblinds can be immediately halted by the tilt/sliding panel will stop and open
releasing the switch. slightly.
The tilt/sliding panel operates differently
when the roof panel switch is pressed and
held. See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding
panel is blocked” section in this chapter for
details.
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding panel can be immediately halted by
releasing the roof panel switch or, if the roof
panel switch was moved past the resistance
point and released, by moving the roof panel
switch in any direction.
Roof panel switch G Warning!

: Retracting The panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel is
; Retracting made out of glass. In the event of an accident,
= Extending the glass may shatter. This may result in an
opening in the roof.
X Switch on the ignition. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
X Retracting/Extending: Move the roof their seat belts or not wearing them properly
panel switch to the resistance point in the may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
required direction of arrow :, ; or = opening also presents a potential for injury for
until the roller sunblinds have reached their occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
desired position. entire body parts or portions of them may
X Express retracting: Push the roof panel protrude from the passenger compartment.
switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow ; and release. ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
The roller sunblinds retract completely. transport any objects with sharp edges
X Stopping during express retracting:
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding panel.
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result
in malfunctions.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 185
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 185
! Please keep in mind that weather i Express opening is not available when the
conditions can sometimes change rapidly. tilt/sliding panel is raised. The tilt/sliding
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding panel panel must be closed first.
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics i When the tilt/sliding panel is open,
could be damaged which is not covered by resonance noises may result in addition to
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the usual wind noises. They are caused by
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
Controls in detail
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these
noises, change the position of the tilt/
sliding panel or open a window slightly.
Raising
X Raising manually: Press and hold the roof
panel switch in direction of arrow :.
X Release the roof panel switch when the
Roof panel switch
Closing
: Raising
; Opening X Closing manually: Pull and hold the roof
= Closing panel switch in direction of arrow =.
X Release the roof panel switch when the
The tilt/sliding panel only operates with the
roller sunblinds retracted.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding Closing when the tilt/sliding panel is
panel using the SmartKey, see “Summer blocked
opening feature” (Y page 108) or see G Warning!
“Convenience closing feature” Make sure that nobody can become trapped
(Y page 108). and be seriously or even fatally injured when
X Switch on the ignition. closing the tilt/sliding panel without
Opening If the movement of the tilt/sliding panel is
X Opening manually: Press and hold the blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by
roof panel switch to the resistance point in ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding panel will stop
direction of arrow ;. and open slightly.
X Release the roof panel switch when the X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel has
desired position is reached. stopped and opened because it was
X Express operation: To open the tilt/ blocked, pull and hold the roof panel switch
sliding panel completely, press the roof in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding
panel switch past the resistance point in panel is fully closed.
direction of arrow ; and release.
Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 186
186 Loading and storing
If the tilt/sliding panel is blocked again and starter switch. The driver’s door then can
opens slightly: be closed again.
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel was X Remove the respective fuse from the fuse
blocked and has opened, pull and hold the box (Y page 340).
roof panel switch in direction of arrow = X Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.
until the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed. X Switch on the ignition.
The tilt sliding panel closes without
X Push and hold the roof panel switch in
Controls in detail
direction of arrow = (Y page 185) until the

G Warning! roller sunblinds are fully extended.
Pulling and holding the roof panel switch to X Keep holding the roof panel switch in
close the tilt/sliding panel immediately after direction of arrow = (Y page 185) for
it had been blocked two times will cause the approximately 1 second.
tilt/sliding panel to close without any reversal X Pull and hold the roof panel switch in
function for as long as you hold the roof panel direction of arrow ; (Y page 185) until the
switch. roller sunblinds are fully retracted.
X Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow ; (Y page 185) for
Synchronizing approximately 1 second.
The tilt/sliding panel and roller sunblinds X Push and hold the roof panel switch in
must be synchronized direction of arrow = (Y page 185) until the
Rafter the battery has been disconnected or tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
discharged X Keep holding the roof panel switch in
Rafter
direction of arrow = (Y page 185) for
a malfunction
approximately 1 second.
Rif the tilt/sliding panel does not open X Check the express operation feature of the
smoothly
tilt/sliding panel (Y page 184).
! Do not attempt to open the tilt/sliding If the tilt/sliding panel opens completely,
panel before the tilt/sliding panel is the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat
properly synchronized. The tilt/sliding the above steps.
panel could otherwise lock-up in the open
position.
If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed or Loading and storing
synchronized, contact an authorized Loading instructions
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
Assistance. G Warning!
X
Always fasten items being carried as securely
Vehicles with SmartKey: Remove the
as possible. Use cargo tie-down rings and
SmartKey from the starter switch.
fastening materials appropriate for the weight
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the
and size of the load.
ignition and open the driver’s door. This
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
puts the starter switch in position 0, same
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
as with the SmartKey removed from the
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 187
Loading and storing 187
vehicle occupants unless the items are Rpassengers
securely fastened in the vehicle. Rluggage/cargo

To help avoid personal injury during a collision It must never exceed the load limit and the
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) for your
transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or vehicle. The load limit and the GVWR are
cargo higher than the seat backrests. specified on the placard located on the
The cargo compartment is the preferred place driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 236).
to carry objects. Always use cargo tie-down
Controls in detail
In addition, the load must be distributed so
rings, and if so equipped, always use the cargo that the weight on each axle never exceeds
net when transporting cargo. the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open. front and rear axle. The GVWR and GAWR for
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may your vehicle are indicated on the certification
enter vehicle interior resulting in label located on the driver’s door B-pillar
unconsciousness and death. (Y page 236).
For more information, see “Tire and Loading
Load distribution Information” (Y page 237).
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
vehicle depend greatly on the load
distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustration
shown. The heaviest items are to be placed
towards the front of the vehicle.
i The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. The expanded cargo
volume (Y page 189) should only be used
for items which do not fit in the cargo
compartment alone.
Please pay attention to and comply with the
following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
RAlways place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible against
front or rear seat backrests.
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the weight
of the vehicle including:
Rfuel
Roof rack
Rtools
For information about further roof rack
Rspare wheel equipment, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Rinstalled accessories Benz Center.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 188
G Warning! Parcel nets

Only use the roof rack when the basic carrier
G Warning!
bars have been completely mounted. The left
and right roof rails are only stabilized by Vehicles with Occupant Classification System
means of the basic carrier bars being (OCS)
mounted. Do not place objects with a combined weight
of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the parcel net
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
on the back of the front passenger seat.
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
Controls in detail
Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to

attached roof rack system or its load could
properly approximate the occupant weight
become detached from the vehicle.
category.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
220 lb (100 kg). G Warning!
Take into consideration that when the roof Parcel nets are intended for storing light-
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
are different from those when operating the etc.
vehicle without the roof rack loaded. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
Make sure fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
Ryou can raise the tilt/sliding sunroof (or braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
tilt/sliding panel) at the rear completely thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
Ryou can open the tilt/sliding sunroof (or injury to vehicle occupants.
tilt/sliding panel) completely Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
Ryou can open the tailgate completely in the event of an accident.
Parcel nets are located in the front passenger

footwell and on each of the front seat
backrests.
Cargo tie-down rings

Your vehicle is equipped with eight cargo tie-
down rings.
Always follow loading instructions
(Y page 186).
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load
X Flip trim covers : open. on all the cargo tie-down rings with a rope of
X Only attach the roof rack to the anchorage sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
points under trim covers :.
X Observe manufacturer’s instructions for
installation.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 189
Controls in detail
Cargo tie down rings, cargo compartment
Expanding cargo volume

You can fold each seat of the rear passenger
compartment separately to expand the cargo
volume.
You can expand the cargo volume
Rin part, i.e. folding third-row seats
(Y page 190)
Rfully,i.e. folding second-row and third-row
seats (Y page 190)
Cargo tie down rings, second-row footwell
G Warning!
When expanding the cargo volume, always
fully fold the corresponding seats and, if so
equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in the
upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
Cargo tie-down rings, third-row footwell vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie-down rings.
Hooks
G Warning!
Two hooks are located on the rear
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
compartment trim panels, one on each side.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
Use the hooks to secure light-weight items enter vehicle interior resulting in
only. The maximum permissible weight per unconsciousness and death.
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg).
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 190
Expanding cargo volume in part Expanding cargo volume fully

Folding third-row seats G Warning!
X Lower the head restraints of the third-row Folded second-row seats are intended to
seats completely (Y page 88). serve as a cargo volume expansion in
conjunction with folded third-row seats only.
Do not fold the second-row seats and allow
third-row seat occupants to use folded
Controls in detail
second-row seats as a footrest while driving.

Third-row seat occupants must, like all vehicle
occupants, keep both feet on the floor in front
of their seat. Otherwise, occupants could
slide under their seat belt in a collision. If
occupants slide under the seat belt, it would
apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Do
not fold the second-row seats and allow third-
X Place seat belt in seat belt holder :. row seat occupants to use folded second-row
X Pull release handle ; on seat backrest seats as a table while driving. Objects placed
= in direction of arrow. on folded second-row seats may come loose
Seat backrest = is released. during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an
accident and be thrown around the vehicle
interior. Objects thrown around the vehicle
interior may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
! When folding both seat rows, it is

important that you fold the seats in the
following order:
Rsecond-row middle seat (7-seat vehicles)
Routboard second-row seats

Rthird-row seats
X Move seat backrest = slightly forward. Otherwise, you could damage the seats.
Seat cushion ? is released and folds
forward automatically. Folding second-row middle seat
X Fold seat backrest = to a horizontal ! Close the cup holder in front of the
position. second-row seats before folding the
second-row middle seat. Otherwise you
i Strap A serves to pull up the seat
could damage the cup holder and the
backrest when bringing the third-row seats second-row middle seat.
back to their original position
(Y page 192). X Lower the head restraint of the second-row
middle seat completely (Y page 88).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 191
Folding outboard second-row seats

! When the outboard second-row seats are
folded forward, the front seats may not be
moved to the rearmost position. Otherwise
you could damage the front and the
outboard second-row seats.
! Close the cup holder in front of the
Controls in detail
second-row seats before folding the
second-row seats. Otherwise you could
damage the cup holder and the second-row
X Pull seat backrest release strap : in seats.
direction of arrow.
X Move the seat to be folded to its rearmost
X Completely fold seat backrest ; forward
position (Y page 87).
so that it rests on seat cushion = (armrest
X Remove the rear center console, if so
position).
equipped (Y page 200).
i The rear center console can remain
installed, if installed in the most forward
position (Y page 200). However, the cargo
compartment floor will then not be an even
plane.
X Remove the head restraint from the
respective second-row seat (Y page 88).
Armrest position
X Pull seat release strap ? in direction of
arrow.
The seat is released and flips up and
forward.
X Push down on seat A until it engages.
X Place the head restraint on seat

cushion ;.
X Relieve the load on seat backrest : and
pull release lever = past the resistance
Folded position
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 192
point in direction of arrow as far as it will

go.
Seat and seat backrest : are unlocked.
X Fold seat backrest : forward until it fully
rests on seat cushion ; in a horizontal
position.
Controls in detail
X Slowly move seat backrest = forward.

Seat cushion C is released and folds
forward automatically.
i Strap D serves to pull up the seat
backrest when bringing the third-row seats
back to their original position
X Push down on folded seat backrest : until (Y page 192).
seat cushion ; engages in seat base.
X Fold seat cushion C to a horizontal
Folding third-row seats position.
Guide pin A must engage in recess ? of
X Lower the head restraints of the third-row
seat backrest B.
seats completely.
i The third-row head restraints are i The second-row seats must be in their
adjusted in the same manner as the head rearmost position (Y page 87).
restraints of the second-row seats X Fold seat backrest = to a horizontal
(Y page 88). position.
Returning seats to their original position

G Warning!
Make sure
Rthe seats are properly locked
Rthe seat backrests are in an upright position
and are properly locked
An outboard second-row seat is properly
X Place seat belt in seat belt holder :. barely visible, see “Lock status indicators
X Pull release handle ; on seat backrest (outboard second-row seats)”.
= in direction of arrow. If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
Seat backrest = is released. locked, the seat could move forward and the
seat backrest could fold. You could slide
under the seat belt during braking, vehicle
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 193
maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide Outboard second-row seats

under it, the belt would apply force at the
! When returning the seats to their original

position, it is important to proceed in the
following order:
Controls in detail
Rthird-row seats
Routboard second-row seats
Rsecond-row middle seat (7-seat vehicles)
Otherwise, you could damage the seats. X Pull release lever = past the resistance
point as far as it will go and move up seat
Third-row seats backrest : to an angle of approximately
45°.
X Install head restraint ; (Y page 88).
X Adjust the seat backrest to the desired
X Push seat backrest back until the seat
engages audibly.
X Check whether the seat is properly locked,
see “Lock status indicators (outboard
second-row seats)” (Y page 193).
X Adjust the seat fore or aft to the desired
! Do not fold up seat cushion : before
folding seat backrest ;, as this could Lock status indicators (outboard second-
damage the upholstery. row seats)
X Reach into strap = and pull seat
backrest ; into a vertical position.
X Pull release handle ? and adjust seat
backrest ; to desired position.
X Move seat cushion : to a vertical position.
X Fold seat cushion : towards seat
backrest ; until it engages audibly.
Outboard second-row seat unlocked

When the seat is unlocked, lock status
indicator : is extended and red
marking ; is clearly visible.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 194
X When the seat is unlocked, push seat Cargo compartment cover blind
backrest back until the seat engages
audibly. The cargo compartment cover blind can be
installed behind the third-row seats or the
second-row seats.
! With the cargo compartment cover blind
installed, do not pile luggage higher than
the lower edges of the rear side windows.
Controls in detail
The cargo compartment cover blind must be

extended for installation behind the second-
row seats (Y page 195).
The cargo compartment cover blind has two
blind extensions which are connected to the
cargo compartment cover blind by cords.
Outboard second-row seat locked
When the seat is locked, lock status
indicator : is in hinged position and red
marking ; is barely visible.
Second-row middle seat
Blind installed behind third-row seats

X Rolling out: Pull cargo compartment cover
blind on handle : across the cargo
compartment.
X Guide cargo compartment cover blind into
Folded position mounts ; and release.
X Pull seat release strap : of seat ; in X Rolling up: Disengage cargo compartment
direction of arrow. cover blind and guide retraction by its
The seat is released and flips up and handle :.
backwards.
X Push down on seat ; until it engages in
armrest position.
X Pull seat backrest release strap :
(Y page 90) of seat backrest in direction of
arrow.
X Fold seat backrest to the rear until it
engages audibly.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 195
X Press on the mount cover at its lower edge

as indicated by arrow.
The mount cover’s upper edge flips up.
X Remove mount cover by pulling its upper
edge out of side trim in direction of arrow.
i To avoid loss of the mount covers, keep
them in a safe place while not in use, e.g.
Controls in detail
the glove box.
X Make sure release button = faces up and
Blind installed behind second-row seats the handle : is to the rear before inserting
the cargo compartment cover blind.
X Removing: Roll up cargo compartment
X Place left side of cargo compartment cover
cover blind.
blind in left mount.
X Push release button =.
X Position right side of cargo compartment
X Pull cargo compartment cover blind ? to cover blind over right mount.
the left. X Press release button = and guide cargo
X Remove cargo compartment cover blind. compartment cover blind into mount.
X Installing: For installation behind second X Make sure cargo compartment cover blind
row seats, install the blind extensions is securely fastened.
(Y page 195).
! For installation behind third-row seats, Extending cargo compartment blind
the blind extensions must not be installed.
Otherwise, the cargo compartment cover
blind could be damaged.
X Remove the mount covers in the side trims
of the third-row seats when installing the
cargo compartment cover blind behind the
second-row seats.
X Position blind extension ; over cargo

compartment cover blind :.
Guide pins ? must point directly at
guidings =.
X Turn blind extension ; and cargo
compartment cover blind : in opposite
directions as indicated by the arrows.
Mount cover in the side trims of the third-row seats Guide pins ? must engage in guidings =.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 196
When not in use, you can attach the blind safety, always use the cargo net when
extensions to the cargo compartment cover transporting cargo.
blind. The cargo net can be installed behind the
B-pillar or the C-pillar.
Controls in detail
X With the cargo compartment cover blind

installed behind third-row seats, insert RWith the cargo volume fully expanded
extension guide rail A into mounting B. (Y page 190), use holders : behind
X Push blind extension into mounting B as B-pillars and the cargo tie-down rings in the
far as it will go. second-row footwell (Y page 189).
RWith the cargo volume expanded in part
(Y page 190), use holders ; behind
Cargo net C-pillars and the cargo tie-down rings in the
third-row footwell (Y page 189).
G Warning!
X Open the hook and loop fasteners on the
Make sure the cargo net is properly engaged
cargo net package.
at top and bottom position and the tightening
X Roll out the cargo net.
belts are securely fastened.
X Unfold the cargo net.
Never use a damaged cargo net.
X Engage the upper cargo net bar.
Always use cargo net when transporting
cargo. This helps to avoid personal injury from The cargo net bar must engage audibly.
smaller objects being thrown around in the
occupant compartment during a collision or
sudden maneuver.
The cargo net cannot prevent the movement
of large, heavier objects into the passenger
compartment in an accident. Such items must
be properly secured using the cargo tie-down
rings in the cargo compartment floor.
Passenger use of seats behind installed cargo
net is restricted because of the footwell being
taken up by the net.
Use of the cargo net is a particularly

important safety factor when the vehicle is
loaded higher than the top of the seat
backrests with smaller objects. For your
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 197
Installing the cargo net Loosening the cargo net
Controls in detail
Cargo net installed behind the C-pillar Belt hook attached in the third-row footwell
: Holder
X Loosen the tightening belt by pulling
; Cargo net bar buckle : upward in direction of arrow.
= Red button X Remove belt hook ; from cargo tie-down
X Hang cargo net bar ; on holder : as ring =.

indicated by the arrow.
X Push cargo net bar ; forward into Removing and storing the cargo net
holder : in direction of arrow. X Take cargo net bar ; (Y page 197) out of
X Engage lower cargo net bar. holder : (Y page 197).
The cargo net bar must engage audibly. X Press the red button on the upper and lower
cargo net bar.
Pulling the cargo net tight X Fold the cargo net.
X Roll up the cargo net.
X Close the hook and loop fasteners on the
cargo net package.
Front storage compartments

G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
Belt hook attached in the third-row footwell cargo in the cargo compartment if possible.
X Hook belt hook : into cargo tie-down Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
ring ; in direction of arrow. seat backrests.
X Pull tightening belt = by the loose end in If so equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo. The cargo net cannot
direction of arrow until the cargo net is
secure hard or heavy objects.
pulled tight.
X After driving a short distance, make sure
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
the cargo net is still tight and, if necessary,
pull it tight again.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 198
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help

to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Rbraking
Rvehicle maneuvers
Ran accident
Controls in detail
Glove box
Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUX
socket or a media interface is located in the 1 Glove box unlocked
glove box. For information on Audio AUX 2 Glove box locked
mode or on media interface, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions. Storage compartment in front center
console
X Opening: Pull glove box lid release :.

X Tab on chrome label ; of cover : lightly.
X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwards
until it engages. Cover : swings open automatically.
You can lock the glove box, e.g. when the Front armrest storage compartment/
vehicle is in the shop for service. telephone tray
The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
The storage compartment and the telephone
with the mechanical key.
tray can be opened separately.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 199
i If your vehicle is equipped with Rear Seat

Entertainment Package, the storage
compartment contains the DVD player (see
separate operating instructions).
Controls in detail
Rear armrest storage compartment
A storage compartment is located in the
armrest of the rear center console between
the second-row seats.
i The Roadside Assistance button º
(Y page 210) and the Information button
E (Y page 210) are located in
telephone tray =.
X Opening storage compartment: Press
button ; and lift up armrest.
X Opening the telephone tray: Press
button : and lift up armrest.
Two coin holders ? are located in front of
telephone tray =.
X Opening: Press button under armrest and
lift up armrest.
Rear storage compartments
A storage compartment is located in front of Third-row storage compartments
the second-row seats. Storage compartments are located on the
The upper storage compartment may be side trims of the third-row seats.
replaced by a control panel, for example in
vehicles with rear automatic climate control
(Y page 162).
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 200
i If your vehicle is equipped with a 3-zone

automatic climate control, the storage
compartments are replaced by adjustable
air vents (Y page 164).
Rear center console

The rear center console is located between
Controls in detail
the second-row seats.

The rear center console contains a storage
compartment (Y page 199) and a cup holder
X Pull release handle ;.
(Y page 203).
The front part of rear center console : is
i When fully expanding the cargo released from rear center console base
compartment, the rear center console has =.
to be removed from the vehicle in order for X Lift rear center console : in direction of
the cargo compartment floor to be an even
arrow ? and hold it there.
plane (Y page 190).
X While holding rear center console : up,
Removing grip handle A.

X Lift rear center console : at handle A to
G Warning! release rear center console : from
Remove all containers that may be stored in anchorage points B.
the cup holder of the rear center console. X Take rear center console : out of the
Otherwise liquids could spill on vehicle vehicle.
occupants and/or vehicle equipment. Hot
liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may i Rear center console base = cannot be
cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled removed.
on vehicle equipment may cause damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Installing
Warranty.
G Warning!
! To prevent damage to the rear center The rear center console must be installed
console and/or its components, make sure properly on the rear center console base
the storage compartment is closed before when driving. The rear center console could
removing the rear center console. otherwise come loose. It could be thrown
around in the vehicle interior, causing injury
i Remove all items from the rear armrest to vehicle occupants during
storage compartment (Y page 199) of the Rbraking
rear center console to reduce its weight. Rvehicle maneuvers
Ran accident
You can install the rear center console in two

different positions. In the most forward
position (position 1) you can expand the
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 201
Useful features 201
cargo compartment fully (Y page 190) Useful features

without removing the rear center console.
Cup holders
i The storage compartment and the cup
holder in the rear center console are only G Warning!
illuminated, when the rear center console In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
is installed in the most rearward position vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
(position 0). only use containers that fit into the cup
holder. Use lids on open containers and do
Controls in detail
not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you
or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects
thrown around in the vehicle interior may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Cup holder in front center console

X Position rear center console B above rear A cup holder and a removable card/ticket
center console base =. holder with bottle opener are located in the
X Insert the tabs at rear of center console front center console.
B into anchorage points ? (position 1) or
A (position 0) on rear center console base
=.
X Guide front of rear center console B down
towards rear center console base =.
Rear center console B must rest on rear
center console base =.
X Press down on front of rear center console
B until it audibly engages in latch :
(position1) or latch ; (position 0).
X Removing card/ticket holder: Lift card/
ticket holder ; at the rear and take it out.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 202
202 Useful features
i Vehicles with rear center console are not

equipped with a cup holder in front of the
second-row seats.
Controls in detail
Card/ticket holder with bottle opener
Cards and tickets can be inserted into the slot

in the middle.
The bottle opener is located underneath the
X Opening: Press release button ;.
card/ticket holder and has openers for screw
caps = and crown caps ?. Cover : opens automatically.
i With the card/ticket holder removed, you

can also take the rubber inlet from the cup
holder for cleaning.
X Pull cover : down in direction of arrow as

far as it will go.
X Reinstalling card/ticket holder: Guide

tabs A into openings.
X Guide rear of card/ticket holder ; into
cup holder :.
Cup holder in front of second-row seats

A cup holder is located in front of the second-
row seats.
! Close the cup holder when not in use and X Pull out cup holder = in direction of arrow
before folding the second-row seats. as far as it will go.
Otherwise you could damage the cup X Closing: Make sure you have removed all
holder. containers from the cup holder.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 203
Useful features 203
X Push cup holder = in until it engages.

X Close cover :.
Cup holder in rear center console

A cup holder is located in the rear center
console between the second-row seats.
Controls in detail
: Sun visor
; Additional sun visor
= Vanity mirror lamp
? Vanity mirror cover
A Holder, e.g. for gas cards
B Vanity mirror
C Mounting
Cup holders in third-row side trims
Glare through the windshield
Cup holders are located in the side trims of
the third-row seats. X Flip sun visor : down when you
experience glare.
Glare through a door window

X Close vanity mirror cover ? if opened.
X Disengage sun visor : from mounting C.
X Pivot sun visor : to the side.
Sun visors
G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others. X Adjust sun visor : by pushing or pulling in
direction of arrows.
X Flip down additional sun visor ; when you
experience additional glare through the
windshield.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 204
204 Useful features
Vanity mirror ! The storage compartment is not heat-

proof. Therefore, do not stub cigarettes in
The vanity mirror lamp only functions when
the storage compartment.
the sun visor is engaged in mounting C.
X Flip sun visor : down.
X Lift up vanity mirror cover ?.
Vanity mirror lamp = comes on.
Controls in detail
Rear door window sunshade

This feature is only available in the USA.
X Opening: Open cover : (Y page 198).

X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
insert ; at the rear and pull it out.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Insert
ashtray insert ; and push it down until it
engages.
X Closing: Push down cover :.
X Extending: Pull on tab ; and engage it in

holder :. Rear seat ashtray (second row)
X Retracting: Disengage tab ; from i Vehicles with rear center console
holder : and guide retraction. (Y page 200) are not equipped with an
ashtray in front of the second-row seats.
! Always guide the sunshade. Do not let it
snap back abruptly, as the retractor could ! Close the ashtray when not in use and
be damaged. before folding the second-row seats.
Otherwise you could damage the ashtray.
! Always either close the door window or
lower the sunshade when driving at high
speed, e.g. on highways. The sunshade
could disengage and snap back when the
sunshade is raised and the respective door
window is open. The retractor could be
damaged.
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
i A storage compartment is located under X Opening: Open cover : (Y page 202).
the ashtray insert.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 205
Useful features 205
Controls in detail
X Removing ashtray insert: Push on X Switch on the ignition.
ashtray insert ; and pull it out upwards. X Push in cigarette lighter ;.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Insert Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
ashtray insert ; into opening. automatically when hot.
X Push down ashtray insert ; until it X Take out cigarette lighter ;.
engages. X Reinsert cigarette lighter ; in its socket
X Close cover :. after use.
! The lighter socket can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical
Cigarette lighter
accessories (up to a maximum of 85 W)
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind,
G Warning! however, that connecting accessories to
Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter socket (for example extensive
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the connecting and disconnecting, or using
knob only. plugs that do not fit properly) can damage
Make sure any children traveling with you do the lighter socket. With the socket
not injure themselves or start a fire with the damaged, the lighter may not function
hot cigarette lighter. properly any longer.
If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is ! The cigarette lighter is not designed for
being used extensively, the vehicle battery use with the electric air pump. Use the
may become discharged. power outlet in the second-row footwell for
X Open cover : (Y page 198). electric air pump operation.
Power outlets
i You can use the power outlets even if the
ignition is switched off.
An emergency shut-off feature is designed
to prevent the vehicle’s on-board voltage
from dropping below a minimum level. If
the on-board voltage drops to this
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 206
206 Useful features
minimum level, the power outlets are

automatically switched off, to help
preserve engine starting power.
12V Power outlets

! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle,
make sure that the maximum current
Controls in detail
drawn does not exceed 55 A.
! The power outlets in the front passenger

footwell and cargo compartment are not Cargo compartment
designed for use with the electric air pump.
Use the power outlet in the second-row 115V AC Socket
footwell for electric air pump operation.
G Warning!
The power outlets can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories The 115V AC socket operates at high voltage.
(e.g. mobile phone chargers, auxiliary lamps) Use the 115V AC socket in the vehicle with
up to a maximum of 20 A (240 W). the same caution and prudence that you
exercise when using power outlets at home.
Keep any fluids away from the 115V AC
socket. Do not clean the socket with fluids or
tapered objects. Keep the 115V AC socket
cover in the closed position, when not in use.
Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock
and be seriously or even fatally injured.
G Warning!
A device that you connect must have a
suitable plug that complies with U.S.
standards. Never pull on the cable to unplug
Front passenger footwell
a plug from the 115V AC socket. Do not use
a damaged connection cable. The 115V AC
socket may not be connected to another
115V AC power source. Do not use converters
to a grounding plug with the 115V AC socket.
This could cause serious personal injury to
you and/or others.
G Warning!
If the 115V AC socket is damaged or torn out
of the trim, do not use or touch the 115V AC
socket. Using a 115V AC socket that is
Second-row footwell damaged or torn out of the trim could cause
serious personal injury to you and/or others.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 207
Useful features 207
X Start the engine.

RThe temperature of the DC/AC inverter is
temporarily too high.
X Pull the plug of the small device out of
115V AC socket : and plug it in again
after waiting a few minutes.
RSome small devices have a continuous
Controls in detail
power rating of less than 150 W but a very
high switch-on current. Such devices will
not operate. When connecting such a
The 115V AC socket : provides an
device, 115V AC socket : will not provide
alternating current of 115 volts, which
power.
enables you to connect small electrical
devices with a combined received power of If LED ; still does not come on, contact an
150 W at most. You can connect small authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
devices such as game consoles, mobile
phone chargers, laptops, etc.
Prerequisites for operation: Tele Aid
RThe 12V power outlets in the second-row ! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
footwell and cargo compartment subscriber agreement must be completed.
(Y page 206) are operational. To ensure your system is activated and
RThe plug of the small device must be operational, please press Information
inserted fully into 115V AC socket :. button E to perform the acquaintance
call. Failure to complete either of these
RThe on-board voltage of the vehicle is within
steps may result in a system that is not
the permissible voltage range. activated.
RThe specified wattage of the small device If you have any questions regarding
is identical or lower than the maximum activation, please call the Response Center
permissible wattage (150 W) of the 115V at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
AC socket :. 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
X Operation: Open cover =. Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
X Insert the plug of the small device into acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
115V AC socket :. and password in the mail. You may use this
password to access the Tele Aid section in
LED ; comes on.
“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USA
If LED ; does not come on, refer to the only). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you
section on possible nonoperation causes. access to account information, remote door
X Switching off: Pull the plug out of 115V AC unlock and more.
socket :. The Tele Aid system is available if
Do not pull on the cable. Rithas been activated and is operational.
X Close cover =. Activation requires a subscription for
Possible nonoperation causes:
RThe on-board voltage of the vehicle is not
within the permissible voltage range.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 208
208 Useful features
monitoring services, connection and To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele
cellular air time. Aid call do the following:
Rvehicle battery power is available. X Press button W or X on the
Rthe relevant cellular phone network and multifunction steering wheel.
GPS signals are available and pass the or
information on to the Response Center. X Use the adjustment button on your
COMAND system.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
Controls in detail
possible if the vehicle is able to receive

signals from the GPS satellite network and System self-test
pass the information on to the Response The system performs a self-test after you
Center. have switched on the ignition.
The Tele Aid system G Warning!

A malfunction in the system has been
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) detected if any or all of the following
The Tele Aid system consists of three types conditions occur:
of response: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
RAutomatic and manual emergency not come on during the system self-test.
RRoadside RThe indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
Assistance
button º does not come on during the
RInformation
system self-test.
The Tele Aid system is operational providing RThe indicator lamp in Information button
that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly E does not come on during the system
connected, not damaged, and cellular and
self-test.
GPS coverage is available. The Tele Aid
system utilizes the cellular network for RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button,
communication and the GPS (Global Roadside Assistance button º, or
Positioning System) satellites for vehicle Information button E remains
location. If either of these signals are illuminated constantly in red after the
unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not system self-test.
function and if this occurs, assistance must RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative or
be summoned by other means. Tele Aid Not Activated appears in the
i A Tele Aid call cannot be canceled. Even multifunction display after the system self-
if the Tele Aid system is not activated or test
operational, the system will attempt to If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
connect the respective call. This may take the system may not operate as expected. In
as long as five minutes or more. As long as case of an emergency, help will have to be
the Tele Aid system attempts to connect a summoned by other means.
call, you cannot operate the COMAND Have the system checked at the nearest
system. Also, most functions in the control Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the
system, such as the telephone function, are Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the
suspended. Therefore, it is not advisable to USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
initiate any Tele Aid call unless the Tele Aid as possible.
system is activated and operational.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 209
Useful features 209
Emergency calls G Warning!

! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
subscriber agreement must be completed. flashing continuously and there was no voice
To ensure your system is activated and connection to the Response Center
operational, please press Information established, then the Tele Aid system could
button E to perform the acquaintance not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the
call. Failure to complete either of these relevant cellular phone network is not
steps may result in a system that is not available).
Controls in detail
activated. The message Call Failed appears in the
If you have any questions regarding multifunction display for approximately
activation, please call the Response Center 10 seconds.
at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or Should this occur, assistance must be
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). summoned by other means.
An emergency call is initiated automatically
following an accident in which the Emergency i The “911” emergency call system is a
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags have public service. Using it without due cause
deployed. is a criminal offense.
An emergency call can also be initiated Initiating an emergency call manually
manually (Y page 209).
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
flash. The message Connecting Call
appears in the multifunction display and the
COMAND system is muted. When the
connection is established, the message
Call Connected appears in the
All information relevant to the emergency,
such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location X Briefly press on cover : to open.
system), vehicle model, identification number
X Press SOS button ; briefly.
and color are generated.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; will
A voice connection between the Response
flash until the emergency call is concluded.
Center and the occupants of the vehicle will
X Wait for a voice connection to the
be established automatically soon after the
emergency call has been initiated. The Response Center.
Response Center will attempt to determine X Close cover : after the emergency call is
the nature of the emergency more precisely, concluded.
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle. G Warning!
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
i If no vehicle occupant responds, an vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
ambulance will be sent to the vehicle vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
immediately. do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 210
210 Useful features
The Response Center will automatically X Describe the nature of the need for
contact local emergency officials with the assistance.
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
an automatic SOS signal and cannot make dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
voice contact with the vehicle occupants. Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Roadside Assistance button Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as
labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
Controls in detail
X Open the telephone tray (Y page 198). Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for
more information.
Sign and Drive services (USA only):
Services such as a jump start, a few gallons
of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with
the vehicle spare tire are obtainable at no
charge.
i If the indicator lamp in Roadside
Assistance button : is flashing
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
X Press and hold Roadside Assistance not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g.
button : for longer than 2 seconds. the relevant cellular phone network is not
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside available). The message Call Failed
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The appears in the multifunction display.
indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : will flash while the call is in X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
progress. The message Connecting the multifunction steering wheel.
Call will appear in the multifunction or
display and the COMAND system is muted. X Press the respective button for ending a
When the connection is established, the telephone call on the COMAND system.
message Call Connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will Information button
transmit data generating the vehicle
X Open the telephone tray (Y page 198).
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular and
GPS signals).
i The COMAND system display indicates
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on the COMAND system. Spoken
commands are not available.
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
the vehicle will be established.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 211
Useful features 211
X Press and hold Information button : for X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
longer than 2 seconds. the multifunction steering wheel.
A call to the Customer Assistance Center or
will be initiated. The indicator lamp in X Press the respective button for ending a
Information button : will flash while the telephone call on the COMAND system.
call is in progress. The message
Connecting Call will appear in the
multifunction display and the COMAND
Call priority
Controls in detail
system is muted. If other service calls such as a Roadside
When the connection is established, the Assistance call or Information call are active,
message Call Connected appears in the an emergency call is still possible. In this
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will case, the emergency call will take priority and
transmit data generating the vehicle override all other active calls.
identification number, model, color and The indicator lamp in the respective button
location (subject to availability of cellular and flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
GPS signals). calls can only be terminated by a Response
i The COMAND system display indicates Center or Customer Assistance Center
representative. All other calls can be
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
terminated by pressing button ~ on the
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI multifunction steering wheel or the
button on the COMAND system. Spoken respective button for ending a telephone call
commands are not available. on the COMAND system.
A voice connection between the Customer Destination Download to the COMAND

Assistance Center representative and the system
occupants of the vehicle will be established.
Information regarding the operation of your i The components and operating principles
vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes- of the COMAND system can be found in the
Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products separate COMAND system operating
and services is available to you. instructions.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid Destination Download allows you access to a
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA database of over 10 million points of interest
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the (POIs) that can be downloaded to your
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more. vehicle’s navigation system. If you know the
i If the indicator lamp in Information destination, the address can be downloaded,
button : is flashing continuously and or can be provided with points of interests
there was no voice connection to the near your location.
Response Center established, then the Tele The Response Center can transmit
Aid system could not initiate an Information destination data to the COMAND system
call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone during the connection with the Roadside
network is not available). The message Assistance or Customer Assistance Center.
Call Failed appears in the multifunction The transmitted data can contain address
display. details for a Mercedes-Benz Center or POIs.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 212
212 Useful features
Route guidance “Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password

You will be prompted to confirm that route (USA only).
guidance to the entered address is to be The Response Center will then unlock your
started. vehicle with the remote door unlocking
X
feature.
Select Yes using button = or ; on
the COMAND system. i The remote door unlock feature is
X Press button 9 on the COMAND system available if the relevant cellular phone
network is available.
Controls in detail
to confirm.
The system calculates the route and The SOS button will flash and the message
subsequently starts the route guidance to the Call Connected will appear in the
defined address. multifunction display to indicate receipt of
the door unlock command.
i If you select No, you can save the address
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response
to your address book. Center specialist will attempt to establish
i The Destination Download feature is voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
available if the relevant mobile phone If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled
network is available and data connection is for more than 20 seconds before door
possible. unlock authorization was received by the
Response Center, you must wait
Search & Send 15 minutes before pulling the tailgate
recessed handle again.
“Search & Send” is a navigation destination
address entry service. For more information Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services
on “Search & Send”, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions. In the event your vehicle was stolen:
X Report the incident to the police.
Remote door unlock The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
In case you have locked your vehicle
X Pass this number on to the Response
unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not available: Center along with your password.
The Response Center will then attempt to
X Contact the Response Center at
covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or system. Once the vehicle is located, the
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). Response Center will contact the local law
You will be asked to provide your password. enforcement and you. The vehicle’s
X Then return to your vehicle at the time location will only be provided to law
arranged with the Response Center and enforcement.
pull the tailgate recessed handle
(Y page 75) for a minimum of 20 seconds i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
until the indicator lamp in the SOS button than 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system
is flashing. initiates a call to the Response Center
The message Connecting Call appears in automatically The Tele Aid system will
the multifunction display. initiate the call provided that
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 213
Useful features 213
Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid

service
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
properly
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
supply and GPS coverage are available
Controls in detail
Garage door opener
The integrated remote control can operate up Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote
to three separately controlled devices control
compatible with HomeLink® or some other Hand-held remote control A is not part of the
systems.
vehicle equipment.
G Warning!
Before programming the integrated remote Programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate control
operator, make sure people and objects are X Step 1: Switch on the ignition.
out of the way of the device to prevent
X Step 2: If you have previously programmed
potential harm or damage. When
programming a garage door opener, the door a signal transmitter button and wish to
moves up or down. When programming a gate retain its programming, proceed to step 3.
operator, the gate opens or closes. or
Do not use the integrated remote control with X If you are programming the integrated
any garage door opener that lacks safety stop remote control for the first time, press and
and reverse features as required by U.S. hold the two outer signal transmitter
federal safety standards (this includes any buttons ; and ? and release them when
garage door opener model manufactured indicator lamp : begins to flash after
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that approximately 20 seconds.
cannot detect an object - signaling the door Do not hold the buttons for longer than
to stop and reverse - does not meet current 30 seconds.
U.S. federal safety standards. This procedure erases any previous
When programming a garage door opener, settings for all three channels and
park vehicle outside the garage. initializes the memory. If you later wish to
Do not run the engine while programming the program a second and/or third hand-held
integrated remote control. Inhalation of transmitter to the remaining two signal
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and begin directly with step 3.
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
and possible death. control A of the device you wish to train
approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away
from the signal transmitter button (;, =
or ?) to be programmed, while keeping
indicator lamp : in view.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 214
214 Useful features
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the
press hand-held remote control button B garage door opener motor head unit.
and the desired signal transmitter button
(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttons
i Exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener brand.
until step 5 is completed.
Depending on manufacturer, the “training”
Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly and
button may also be referred to as “learn” or
then rapidly.
“smart” button. If there is difficulty locating
the transmitting button, refer to the garage
Controls in detail
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately

the first time the signal transmitter button door opener Operator’s Manual.
is programmed. If this button has already X Step 9: Press the “training” button on the
been programmed, the indicator lamp will garage door opener motor head unit.
start flashing after 20 seconds. The “training light” is activated.
X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changes You have 30 seconds to initiate the
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light, following two steps.
release the hand-held remote control X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly
button and the signal transmitter button. press, hold for 2 seconds and release the
X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained programmed signal transmitter button (;,
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?) and = or ?).
observe indicator lamp :. X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and
If indicator lamp : stays on constantly, release same signal transmitter button a
programming is complete and your device second time to complete the training
should activate when the respective signal process.
transmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressed
i Some garage door openers (or other
and released.
rolling code equipped devices) may require
i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly for you to press, hold for 2 seconds and
approximately 2 seconds and then turns to release the same signal transmitter button
a constant light, continue with a third time to complete the training
programming steps 8 through 12 as your process.
garage door opener may be equipped with X Step 12: Confirm the garage door
the “rolling code” feature. operation by pressing the programmed
X Step 7: To program the remaining two signal transmitter button (;, = or ?).
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps X Step 13: To program the remaining two
above starting with step 3. signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling Gate operator/Canadian programming
code devices) with the rolling code feature, Canadian radio-frequency laws require
follow these instructions after completing the transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of after several seconds of transmission which
this text. For your convenience and to may not be long enough for the integrated
complete the procedure faster, you might signal transmitter to pick up the signal during
want to have someone assist you. programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 215
Useful features 215
If you live in Canada or if you are having X Switch on the ignition.

difficulties programming a gate operator X Press and hold the desired signal
(regardless of where you live) by using the transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
programming procedures, replace step 4 with release the button.
the following: Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after
X Step 4: Press and hold the signal 20 seconds.
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not X Without releasing the signal transmitter
release this button until it has been button, proceed with programming starting
Controls in detail
successfully trained. with step 3.
X While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle” Operation of integrated remote control
your hand-held remote control button B
as follows: Press and hold button B for
X Select and press the appropriate
2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,
and again press and hold it for 2 seconds. integrated signal transmitter button (;,
Repeat this sequence on the hand-held = or ?) to activate the remote controlled
remote control until the frequency signal device.
has been learned. The integrated remote control transmitter
Upon successful training, indicator continues to send the signal as long as the
lamp : will flash slowly and then rapidly button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
after several seconds.
X Proceed with programming step 5 and Erasing the integrated remote control
step 6 to complete. memory
i Upon completion of programming the i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of
integrated remote control, make sure you all three channels.
retain the hand-held remote control that
came with the garage door opener, gate
X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal
operator or other device. You may need it
for use in other vehicles, for future transmitter buttons ; and ?, for
programming of an integrated remote approximately 20 seconds, until indicator
control, or simply for continued use as a lamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold for
hand-held remote control to operate the longer than 30 seconds.
respective device in other situations. The codes of all three channels are erased.
Reprogramming a single signal Programming tips

transmitter button
If you are having difficulty programming the
To program a device using a signal integrated remote control, here are some
transmitter button previously trained, follow helpful tips:
these steps: RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote
control A (typically located on the reverse
side of the remote). The integrated remote
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 216
216 Useful features
control is compatible with radio-frequency i USA only:

devices operating between 280-390 MHz. This device complies with Part 15 of the
RPut a new battery in hand-held remote FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
control A. This will increase the likelihood following two conditions:
of the hand-held remote control sending a 1. This device may not cause harmful
stronger and more accurate signal to the interference, and
integrated remote control. 2. this device must accept any
Controls in detail
RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held interference received, including

remote control A at different lengths and interference that may cause undesired
angles from the signal transmitter button operation.
(;, = or ?) you are programming. Any unauthorized modification to this
Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 device could void the user’s authority to
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same operate the equipment.
angle at varying distances.
RIf another hand-held remote control is i Canada only:
available for the same device, try the This device complies with RSS-210 of
programming steps again using that other Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
hand-held remote control. Make sure new the following two conditions:
batteries are in the hand-held remote 1. This device may not cause interference,
control before beginning the procedure. and
RStraighten the antenna wire from the 2. this device must accept any
garage door opener assembly. This may interference received, including
help improve transmitting and/or receiving interference that may cause undesired
signals. operation of the device.
i Certain types of garage door openers are Any unauthorized modification to this
incompatible with the integrated remote device could void the user’s authority to
control. If you should experience further operate the equipment.
difficulties with programming the
integrated remote control, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call Compass
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance X Calling up the compass: Press button
Center (in the USA) at V or U on the multifunction steering
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or the HomeLink® wheel repeatedly until the AIRMATIC/
Hotline (in the USA) at 1-800-355-3515, or Compass menu appears in the
the Customer Service (in Canada) at multifunction display.
1-800-387-0100,. The compass displays the direction into
which the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 217
Useful features 217
Infrared reflecting windshield

Infrared reflecting glass reduces the amount
of radiated heat entering the vehicle interior
through the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the
transmission of signals through the glass by
in-vehicle electronic devices, e.g. electronic
i If your vehicle is not equipped with
Controls in detail
toll collection devices.
AIRMATIC, the multifunction display will
show the compass only.
Floormats
G Warning!
Whenever you are using floormats, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened
using the fastening equipment.
To allow the use of these devices in the
Before driving off, check that the floormats vehicle, infrared transparent areas : are
are securely in place and adjust them if
placed in the windshield.
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of each
other as this may impair pedal movement.
X Move the driver’s seat or front passenger

seat as far to the rear as possible.
X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer

pins :.
X Installing: Press floormat eyelets ; onto
retainer pins :.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 218
218
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 219
219
Vehicle equipment ............................ 220

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 220
At the gas station ............................. 220
Engine compartment ........................ 222
Tires and wheels ............................... 227
Winter driving ................................... 251
Driving instructions .......................... 253
Maintenance ...................................... 260
Vehicle care ....................................... 262
Operation
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 220
220 At the gas station
Vehicle equipment At the gas station
i This Operator’s Manual describes all Refueling

features, standard or optional, potentially G Warning!
available for your vehicle at the time of Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flammable
purchase. Please be aware that your and poisonous. They burn violently and can
vehicle might not be equipped with all cause serious injury.
features described in this manual.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline or diesel fuel!
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Turn off the engine before refueling.
Operation
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or
during the break-in period, the more satisfied clothing contact. Extinguish all smoking
you will be with its performance later on. materials.
RDrive your vehicle during the first Direct skin contact with fuels and the
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. health.
RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full
G Warning!
throttle driving) and excessive engine
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm
pressure in the system which could cause a
in each gear). gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
RSelect C as the preferred shift program spray back out when removing the fuel pump
(Y page 120) for the first 1 000 miles nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
(1 500 km).
RAvoid
G Warning!
accelerating by kickdown.
Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by
mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
shifting to a lower gear using the gear fuel system and engine could be damaged. In
selector lever. addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
RSelect gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 119)
only when driving at moderate speeds (for ! Never use diesel fuel in vehicles with
hill driving). gasoline engine. Never refuel vehicles with
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may gasoline engine with diesel fuel. Even small
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds amounts of incorrect fuel will damage the
to the permissible maximum. fuel system and engine. Damage resulting
from the use of non-approved fuels or fuel
All of the above instructions, as may apply to
additives or resulting from mixing gasoline
your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
with diesel fuel or vice versa is not covered
first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine,
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
the transfer case, the front differential or the
rear differential have been replaced. ! If you have accidentally filled the tank
i Always obey applicable speed limits. with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into
the fuel lines. The fuel system must be
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 221
At the gas station 221
drained completely. Contact an authorized For more information on gasoline, see

Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel “Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline
system drained completely. engine)” (Y page 353), see “Fuel
requirements” (Y page 353), or contact an
! Gasoline engine: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
To prevent damage to the catalytic www.mbusa.com (USA only).
converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle. i Diesel engine:
Any noticeable irregularities in engine Only use commercially available vehicular
operation should be repaired promptly. ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM). Information
Operation
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to on diesel quality can normally be found on
overheat and potentially start a fire. the fuel pump. Please contact gas station
personnel in case labels on the pump
! Diesel engine: cannot be found.
When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel For more information on diesel fuels, see
containers, place a filling filter, a suede “Fuel requirements” (Y page 353), or
cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Otherwise, particles from the fuel container Center, or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel only).
injection system.
i Diesel engine:
! Diesel engine: If you have driven the vehicle until the tank
The engine is more susceptible to wear and is empty, the fuel system needs to be bled
damage if you use (Y page 331).
Rmarine diesel fuel The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand
side of the vehicle towards the rear.
Rheating oil
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
Radditives
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO automatically
The exhaust aftertreatment device will be locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
seriously damaged if you use any other i In case the central locking system does
diesel fuel than ULTRA-LOW SULFUR not release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel filler
HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR flap” (Y page 309).
MAXIMUM).
The use of such non-approved fuels and/or
special additives is not covered by the
i Gasoline engine:
Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump. Please
contact gas station personnel in case
labels on the pump cannot be found. X Turn off the engine.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 222
222 Engine compartment
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel Check regularly and before a long trip
filler cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the For information on quantities and
malfunction indicator lamp ! (USA requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 350).
only) or ; (Canada only) to illuminate.
Check the following:
For more information, see also “Practical
hints” (Y page 305). REngine oil level (Y page 224)
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
RTire inflation pressure (Y page 230)
switch. RCoolant level (Y page 225)
KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door (this RVehicle lighting (Y page 313)
Operation
puts the starter switch in position 0, same RWasher system and headlamp cleaning
as with the SmartKey removed from the
system (Y page 226)
starter switch). The driver’s door then can
be closed again. RBrake fluid (Y page 227)
X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at the
point indicated by the arrow.
X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise.
Engine compartment
X Take off fuel filler cap ;. Hood
! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel G Warning!
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
damage the vehicle paint finish. is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be
forced open by passing air flow.
X Set fuel filler cap ; on fuel filler flap :.
This could cause the hood to come loose and
X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel. injure you and/or others.
X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
cuts out – do not top off or overfill. Opening
X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise
G Warning!
until it audibly engages.
Do not open the hood when the engine is
X Close fuel filler flap :.
overheated. You could be seriously injured.
Observe the coolant temperature display to
Low outside temperatures (diesel determine whether the engine may be
engine) overheated. If you see flames or smoke
coming from the engine compartment, move
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene. has cooled. If necessary, call the fire
The fuel system and engine will otherwise department.
be damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. G Warning!
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with You could be injured when the hood is open –
improved cold flow characteristics is offered even when the engine is turned off.
in the winter months. Check with your fuel Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
retailer. prevent burns, let the engine cool completely
before touching any components on the
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 223
Engine compartment 223
vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety

precautions.
G Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or may even
restart after the engine has been turned off.
Operation
Stay clear of fan blades.
X Pull hood lock release lever :.
G Warning! The hood is unlocked.
Vehicles with gasoline engine:
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
! Never open the hood if the wiper arms are
ignition system. Because of the high voltage folded forward away from the windshield.
it is dangerous to touch any components Otherwise the windshield wipers or the
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic hood could be damaged.
socket) of the ignition system
Rwith the engine running
Rwhile starting the engine
Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
engine is turned manually
G Warning!
Vehicles with diesel engine:
The engine is equipped with a high-voltage
electronic control unit for the injection
system. Because of the high voltage it is X Press and hold handle ;.
dangerous to touch any components of the The hood is unlocked.
injection system (injectors, electrical wires)
X Pull up on the hood in direction of arrow
Rwith the engine running and then release it.
Rwhile starting the engine The hood will be held open at shoulder
height by gas-filled struts automatically.
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Closing
G Warning!
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged
before driving off. Do not continue driving if
the hood can no longer engage after an
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 224
accident, for example. The hood could must have been stationary for at least
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in 5 minutes with the engine turned off.
motion and injure you and/or others.
Checking engine oil level
X Let the hood drop from a height of
X Open the hood (Y page 222).
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point above
the headlamps, then it is not properly
Operation
closed. Open it again and let it drop with

somewhat greater force.
Radiator
i Vehicles with diesel engine:
Do not cover the radiator, for example with Example illustration: Gasoline engine
a winter front or bug cover. Otherwise the
readings of the on-board diagnostic system
may be inaccurate. Some of theses
readings are required by law and must be
accurate at all times.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine consumes will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Increased oil consumption can
Example illustration: Diesel engine
occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds. X Pull out oil dipstick :.
Engine oil consumption checks should only X Wipe oil dipstick : clean.
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
X Fully insert oil dipstick : into the dipstick
! Do not use any special lubricant additives, guide tube.
as these may damage the drive assemblies. X Pull out oil dipstick : again after
Using special additives not approved by approximately 3 seconds to obtain
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not accurate reading.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited The oil level is correct when it is between
Warranty. lower (min) mark = and upper (max)
For further information contact an mark ; of oil dipstick :.
i The filling quantity between the upper and
Notes on checking engine oil level lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
When checking the oil level the vehicle must
be parked on level ground and the vehicle X If necessary, add engine oil.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 225
Engine compartment 225
For more information on engine oil, see ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.” off. It could cause damage to the engine
(Y page 350). and emission control system not covered
For information on messages in the by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
multifunction display concerning engine oil,
X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck.
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 293). For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 350) and
Adding engine oil (Y page 352).
! Only use approved engine oils and oil
Operation
filters required for vehicles with Transmission fluid level
Maintenance System. For a listing of
The transmission fluid level does not need to
approved engine oils and oil filters, contact
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
The following will result in engine or transmission.
emission control system damage not
Warranty: Coolant level
RUsing engine oils and oil filters of The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
specification other than those expressly anticorrosion/antifreeze.
required for the Maintenance System.
When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
RChanging of oil and oil filter at change must be parked on level ground, and the
intervals longer than those called for by coolant temperature must be below 158‡
the Maintenance System. (70†).
RUsing any oil additives. G Warning!
In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
RUse extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
if the coolant temperature display indicates
that the coolant is overheated.
RDo not remove the cap on the coolant
expansion tank if the coolant temperature
is above 158‡ (70†). Allow the engine to
cool down before removing the cap. The
Example illustration: R 350
coolant expansion tank contains hot fluid
and is under pressure.
X Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck. RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap
X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
to overfill with oil. pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 226
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under ! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
pressure. where temperatures may fall below
RDo
freezing point. Failure to do so could result
not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
in damage to the washer system/fluid
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
reservoir.
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
Operation
! Do not use distilled or deionized water in

the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
washer fluid level sensor could be
damaged.
X Using a rag, slowly open cap ;

approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure.
X Continue turning cap ; counterclockwise
and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
Rfor cold coolant: reaches marking
Fluid for the washer system, rear window
bar : in coolant expansion tank =
washer system, and the headlamp cleaning
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in system is supplied from washer fluid
(1.5 cm) higher reservoir ;.
X Add coolant as required. During all seasons, use MB Windshield
X Screw cap ; back on and tighten it. Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”. Mix it
with water or premixed washer solvent/
For more information on coolant, see the
antifreeze depending on the ambient
“Technical data” section (Y page 351) and
temperature (Y page 357).
(Y page 355).
X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
of cap : upwards.
Washer system and headlamp X Refill the washer fluid reservoir.
cleaning system X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press
cap : onto filler hole until it engages.
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly For more information, see “Washer system
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ and headlamp cleaning system”
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may (Y page 351).
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 227
Tires and wheels 227
Brake fluid level operating clearance of the wheels and the

tires may no longer be correct.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum G Warning!
mark or below, have the brake system Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
checked for brake pad thickness and leaks tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if
immediately. Contact an authorized the tires have sustained damage, replace
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do them.
not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
When replacing rims, only use genuine
problem. For more information, see
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
“Practical hints”.
Operation
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
When checking the brake fluid level, the in the bolts loosening and possibly an
vehicle must be parked on level ground. accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
recognized on retreads. The operating safety
of the vehicle cannot be assured when such
tires are used.
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
The brake fluid level is correct when it is should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
between lower mark (MIN) ; and upper carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
mark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir. an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
Tires and wheels appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
Safety notes
tire dealer for repairs.
for information on tested and recommended G Warning!
rims and tires for summer and winter Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
operation. They can also offer advice the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
concerning tire service and purchase. could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
G Warning!
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
Replace rims or tires with the same up and possibly a fire.
designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part. For further information
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Important guidelines
If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension ROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same
components can be damaged. Also, the type and make.
RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 228
228 Tires and wheels
RBreak in new tires for approximately The tire inflation pressure should be checked
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds. regularly. Only adjust the tire inflation
RRegularly check the tires and rims for pressure on cold tires. The tires can be
damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire considered cold if the vehicle has been
inflation pressure loss and damage to the parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
tire beads. 1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambient
temperature, the driving speed and the tire
RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire load, the tire temperature changes. When the
inflation pressure and correct as required. tire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), the
RDo not allow your tires to wear down too tire inflation pressure will change by
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this in
Operation
sharply reduced at tread depths of less mind when checking tire inflation pressure on
than 1/8 in (3 mm). warm tires and adjust the tire pressure only
if the tire inflation pressure is too low for the
RWhen replacing individual tires, you should current operating conditions. If you check the
mount new tires on the front wheels first tire inflation pressure when the tires are
(on vehicles with same-sized wheels all warm, the reading will be higher than the cold
around). reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to
match the specified cold tire inflation
pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
Recommended tire inflation pressure underinflated.
G Warning! Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Information placard on the driver’s door
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires B-pillar.
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
the best handling, tread life and riding
more likely to fail from being overheated.
comfort.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
In addition to the Tire and Loading
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
Information placard on the driver’s door
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
pressure label on the inside of the filler flap
because they are more likely to become
for any additional information pertaining to
punctured or damaged by road debris,
special driving situations. For more
potholes etc.
information, see “Important notes on tire
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the inflation pressure” (Y page 229).
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the i Data shown on Tire and Loading
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires Information placard example are for
can overheat them, possibly causing a illustration purposes only. Tire data are
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result specific to each vehicle and may vary from
in handling or steering problems, or brake data shown in the following illustration.
failure. Refer to Tire and Loading Information
placard on vehicle for actual data specific
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and to your vehicle.
Loading Information placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 236).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 229
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation

pressure for normal driving speeds.
Supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for different loading conditions of
the vehicle can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
For the tire inflation pressure for spare
wheels such as Minispare wheels or spare
Operation
wheels with collapsible tire refer to
The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
Rthe yellow label on the spare wheel rim
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle Rthe “Technical data” section of this
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed Operator’s Manual (Y page 350)
apply to the tires installed as original Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
equipment.
the driver’s door B-pillar
Important notes on tire inflation For the tire inflation pressure for full-size
pressure spare wheels refer to
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
G Warning! the driver’s door B-pillar
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly,
Rthe tire inflation pressure label on the
check the tires for punctures from foreign
objects and/or whether air is leaking from the
inside of the fuel filler flap
valves or from around the rim. Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflation
pressures on the tire inflation pressure label
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are valid for all approved, factory-equipped
are also increased while driving, depending tires. When a tire size is specified, the tire
on the driving speed and the tire load. inflation pressure that follows applies to that
If you will be driving your vehicle at high particular tire size only.
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
i Data shown on tire inflation pressure
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside label examples are for illustration purposes
of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold only. Tire inflation pressure data are
tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the specific to each vehicle and may vary from
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can data shown in the following illustrations.
build up and result in sudden tire failure. Refer to the tire inflation pressure label on
vehicle for actual data specific to your
If you are not sure about the proper tire vehicle.
inflation, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the
value for speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 230
Underinflated tires can

Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear
Radversely affect fuel economy
Rlead to tire failure from being overheated
Radversely affect handling characteristics
Overinflated tires
G Warning!
Operation
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for all Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
approved, factory equipped tires
Some tire inflation pressure labels may only wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
show the rim diameter instead of the entire and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
tire size, e.g. R 18 or 18". because they are more likely to become
The rim diameter is part of the tire size as punctured or damaged by road debris,
specified on the tire sidewall (Y page 245). potholes etc.
Overinflated tires can

Radversely affect handling characteristics
Rcause uneven tire wear
Rbe more prone to damage from road
hazards
Radversely affect ride comfort
Rincrease stopping distance
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures

specific to rim diameter Checking tire inflation pressure
i When towing a trailer, inflate the tires to Safety notes

the tire inflation pressure as specified for a G Warning!
fully loaded vehicle. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
Potential problems associated with
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
underinflated and overinflated tires
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
Underinflated tires more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely because they are more likely to become
affect handling and fuel economy, and are punctured or damaged by road debris,
more likely to fail from being overheated. potholes etc.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 231
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the see a corresponding warning message in the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire multifunction display.
and Loading Information placard on the The tire pressure loss warning system may
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires function in a restricted manner or with a delay
can overheat them, possibly causing a Rwhen snow chains are mounted to the
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result vehicle
in handling or steering problems, or brake
Rin the presence of ice and snow
failure.
Rwhen you are driving on a loose surface
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once
(e.g. sand or gravel)
a month.
Operation
Rwhen you are driving in a very sporty
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are cold (Y page 228). manner (involving rapid acceleration or
high speeds in curves)
Checking tire inflation pressure G Warning!
manually When the multifunction display shows the
Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire message Tire Pressure Check Tires, one
inflation pressure: or more of your tires are significantly
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire. underinflated. You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
gauge and check against the Information placard or on the tire inflation
recommended tire inflation pressure on the pressure label.
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 236). If
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
necessary, add air to achieve the
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
recommended tire inflation pressure.
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
inflation pressure by pushing the metal
Each tire, including the spare, should be
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.
checked at least once a month when cold.
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure
Inflate the tires to the recommended tire
with the tire gauge.
inflation pressure as specified on
X Install the valve cap.
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
X Repeat this procedure for each tire.
the driver’s door B-pillar
or
Tire pressure loss warning system
Rthe tire inflation pressure label located on
(Canada only)
the inside of the fuel filler flap
While the vehicle is being driven, the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each
wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the
system to detect a significant loss of pressure
in a tire. If a wheel’s rotational speed changes
due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 232
i The recommended tire inflation pressures G Warning!

for your vehicle can be found on The tire pressure loss warning system can
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard only warn you in a reliable manner if you have
located on the driver’s door B-pillar set the correct tire inflation pressures for
(Y page 236) each tire.
Rthe tire inflation pressure label on the If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set,
inside of the fuel filler flap the system will monitor the pressure
according to the incorrect value.
The tire inflation pressures are not listed in
the Operator’s Manual. X Switch on the ignition.
Operation
G Warning! X Make sure the standard display appears in
The tire pressure loss warning system does the multifunction display (Y page 126).
not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire X Press button * or & on the
inflation pressures. Always adjust tire multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
inflation pressure according to the Tire and until the following message appears in the
Loading Information placard on the driver’s multifunction display:
door B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressure Run Flat Indicator
label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Active
The tire pressure loss warning system does Menu: R-Button
not replace regular checks of the tire inflation X Press the reset button (Y page 122).
pressures since a gradual pressure loss in The following message will appear in the
more than one tire cannot be detected by the multifunction display:
tire pressure loss warning system. Restart
The tire pressure loss warning system is not Run Flat Indicator?
able to issue a warning due to a sudden X If you wish to confirm: Press button
dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. W.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In The following message will appear in the
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully multifunction display:
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt Run Flat Indicator
steering maneuvers. Restarted
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning After a certain “learning phase”, the tire
system pressure loss warning system checks the
set pressure values for all four tires.
The tire pressure loss warning system must
X If you wish to cancel: Press button X.
be restarted in the following situations:
Rafter you have changed the tire inflation
pressure Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (Advanced TPMS), (USA only)
Rafter you have replaced the wheels or tires
Rafter you have installed new wheels or tires
Your vehicle is equipped with the Advanced
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced
X Using the Tire and Loading Information TPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressure
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if in the vehicle’s tires and issues warnings in
available, the tire inflation pressure label on case of pressure loss in one or more of the
the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure tires.
the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
correct.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 233
The TPMS is equipped with a combination low system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
tire pressure/ TPMS malfunction telltale in pressure telltale when one or more of your
the instrument cluster. Depending on how the tires are significantly underinflated.
telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
pressure condition or a malfunction in the telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
TPMS system itself: your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
or more of your tires is significantly significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
underinflated. There is no malfunction in to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the TPMS. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
Operation
RIf the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system handling and stopping ability. Please note that
itself is not operating properly. the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are responsibility to maintain correct tire
equipped with the proper electronic sensors. pressure, even if underinflation has not
G Warning! reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
adjust tire inflation pressure according to the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
Tire and Loading Information placard or the the system is not operating properly. The
supplemental tire inflation pressure TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap. the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
flash for approximately 1 minute and then
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire
remain continuously illuminated. This
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this
sequence will continue upon subsequent
case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
steering maneuvers.
illuminated, the system may not be able to
G Warning! detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
should be checked at least once a month reasons, including the installation of
when cold and inflated to the inflation incompatible replacement or alternate tires
pressure recommended by the vehicle or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading TPMS from functioning properly. Always
Information placard on the driver’s door B- check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
tires of a different size than the size indicated alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
on the Tire and Loading Information placard continue to function properly.
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure i If a condition causing the TPMS to
for those tires. malfunction develops, it may take up to
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has 10 minutes for the system to signal a
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 234
malfunction using the TPMS telltale as the tire inflation pressure values cannot be
flashing and illumination sequence. allocated to the individual wheels, the
The telltale extinguishes after a few message Tire Pressure Monitor Active
minutes driving if the malfunction has been appears. Despite this message, the tire
corrected. inflation pressure values are monitored
already.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display. The current tire i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
inflation pressure for each tire appears in the may still indicate the tire inflation pressure
multifunction display after a few minutes of of the removed road wheel for some
driving. minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that
Operation
the indicated value where the spare wheel

i Possible differences between the
is mounted does not reflect the actual
readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
spare tire inflation pressure.
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the
vehicle’s control system can occur. The tire i Operating radio transmission equipment
pressure displayed by the control system (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
apply to sea level. In high-altitude or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS
locations, the reading on a tire pressure to malfunction.
gauge will be higher than the reading issued
by the vehicle’s control system. Do not i This device complies with Part 15 of the
reduce the tire inflation pressure under FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
such circumstances. following two conditions:
X Switch on the ignition. 1. This device may not cause harmful
X Press button V or U on the interference, and
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly 2. this device must accept any
until the standard display appears in the interference received, including
multifunction display (Y page 126). interference that may cause undesired.
X Press button & or * until the current Any unauthorized modification to this
inflation pressure for each tire appears in device could void the user’s authority to
the multifunction display. operate the equipment.
Tire inflation pressure warnings
If the system detects a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure in one or more than one
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
display. In addition, an acoustic warning
sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the
instrument cluster comes on.
When the vehicle has been parked for longer
than 20 minutes, the message Tire
pressure displayed after driving
for a few minutes. appears in the
The TPMS recognizes new wheels or sensors
automatically after the learn-in phase. As long Example illustration
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 235
The respective tire is indicated by a red Tire pressure

rectangle. displayed after
driving for
Restarting Advanced TPMS a few minutes.
G Warning! X Press the reset button (Y page 122).
It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire The following message will appear in the
inflation pressure to the recommended cold multifunction display:
tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires Restart tire
affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. pressure monitor?
You might lose control over the vehicle. X If you wish to confirm: Press button
Operation
When you restart the TPMS, the system sets W.
new reference values for each tire. The following message will appear in the
The TPMS must be restarted when you have
Tire Pressure Monitor
adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new
Restarted
level (e.g. because of different load or driving
conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to After driving a few minutes the system
the current tire inflation pressures. verifies that the current tire inflation
pressures are within the system’s specified
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
range. Afterwards the current tire inflation
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
pressures are accepted as reference values
recommended for the vehicle operating
and then monitored.
condition. Tire pressure should only be
X If you wish to cancel: Press button X.
adjusted on cold tires. Observe the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the i When the wheel positions have been
Tire and Loading Information placard on the changed, the inflation pressure of a tire
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have may be displayed for the wrong position
supplemental tire pressure information for temporarily. After driving for a few minutes,
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads less the inflation pressure will be shown for the
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. correct position.
If such information is provided, it can be
found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
X Using the Tire and Loading Information Maximum tire inflation pressure
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 236) or the supplemental tire G Warning!
inflation pressure information on the inside Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct. pressures.
X Switch on the ignition. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
X Press button V or U on the wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly affect handling and fuel economy, and are
until the standard display appears in the more likely to fail from being overheated.
multifunction display (Y page 126). Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
X Press button & or * repeatedly until adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
you see the current inflation pressures for wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
each tire appear in the display or the and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
following message appears in the because they are more likely to become
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 236
punctured or damaged by road debris, you about the front and rear axle weight
potholes etc. capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.
Operation
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data

on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure : for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire inflation
pressure (Y page 228) for proper tire
inflation.
Loading the vehicle

: Driver’s door B-pillar
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry. Following is a discussion on how to work with
the information contained on the Tire and
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
Loading Information placard with regards to
can be found on the driver’s door
loading your vehicle.
B-pillar. This placard tells you important
information about the number of people
that can be in the vehicle and the total Tire and Loading Information
weight that can be carried in the vehicle. G Warning!
It also contains information on the proper
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
size and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment tires
and Loading Information placard on the
on your vehicle.
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
(2) The certification label, also found on the can overheat them, possibly causing a
driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, in handling or steering problems, or brake
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating failure.
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo. The certification label also tells
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 237
Tire and Loading Information placard

i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
Operation
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants that
can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear
seating capacity. The Tire and Loading
Information placard showing seating
capacity : is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (Y page 236).
Steps for determining correct load limit

The following steps have been developed as
The Tire and Loading Information placard required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
showing load limit information : is located Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 236). pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
X Locate the statement “The combined Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
weight of occupants and cargo should X Step 1: Locate the statement “The
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” combined weight of occupants and cargo
on the Tire and Loading Information should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
placard. on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
The combined weight of all occupants, Information placard.
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
applicable) should never exceed the weight the driver and passengers that will be riding
referenced in that statement. in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
Seating capacity the driver and passengers from
i Data shown on Tire and Loading XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
Information placard example are for X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
illustration purposes only. Seating capacity available amount of cargo and luggage load
data are specific to each vehicle and may capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
vary from data shown in the following equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
Information placard on vehicle for actual amount of available cargo and luggage load
data specific to your vehicle. capacity is 650 lbs
(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 238
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 240).
Operation
The following table shows examples on how

to calculate total and cargo load capacities
with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. The following
examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 237).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 239
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined weight limit 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs
of occupants and cargo
from Tire and Loading
Information placard

Step 2 Number of occupants 5 3 1
(driver and passengers)
Operation
Seating configuration front: 2 front: 1 front: 1
rear: 3 rear: 2
Occupants weight Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
150 lbs 200 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs 190 lbs
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 4:
140 lbs
Occupant 5:
120 lbs
Combined weight of all 750 lbs 540 lbs 150 lbs
occupants

Step 3 Available cargo/ 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs -
luggage and trailer 750 lbs = 540 lbs = 150 lbs =
tongue weight (total 750 lbs 960 lbs 1 350 lbs
load limit from Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus
combined weight of all
occupants)
The higher the weight of all occupants, the Certification label

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
Even after careful determination of the
available.
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and
For more information, see “Trailer tongue the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
load” (Y page 240). (Y page 240) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 240
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and
GAWR from the certification label. The
certification label can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section
(Y page 344).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if
applicable) must never exceed the GVWR.
Operation
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
allowable weight that can be carried by a on tires are specific to each vehicle and
single axle (front or rear). may vary from data shown in above
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed illustration.
the maximum permissible weight limits The maximum tire load rating : is the
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), maximum weight the tires are designed to
have the loaded vehicle (including driver, support.
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
For more information on tire load rating, see
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
(Y page 245).
commercial scale.
For information on calculating total and cargo
Trailer tongue load load capacities, see (Y page 237).
The tongue load of any trailer is an important

weight to measure because it affects the load Direction of rotation
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
such as better hydroplaning performance. To
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo
benefit, however, you must make sure the
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
tires rotate in the direction specified.
load typically is between 10% and 15% of the
trailer weight and everything loaded in it. An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
Maximum tire load direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
G Warning! the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the replaced. Always observe and follow
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire applicable temporary use restrictions and
and Loading Information placard on the speed limitations indicated on the spare
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires wheel.
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake MOExtended system
failure.
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 241
You may only use the MOExtended system in Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
conjunction with the tire pressure loss periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
warning system (Y page 231) or the tires will age and become worn over time even
Advanced TPMS (Y page 232). if never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary.
i Vehicles with MOExtended system are
not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit.
When retrofitting with tires that do not have Life of tire
run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires, G Warning!
you should also equip your vehicle with a
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
TIREFIT kit. TIREFIT kits are available at any
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Operation
For information on driving in case of pressure The service life of a tire is dependent upon
loss in one or more tires (emergency mode), varying factors including but not limited to:
see the “Practical Hints” section RDriving style
(Y page 330). RTire inflation pressure
RDistance driven
Tire care and maintenance
Tread depth
G Warning!
Regularly check the tires for damage. G Warning!
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation Although the applicable federal motor vehicle
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose safety laws consider a tire to be worn when
control of your vehicle. the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if recommend that you do not allow your tires
the tires have sustained damage, replace to wear down to that level. As tread depth
them. approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
a month. For more information on checking Depending upon the weather and/or road
tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
tire inflation pressure” (Y page 228). widely.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.

Tire inspection
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
Every time you check the tire inflation reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
pressure, you should also inspect your tires (3 mm).
for the following: Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 241) law. These indicators are located in six places
Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s on the tread circumference and become
rubber visible at a tread depth of approximately
1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
16
Rbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the
considered worn and should be replaced.
tread or side of the tire
The recommended minimum tire tread depth
Replace the tire if you find any of the above for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
conditions.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 242
recommended minimum tire tread depth for regarding tire performance. Tire
winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm). manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors:
treadwear :, traction ;, and temperature
resistance =. Although not a Government of
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in
North America have these grades branded on
the sidewall.
Operation

illustration.
Quality grades can be found, where
Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid
applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
band across the tread. shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Storing tires
Treadwear Traction Temperature
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible. 200 AA A
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels. All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
Cleaning tires these grades.
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
Treadwear
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Always replace a damaged tire. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a
Uniform Tire Quality Grading tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Standards (1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Government requirement designed to give based on straight-ahead braking traction
drivers consistent and reliable information
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 243
tests, and does not include acceleration, excessive heat build-up and possible tire
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction failure.
characteristics.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the generation of heat and its ability to
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as dissipate heat when tested under controlled
measured under controlled conditions on conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
specified government test surfaces of asphalt test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor cause the material of the tire to degenerate
traction performance. and reduce tire life, and excessive
Operation
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
G Warning! The grade C corresponds to a level of
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will performance which all passenger car tires
be substantially reduced. Under such weather must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
conditions, drive, steer and brake with Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
extreme caution. represent higher levels of performance on the
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy laboratory test wheel than the minimum
road is always lower than on a dry road. required by law.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
Rotating tires
temperature is close to the freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires G Warning!
(Y page 251) with a minimum tread depth of Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels are of the same dimension.
for the winter season to ensure normal If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
balanced handling characteristics. On tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping tire rotation is not possible.
distance compared to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still G Warning!
considerably greater than when the road is Have the tightening torque checked after
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise changing a wheel. The wheels could come
appropriate caution. loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
cause serious damage to the drivetrain Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz specified for your vehicle’s rims.
Limited Warranty. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all around.
Temperature If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
same dimension all around, tires can be
G Warning!
rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
The temperature grade for this tire is
pattern that will maintain the intended
established for a tire that is properly inflated
rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
(Y page 240).
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 244
dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not

possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire
configuration, tires can be rotated according
to the tire manufacturer’s recommended
intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should be
rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
Operation
(spinning) direction must be maintained.

Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
on front tires and tread center wear on rear
tires).
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels (Y page 242)
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the
; DOT, Tire Identification Number
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for
(Y page 247)
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
= Maximum tire load (Y page 240)
For information on wheel change, see “Flat
? Maximum tire inflation pressure
tire” (Y page 319).
(Y page 235)
A Manufacturer
Tire labeling B Tire ply material (Y page 248)
Besides tire name (sales designation) and C Tire size designation, load and speed
manufacturer name, a number of markings rating (Y page 245)
can be found on a tire. D Load identification (Y page 247)
Following are some explanations for the E Tire name
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(Y page 347).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 245
Tire size designation, load and speed Aspect ratio

rating Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional
relationship between tire section height and
section width and is expressed in percentage.
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing
section height by section width.
Tire code
Tire code = indicates the tire construction
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
Operation
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
: Tire width with a speed capability above 149 mph
; Aspect ratio in % (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
= Radial tire code designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For
additional information, see “Tire speed
? Rim diameter
rating” (Y page 246).
A Load index
B Speed symbol Rim diameter
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
on tires are specific to each vehicle and rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
illustration. Load index
General: Depending on the design standards G Warning!
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall The tire load rating must always be at least
may have no letter or a letter preceding the half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,
tire size designation. tire failure may be the result which may cause
No letter preceding the size designation (as an accident and/or serious injury to you or
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based others.
on European design standards. Always replace rims and tires with the same
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: designation, manufacturer and type as shown
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design on the original part.
standards.
G Warning!
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
and Loading Information placard on the
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
Temporary spare tires which are high can overheat them, possibly causing a
pressure compact spares designed for blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
temporary emergency use only. in handling or steering problems, or brake
Tire width failure.
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire width Load index A is a numerical code associated
in millimeters. with the maximum load a tire can support.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 246
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds Index Speed rating

to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
tire is designed to support. See also ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
“Maximum tire load” (Y page 240) where the
maximum load associated with the load index ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
For additional information on the load index,
see “Load identification” (Y page 247). with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
Speed symbol designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
G Warning! To determine the maximum speed
Operation
capability of the tire, the service

Even when permitted by law, never operate a
description for the tire must be referred to.
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
speed rating of the tires. The service description is comprised of
load index A and speed symbol B.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
causing loss of vehicle control and possibly designation and no service description is
resulting in an accident and/or serious given, the tire manufacturer must be
personal injury and possible death, for you consulted for the maximum speed
and for others. capability.
If a service description is given, the speed
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local capability is limited by the speed symbol in
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent the service description. Example:
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”
conditions. is the service description. The letter “Y”
Speed symbol B indicates the approved designates the speed rating and the speed
maximum speed (tire speed rating) for the capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
tire. (300 km/h).
Summer tires RAny tire with a speed capability above
Index Speed rating 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”
in the size designation AND the service
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) description must be placed in parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
speed symbol in parenthesis designates
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) the maximum speed capability of the tire
as being above 186 mph (300 km/h).
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) maximum permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Index Speed rating
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Q M+S14 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
T M+S14 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
14 or M+Sifor winter tires

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 247
Index Speed rating Load identification
H M+S14 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S14 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special

winter performance. Make sure the tires
you use show M+S and the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire
Operation
sidewall. These tires meet specific snow
traction performance requirements of the
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
and the Rubber Association of Canada
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
for use in snow conditions.
illustration.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
In addition to the load index, special load
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
identification : may be molded into the tire
(210 km/h).
sidewall following the letter designating the
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle speed symbol B (Y page 245).
may have a tire speed rating above the
RNo specification given: absence of any text
maximum speed permitted by the electronic
speed limiter. (like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
the “Technical data” section (Y page 347), (or reinforced) tire.
for example when purchasing new tires. RLight Load: designates a light load tire.
If you are uncertain about the correct reading RC, D, E: designates load range associated
of the information given on a tire’s sidewall, with the maximum load a tire can carry at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be a specified pressure.
glad to assist you.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.
14 or M+Sifor winter tires
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 248
Tire type code

Tire type code ? may, at the option of the
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
the tire.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture A identifies the
week and year of manufacture.
Operation
The first two figures identify the week,

The TIN is a unique identifier. The TIN
starting with “01” to represent the first full
facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to
week of the calendar year. The second two
notify purchasers in recall situations or other
figures represent the year.
safety matters concerning tires. It gives
purchasers the means to easily identify such For example, “3208” represents the 32nd
tires. week of 2008.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tire
Tire ply material
type code” ? and “Date of manufacture”
A.
illustration.
DOT (Department of Transportation)

Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
Manufacturer’s identification mark on tires are specific to each vehicle and
Manufacturer’s identification mark ; illustration.
denotes the tire manufacturer.
This marking tells you about the type of cord
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
and number of plies in the sidewall : and
Retreaded tires have a mark with four under the tread ;.
symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (Y page 227).
Tire and loading terminology
Tire size
Accessory weight
Code = indicates the tire size.
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 249
radio, and heater, to the extent that these GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
items are available as factory-installed
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
equipment (whether installed or not).
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR for the front
Air pressure and rear axle indicated on the certification
The amount of air inside the tire pressing label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
inch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc.
Operation
Aspect ratio loaded on the trailer.
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width expressed GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
in percentage.
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
Bar accessories, passengers and cargo and, if
Metric unit for air pressure. There are applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to never exceed the GVWR indicated on the
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. certification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Bead
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
Cold tire inflation pressure the vehicle including all options, passengers,
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has tongue load). It is indicated on the
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no certification label located on the driver’s door
more than 1 mile (1.6 km). B-pillar.
Curb weight Kilopascal (kPa)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa
equipment including the maximum capacity to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure
of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to
air conditioning and additional optional 1 bar.
equipment, but without passengers and
cargo. Load index
DOT (Department of Transportation) Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department Maximum load rating
of Transportation.
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 250
Maximum loaded vehicle weight Rim

The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
total load limit, and production options assembly upon which the tire beads are
weight. seated.
Maximum permissible tire inflation Sidewall

pressure
The portion of a tire between the tread and
This number is the greatest amount of air the bead.
pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Operation
Normal occupant weight

Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by
The number of occupants the vehicle is tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms recall situations or other safety matters
(150 lb). concerning tires and gives purchasers the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is
Occupant distribution comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at of manufacture”.
their designated seating positions.
Tire ply composition and material used
Production options weight
This indicates the number of plies or the
The combined weight of those installed number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
regular production options weighing over the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those manufacturers also must indicate the ply
standard items which they replace, not materials in the tire and sidewall, which
previously considered in curb weight or include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
Tire speed rating
battery, and special trim.
Part of tire designation (speed symbol);
PSI (Pounds per square inch) indicates the speed range for which a tire is
approved.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
Total load limit
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
The recommended tire inflation pressure for 68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire designated seating capacity.
and Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar. It provides best
Traction
handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Supplemental information pertaining to The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface on
special driving situations can be found on the which it moves. The amount of grip provided.
tire inflation pressure label on the inside of
the fuel filler flap.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 251
Winter driving 251
Tread Winter tires

The portion of a tire that comes into contact G Warning!
with the road.
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
Treadwear indicators
longer suitable for winter operation.
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
that show across the tread of a tire when only G Warning!
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains. If you use your spare wheel when winter tires
16
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may very
Operation
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
well impair turning stability and that overall
Maximum permissible weight on trailer driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your
tongue. driving style accordingly.
Have the spare wheel replaced by a regular
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
A tire information system that provides authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
Always use winter tires at temperatures
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
government testing procedures. The ratings
provide special winter performance. Make
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
sure the tires you use show the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire These tires meet specific snow traction
Load on an individual tire that is determined performance requirements of the Rubber
by distributing to each axle its share of the Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
it by two. have been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
only way to achieve the maximum
Winter driving effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety
systems such as the ABS and the ESP® in
General information winter operation.
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized For safe handling, make sure all mounted
Mercedes-Benz Center. winter tires are of the same make and have
i Vehicles with diesel engine: the same tread design.
Do not cover the radiator, for example with For information on winter tires for your
a winter front. Otherwise the readings of vehicle model, see the “Technical data”
the on-board diagnostic system may be section (Y page 347).
inaccurate. Some of theses readings are Always observe the speed rating of the winter
required by law and must be accurate at all tires installed on your vehicle.
times.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 252
252 Winter driving
Snow chains Winter driving instructions

! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System G Warning!
(ADS): If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
When driving with snow chains, do not sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
select SPORT mode as this may result in and from around the vehicle with the engine
damage to your vehicle. running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate resulting in unconsciousness and death.
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
serious damage to your vehicle or tires,
a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
Operation
make sure the use of snow chains is

not facing the wind.
permissible as specified in the “Technical
data” section of this Operator’s Manual. G Warning!
Snow chains should only be driven on snow- The outside temperature indicator is not
covered roads at speeds not to exceed designed to serve as an ice-warning device
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
as possible when driving on roads without Indicated temperatures just above the
snow. freezing point do not guarantee that the road
Observe the following guidelines when using surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
snow chains: especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
RUse of snow chains is not permissible with
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 347). G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear order to obtain braking action. This could
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
mounting instructions. control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
! If snow chains are mounted to the front this type of loss of control.
wheels, they may scrape against the body The most important rule for slippery or icy
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt
could be damaged as a result. acceleration, braking and steering
ROnly use snow chains that are approved by maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes- system under such conditions.
Benz Center will be glad to advise you on When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift
this subject. the automatic transmission to neutral
RUse of snow chains may be prohibited position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
depending on location. Always check local control by corrective steering action.
and state laws before installing snow i For information on driving with snow
chains. chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 252).
RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
i When driving with snow chains, you may affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
wish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 65) force may become necessary to produce the
before setting the vehicle in motion. This normal brake effect.
will improve the vehicle’s traction. Depressing the brake pedal periodically when
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 253
Driving instructions 253
bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency The possibility of a serious or even fatal

back to normal. accident are greatly increased when you drink
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on or take drugs and drive.
salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
should be tested as soon as possible after anyone to drive who has been drinking or
driving is resumed. taking drugs.
G Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking Pedals
maneuvers. G Warning!
Operation
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Driving instructions Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
Drive sensibly – save fuel obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
To save fuel you should: pedals still have sufficient clearance.
RKeep tires at the recommended inflation During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,
pressures. the objects could get caught between the
RRemove unnecessary loads. pedals. You could then no longer brake or
RRemove carriers when not in use. injury.
RAllow engine to warm up under low load
use.
RAvoid frequent acceleration and Power assistance
deceleration. G Warning!
RHave all maintenance work performed at There is no power assistance for the steering
the intervals specified in the Maintenance and the brake when the engine is not running.
Booklet and as required by the Steering and braking requires significantly
Maintenance system. Contact an more effort and you could lose control of the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. vehicle and cause an accident as a result.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is
in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on in motion.
short trips and in mountainous areas.
Brakes
Drinking and driving
Downhill grades
G Warning!
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and ! When driving down long and steep
driving are very dangerous combinations. grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can shifting into a lower gear to use the
affect your reflexes, perceptions and engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
judgment. overheating of the brakes and reduces
wear.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 254
254 Driving instructions
When using the engine’s braking power, a braking distance, which could lead to an
drive wheel may not spin for an extended accident.
period of time, e.g. on slippery road To avoid this danger, you should:
surfaces. This may cause serious damage
Roccasionally brake carefully when you are
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. driving on salt-covered roads, so that any
layer of salt that may have built up on the
Continuous or hard braking brake discs and the brake linings is
removed without putting other road users
G Warning! at risk
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
Operation
cause excessive and premature wear of the ahead and drive with particular care
brake pads. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
It can also result in the brakes overheating, trip and immediately after commencing a
thereby significantly reducing their new trip, so that salt residues are removed
effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop from the brake disc
the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
accident.
Brake service
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on
for some time, rather than immediately park, ! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
so that the air stream will cool down the be too low if the brake warning lamp in the
brakes faster. instrument cluster comes on and an
acoustic warning sounds although the
Wet roads parking brake is released. Observe
additional messages in the multifunction
G Warning! display that may appear.
After driving in heavy rain for some time Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
without applying the brakes or through water be the reason for low brake fluid in the
deep enough to wet brake components, the reservoir.
first braking action may be somewhat Have the brake system inspected
reduced and increased pedal pressure may be immediately. Contact an authorized
necessary to obtain expected brake effect. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in
All checks and service work on the brake
front.
system should be carried out by qualified
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after technicians only. Contact an authorized
driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is Mercedes-Benz Center.
advisable to brake the vehicle with Only install brake pads and use brake fluid
considerable force prior to parking. The heat recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
generated serves to dry the brakes.
G Warning!
Salt-covered roads If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
G Warning! fluid is used, the braking properties of the
A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe
linings may cause a delay in the braking braking is substantially impaired. This could
effect, resulting in a significantly increased result in an accident.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 255
! Only conduct operational or performance To prevent corrosion and a reduction in the

tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such braking power of the parking brake, observe
tests are necessary, contact an authorized the following:
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could X From time to time, lightly engage the
otherwise seriously damage the brake parking brake before driving off.
system or the transfer case which is not
X Drive a distance of approximately 110 yds
(100 m) at a maximum speed of 12 mph
Warranty.
(20 km/h).
! Because the ESP® operates G Warning!
automatically, the engine and ignition must
Operation
While performing this procedure please
assure that the vehicle is stopped before
applying the parking brake. Otherwise the
rear wheels could lock up. You could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
dynamometer. Such testing should be no
In addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not
longer than 10 seconds.
light up when the parking brake is engaged.
Active braking action through the ESP® Make sure not to endanger any other road
may otherwise seriously damage the brake users when you engage the parking brake.
system which is not covered by the
If your brake system is only subjected to Driving off
moderate loads, you should occasionally test
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
the effectiveness of the brakes by applying
full load on the engine until the operating
above-normal braking pressure at higher
temperature has been reached.
speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the
brake pads. ! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
G Warning!
extended period with the ESP® switched
Make sure not to endanger any other road off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
users when carrying out these braking the drivetrain which is not covered by the
maneuvers. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
! Simultaneously depressing the
System (BAS) (Y page 64).
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes
Parking brake
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
When driving on wet roads or dirt covered is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
surfaces, road salt and/or dirt can get into Limited Warranty.
the parking brake.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer on
the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low
speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or
when conditions indicate possible
hydroplaning:
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 256
X Reduce vehicle speed. injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully

X Avoid track grooves in the road. to assure safe trailer operation.
X Apply brakes cautiously. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
should you require an explanation of
information contained in this manual.
Standing water
Trailer hitch
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Before driving through water, determine its ROnly install a trailer hitch receiver approved
depth. for your vehicle.

For information on availability and
Operation
If you must drive through standing water,

drive slowly to prevent water from entering installation, contact an authorized
the passenger compartment or the engine Mercedes-Benz Center.
compartment. Water in these areas could RThe bumpers on your vehicle are not
cause damage to electrical components or designed for use with clamp-type hitches.
wiring of the engine or transmission, or Do not attach rental hitches or other
could result in water being ingested by the bumper-type hitches to them.
engine through the air intake causing
RTo reduce the possibility of damage,
severe internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the Mercedes- remove the hitch ball adapter from the
Benz Limited Warranty. receiver when not in use.
Prevent water from entering the passenger
compartment or the engine compartment. If Electrical connections
you must drive through standing water, keep The vehicle is prewired to accept the seven-
in mind that wire harness included in the Mercedes-Benz
Rthe maximum depth of the water may not approved trailer hitch receiver kit.
exceed 10 in (25 cm)
i A four-pole conversion plug is available
Ryou must drive slowly from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
i Vehicles with AIRMATIC: Center as a spare part.
If you have selected the raised level For further information, contact an
(Y page 155) before driving through authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
standing water, the maximum water depth
is 12 in (30 cm). Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight
Trailer towing of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo,
equipment, luggage, etc. loaded on the
G Warning! trailer. The maximum permissible GTW to be
Failure to use proper equipment and driving towed: 3 500 lb (1 588 kg).
technique can result in a loss of vehicle Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the
control when towing a trailer. maximum permissible weight on the trailer
Improper towing or failure to follow the tongue: 350 lb (158 kg) limit for Mercedes-
instructions in this manual can result in Benz approved hitch receiver.
vehicle damage and/or serious personal
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 257
Loading a trailer Coupling a trailer

RWhen loading a trailer, you should observe
that neither the permissible GTW, nor the
G Warning!
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) are Vehicles with AIRMATIC: While you are
exceeded. The GVWR is indicated on the coupling or decoupling a trailer, make sure
certification label located on the driver’s nobody locks or unlocks the vehicle and/or
door B-pillar (Y page 236). opens or closes doors or the tailgate.
Maximum permissible values are listed on The vehicle’s level could change and you
the safety compliance certification labels could endanger yourself and/or others as a
for the vehicle and for the trailer to be result.
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
Operation
towed.
The lowest value listed must be selected switch or the vehicle level control system
when determining how the vehicle and when coupling/decoupling the trailer.
trailer are loaded.
Observe maximum permitted trailer
RThe tongue weight at the hitch ball must be dimensions (width and length).
added to the rear axle weight to prevent Most states and all Canadian provinces
exceeding the rear Gross Axle Weight require
Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is indicated on
Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle
the certification label located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 236). and the trailer
The chains should be criss-crossed under
i Mercedes-Benz recommends loading the the trailer tongue. They must be attached
trailer in such a manner that it has a tongue to the hitch receiver, and not to the
weight between 8 % and 10 % of the GTW. vehicle’s bumper or axle.
i The weight of other accessories, Make sure to leave enough slack in the
chains to permit turning corners.
passengers and cargo will reduce the
maximum trailer weight and tongue weight Ra separate brake system at various trailer
your vehicle can tow. weights
Ra break-away switch on trailers with a
Checking weights of vehicle and trailer
separate brake system.
RTo assure that the towing vehicle and trailer
Check with your local state laws for specific
are in compliance with the maximum requirements.
permissible weight limits, have the loaded
rig (towing vehicle including driver, The switch activates the trailer brakes in
passengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded) the possible event that the trailer might
weighed on a commercial scale. separate from the tow vehicle.
RCheck the vehicle’s front and rear gross ! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if
axle weight, the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) trailer is so equipped) directly to the
and tongue weight. vehicle’s hydraulic brake system, as your
The values as measured must not exceed vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes. If
the weight limits listed under “Vehicle and you do, neither the vehicle’s brakes nor the
trailer weights and ratings” (Y page 256). trailer’s brakes will function properly.
i The provided vehicle electrical wiring

harness for trailer towing has a brake signal
wire for hook-up to a brake controller.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 258
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in practice turning, stopping and backing up
park position P (Y page 116). in an area which is free of traffic.
X Engage the parking brake for the vehicle RBefore you start driving check the
(Y page 114).
- trailer hitch
X Start the engine (Y page 110).
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC:
- break-away switch
Set the vehicle level to highway - safety chains
(Y page 154) and set the ADS to AUTO or - electrical connections
COMF (Y page 153).
- lighting
X Turn off the engine (Y page 114).
Operation
X Close all doors and the tailgate.

- tires
X Attach the trailer. RAdjust the mirrors (Y page 94) to permit
X Plug in all electrical connectors. unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer.
RIf the trailer has electric brakes, start your
i Vehicles with AIRMATIC:
vehicle and trailer moving slowly, and then
When you are towing a trailer, the vehicle apply only the trailer brake controller by
level always remains in the highway setting. hand to make sure the brakes are working
The following applies additionally when properly.
towing a trailer: RAlways secure items in the trailer to
RThe vehicle is lowered to the highway prevent load shifts while driving.
level when it reaches a speed of 5 mph RWhen towing a trailer, check occasionally
(8 km/h) if not set to highway level.
to make sure the load is secure, and that
RThe highspeed level is not available. trailer lighting and brakes (if so equipped)
The restrictions that apply to towing also are functioning properly.
apply when using accessories that are RTake into consideration that when towing a
connected to the trailer power socket, such trailer, the handling characteristics are
as a bicycle rack. different and less stable from those when
operating the vehicle without a trailer.
Towing a trailer It is important to avoid sudden maneuvers.
There are many different laws, including RThe vehicle and trailer combination is
speed limit restrictions, having to do with heavier, and therefore limited in
trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be legal, acceleration and climbing ability, and has a
not only for where you reside, but also for larger braking distance.
where you will be driving. A good source for It is more prone to reacting to cross wind
this information can be the police or local gusts, and requires more sensitive steering
authorities. input.
Note the following, when driving with a trailer: RIf possible, do not brake abruptly, but
RIn order to gain skill and an understanding rather engage the brake slightly at first to
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should permit the trailer to activate its brake. Then
increase the braking force.
! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce
the vehicle’s speed immediately.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 259
Do not attempt to straighten out the tow Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed. switch or the vehicle level control system
RIf the transmission shifts between gears on when coupling/decoupling the trailer.
inclines repeatedly, shift to a lower gear
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
range manually (Y page 119). Select 4, 3,
2 or 1. park position P (Y page 116).
X Engage the parking brake for the vehicle
A lower gear and reduction of speed
reduces the chance of engine overloading (Y page 114).
and/or overheating. X Start the engine (Y page 110).
RWhen X Close all doors and the tailgate.

going down an incline, shift into a
Operation
lower gear and use the engine’s braking X Engage the parking brake for the trailer.
effect.
G Warning!
Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheating
the vehicle and trailer brakes (if so Vehicles with AIRMATIC: As soon as you
equipped). disconnect the electrical connection between
the trailer and the vehicle, the vehicle will
RIf the engine coolant rises to an extremely lower. To help avoid personal injury, make
high temperature when the air conditioning sure no one is near the wheel housing or
is on, turn off the air conditioning system. underneath the vehicle before the electrical
Engine coolant heat can be additionally connection is disconnected.
vented by opening the windows, switching When you decouple the trailer, the vehicle is
the climate control fan speed to high and temporarily raised because the springs are
setting the temperature control to the relieved of load. Be especially careful during
maximum. this process, as you could otherwise injure
RDuring a passing maneuver extreme care yourself and/or others. Make sure that any
must be exercised since your vehicle with persons remaining in the vehicle do not press
a trailer will require additional passing the switches for vehicle level control or the
distance ahead than when driving without ADS.
a trailer.
X Disconnect all electrical plug connectors.
Because your vehicle and trailer is longer
than your vehicle alone, you will also need X Decouple the trailer.
to go much farther ahead of the passed X Make sure that the trailer coupling is free
vehicle before you can return to your lane. of load.
X Turn off the engine (Y page 114).
Decoupling a trailer
G Warning! Driving abroad
Vehicles with AIRMATIC: While you are
coupling or decoupling a trailer, make sure If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.
nobody locks or unlocks the vehicle and/or or Canada, you should request dealer
opens or closes doors or the tailgate. network information for your destination from
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The vehicle’s level could change and you
could endanger yourself and/or others as a
result.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 260
260 Maintenance
Control and operation of radio according to Mercedes-Benz servicing

transmitter requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
Safety notes
G Warning!
G Warning! Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
Please do not forget that your primary health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
attention to the road must always be his/her unconsciousness and possible death.
primary focus when driving. For your safety Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
and the safety of others, we recommend that as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
Operation
you pull over to a safe location and stop If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
before placing or taking a telephone call. entering the vehicle while driving, have the
If you choose to use the telephone15 while cause determined and corrected
driving, please use the hands-free device and immediately. If you must drive under these
only use the telephone when road, weather conditions, drive only with at least one
and traffic conditions permit. Some window fully open at all times.
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND15 (Cockpit Maintenance
Management and Data System) if road,
Notes
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Otherwise, you may not be able to observe The Maintenance System in your vehicle
traffic conditions and could endanger yourself tracks the distance driven and the time
and others. elapsed since the last maintenance service.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph It calculates other maintenance service work
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is required, and calls for the next maintenance
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately service accordingly.
14 m) every second. We strongly recommend that you have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. Have it serviced in accordance
Emission control with the Maintenance Booklet at the times
called for by the maintenance service
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep indicator.
the toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible limits required by law. i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
These systems will function properly only accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
when maintained strictly according to factory and maintenance service indicator at the
specifications. Any adjustments on the designated times/mileage will result in
engine should, therefore, be carried out only vehicle damage not covered by the
by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered in
any way. Moreover, the specified service
procedures must be carried out regularly
15 Observe all legal requirements.

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 261
Maintenance 261
Maintenance service indicator Clearing the maintenance service

message indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator message
will notify you when the next maintenance is cleared automatically
service is required. Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you
Starting approximately 1 month before the switch on the ignition
next maintenance service is required, one of Rafter approximately 10 seconds when
the following messages will appear in the reaching the service threshold while driving
multifunction display. The messages will
Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the
appear while you are driving or when you
Operation
switch on the ignition (example service A): suggested maintenance service term has
Service A In XXXXX Miles (km) passed
Service A In XXX Days
Service A In X Day
Service A Due Now
The maintenance services will be indicated by X Clearing the maintenance service

showing a service type A through type H in the indicator message manually: Press reset
multifunction display. Types A through H are button : on the instrument cluster.
classified based on estimated time needed to
The standard display appears in the
perform the maintenance service, ranging
from Service A
(approximately 1 hour) Maintenance service term exceeded
to Service H
If you have exceeded the suggested
(approximately 8 hours)
maintenance service term, you will see the
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of following message in the multifunction
maintenance services and intervals they need display:
to be performed at. Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles
(Km)
Service A Exceeded By XXX Days
Service A Exceeded By X Day
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance service.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 262
262 Vehicle care
Calling up the maintenance service Such literature is available at any authorized

indicator display Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from
Mercedes-Benz.
i The menu overview can be found on
(Y page 126). ! If the maintenance service indicator was
reset inadvertently, have an authorized
You can call up the maintenance service Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
indicator display at any time to check when
Only reset the maintenance service
the next maintenance service is required.
indicator if the proper maintenance service
has been performed. Resetting the system
X Press button V or U on the without performing the proper
Operation
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly maintenance service as called for by the

until the standard display (Y page 126) maintenance service indicator will result in
appears in the multifunction display. engine damage and/or other vehicle
X Press button * or & on the damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
multifunction steering wheel until the Limited Warranty.
maintenance service indicator display with
the service symbol ¯ and the
maintenance service deadline appears in Vehicle care
the multifunction display. Cleaning and care of the vehicle
i If the battery was disconnected, the days Notes
of disconnection will not be included in the
count shown by the maintenance service Regular and proper care will help to maintain
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance the value of your vehicle.
service deadline, you will need to subtract G Warning!
these days from the days shown in the
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
maintenance service indicator message or
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
maintenance service indicator display.
Always follow the instructions on the
Do not confuse the maintenance service particular container. Always open your
indicator with the engine oil level indicator vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the
4. inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator Always lock away cleaning products and keep
them out of reach of children.
In the event that the maintenance service on
your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized ! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the scouring agents. Never apply strong force
maintenance service indicator reset. and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.
The automotive maintenance facility carrying Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
out the maintenance service will find the surface to be cleaned.
information for resetting the maintenance
While in operation, even while parked, your
service indicator in the maintenance-relevant
vehicle is subjected to varying external
literature for your vehicle.
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 263
Vehicle care 263
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle incompatibility between materials used in the
underbody and cause lasting damage. production process and others applied later.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme We have selected vehicle-care products and
and varying climatic conditions, but also by: compiled recommendations which are
RAir pollution specially matched to our vehicles and which
always reflect the latest technology. You can
RRoad salt obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
RTar products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
RGravel
Center.
and stone chipping
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
To avoid paint damage, you should
Operation
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
immediately remove: cannot always be removed or repaired with
RGrease and oil the vehicle-care products recommended
RFuel here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
RCoolant
The following topics deal with the cleaning
RBrake fluid and care of your vehicle and give important
RBird droppings “how-to” information as well as references to
Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
RInsects
products.
RTree resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates Power washer
the aggressiveness and potency of the above ! Follow the instructions provided by the
adverse influences. power washer manufacturer on
More frequent washings are necessary to maintaining a distance between the vehicle
deal with unfavorable conditions: and the nozzle of the power washer.
Rnear the ocean Never use a round nozzle to power-wash
Rin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust tires. The intense jet of water can result in
emissions) damage to the tire.
Rduring
Always replace a damaged tire.
winter operation
Always keep the jet of water moving across
You should check your vehicle from time to the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
damage should be repaired as soon as rubber parts.
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
check is a washing of the underbody followed water, and a SmartKey is within
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
need to be re-undercoated. could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body Tar stains
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither become more difficult to remove. A tar
necessary nor recommended by Mercedes- remover is recommended.
Benz because of the possibility of
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 264
264 Vehicle care
Paintwork, painted body components approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it

could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
or similar materials to painted body Hand-wash
components may damage the paintwork. X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should in direct sunlight.
be applied when water drops on the paint X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
surface do not “bead up”. This should clean the vehicle.
normally be done every 3 to 5 months, X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,
depending on the climate and washing such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
detergent used. Shampoo.
Operation
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a

should be applied if the paint surface shows diffused jet of water.
signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss). X Do not spray directly towards the
Do not apply any of these products or wax if ventilation intake.
your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
is still hot.
and chamois frequently.
X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for
X Rinse with clean water and dry with a
quick and provisional repairs of minor paint chamois thoroughly.
damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
doors, etc.).
finish.
Engine cleaning Automatic car wash

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, You can have your vehicle washed in an
make sure to protect electrical components automatic car wash from the start. Brushless
and connectors from contact with water and car washes are preferable.
cleaning agents. X To protect the filter system, activate the air
Corrosion protection, such as MB recirculation mode using button d on
Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the the climate control panel.
engine compartment after every engine
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage
touchless car wash which uses caustic
bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be
or ornamental moldings.
protected from any wax.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
Vehicle washing running it through the automatic car wash.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of ! Make sure the combination switch is set
road salt as soon as possible. to wiper setting $. Otherwise, the rain
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not sensor could activate and cause the wipers
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels. to move unintentionally. This may lead to
vehicle damage.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
water, and a SmartKey is within the vehicle through an automatic car wash
to prevent damage to the mirrors.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 265
Vehicle care 265
X When taking the vehicle through an Cleaning the driving systems sensors
automatic conveyor-type car wash:
Make sure the automatic transmission
remains in neutral position N. Observe
instructions, see “Remaining in neutral
position N” (Y page 117).
When leaving the automatic car wash, make
sure the mirrors are folded out.
After running the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
Operation
windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
which can be caused by residual wax on the
windshield.
Ornamental moldings
X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
moldings, use a damp cloth. X Switch off the ignition.
X Clean Distronic system sensor cover : by
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
hand.
moldings. Although ornamental moldings
may have chrome appearance, they could To clean Distronic system sensor cover :
be made of anodized aluminum that will be and the bumper area near sensors ; observe
damaged when cleaned with chrome the following:
cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean RUse a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
those ornamental moldings. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
For very dirty ornamental moldings of with plenty of water.
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use RUse a soft, non-scratching cloth.
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
ornamental molding is chrome-plated, ! If you use a power washer to clean the
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz sensor covers, observe the following:
Center. RFollow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer.
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
RMaintain a distance between the sensor
side markers, turn signal lenses
covers and the nozzle of the power
X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as washer.
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that
are suitable for plastic lamp lenses.
Window cleaning solutions which are not
suitable may damage the plastic lamp
lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not
use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that
contain solvents.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 266
266 Vehicle care
Cleaning the rear view camera lens X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap
into place.
X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade
inserts with a clean cloth and mild
detergent solution.
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
cleaning solution on all outside and inside
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
Operation
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto

the windshield before turning the SmartKey
X Only use clean water and a soft, non-
in the starter switch or pressing the
scratching cloth to clean rear view camera
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
lens :.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
Be careful not to apply wax to rear view arm back. If released, the force of the
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If impact from the tensioning spring could
necessary, remove the wax using the crack the windshield.
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with
plenty of water. ! To clean the window interior, do not use
! Do not clean the camera and the area a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
around the camera containing solvents. Do not touch the
inside of the windows with hard objects
Rwith a high-pressure cleaner such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
Rwith a dry cloth and strong pressure damage the windows.
Rwith aggressive cleaning agents
Cleaning the panorama roof with power
You could otherwise damage the camera. tilt/sliding panel
Cleaning the windows and the wiper The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has a
blades protective layer on the inside.
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
! Never open the hood when the wiper arms cleaning solution.
are folded forward.
An automotive glass cleaner is
G Warning! recommended.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents
remove SmartKey from starter switch before
or cleaners containing solvents. Do not
cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper
touch the protective layer with hard objects
blades. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
such as an ice scraper or ring. Never apply
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have
strong force and only use a soft, non-
status 0. Otherwise, the wiper motor could
scratching cloth when cleaning the rear
suddenly turn on and cause injury.
part of the tilt/sliding panel.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
protective layer.
They could tear.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 267
Vehicle care 267
Light alloy wheels ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.

If possible, clean wheels once a week. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of Hard plastic trim items
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels. X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the pressure.
clear coat.
COMAND display
Operation
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
extended period of time immediately after ! You must switch off the COMAND display
it has been cleaned. This applies especially and allow it to cool prior to cleaning.
after the wheel rims have been cleaned
! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners
can lead to increased corrosion of the These can damage or even destroy the
brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved COMAND display screen.
wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply
paint if the vehicle is not driven after with light pressure.
cleaning.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system Steering wheel
should always be warmed-up before it is
parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved
Wheel Care products, take care not to Carpets
spray them on the brake disks.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
Plastic and rubber parts
X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild Headliner
detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing
solution. X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
solution.
The surface may temporarily change color. Seat belts
If this is the case, wait for it to dry. X Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
G Warning! ! The seat belts must not be treated with
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the seat belts at temperatures above 176‡
steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents (80†) or in direct sunlight.
will make the surface porous and vehicle
occupants could suffer serious injuries from
plastic parts coming loose in the event of air
bag deployment.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 268
268 Vehicle care
G Warning! As leather is a natural product, it could

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may otherwise harden or become porous.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may RExercise particular care when cleaning
not be able to provide adequate protection. perforated leather as its underside
should not become wet.
Upholstery
MB Tex upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
clothing that have the tendency to give off onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the light pressure for cleaning the upholstery.
upholstery to become permanently
Operation
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper

intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will Wood trims
be prevented. X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
wood trims in your vehicle.
G Warning!
Only use seat or head restraint covers which ! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
have been tested and approved by Mercedes- wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
Benz for your vehicle model. these may be abrasive.
Using other seat or head restraint covers may
interfere with or prevent Chrome-plated exhaust tip
Rdeployment of the front side impact air Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
bags exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
Rdeployment of the rear side impact air bags and the classy appearance.
Ractivation X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
of the NECK-PRO active front
head restraints Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
been washed, especially during the winter.
for availability. ! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
wheel cleaners as they could cause
Leather upholstery corrosion.
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to a
natural aging process. Leather upholstery
may also react to certain ambient influences
such as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-
Benz approved Leather Care.
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
RWipe with light pressure only.
RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning
agents such as scouring milk or powder.
RDo not soak the leather upholstery.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 269
269

Where will I find ...? .......................... 270
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 274
What to do if … .................................. 299
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 308
Resetting activated NECK-PRO
active front head restraints ............. 310
Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 310
Replacing bulbs ................................. 312
Replacing wiper blades .................... 317
Practical hints
Flat tire .............................................. 319
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
engine only) ....................................... 331
AdBlue® (diesel engine only) ........... 331
Battery ............................................... 333
Jump starting .................................... 336
Towing the vehicle ............................ 338
Fuses .................................................. 340
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 270
270 Where will I find ...?
Vehicle equipment RFuse chart

RJack16
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
features, standard or optional, potentially
RReversible ratchet for jack16
available for your vehicle at the time of RTowing eye bolt
purchase. Please be aware that your RWheel wrench16
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual. RSpare wheel bolts16
X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
Practical hints
i Check expiration dates and contents for

completeness at least once a year and
replace missing/expired items.
The first aid kit is located in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor. To
lift the cargo compartment floor, see “Vehicle
tool kit” (Y page 270).
X Push in floor handle ; as indicated by
arrow.
X Lift cargo compartment floor : using floor
handle ;.
Example illustration R 350 BlueTEC

: First aid kit
Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is located in the space X Release securing hook = (located below
underneath the cargo compartment floor. the floor handle) from holder.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
RAlignment bolt 16
RCollapsible wheel chock 16
RElectric air pump16
16 Vehicles with spare wheel only.

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 271
Where will I find ...? 271
: Wheel wrench
X Engage securing hook = on upper cargo
; Towing eye bolt
compartment lip ?.
Practical hints
= Alignment bolt
! With the cargo compartment cover blind ? Jack
installed behind the third-row seats,
A Collapsible wheel chock
disengage cargo compartment cover blind
and flip it forward. Otherwise the strap of B Fuse chart
the securing hook could damage the cargo C Reversible ratchet for jack
compartment cover blind.
Vehicles with spare wheel
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
compartment floor before closing the
tailgate.
Vehicles without spare wheel

i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
factory-equipped with the tools required for
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel
change are specific to your vehicle. : Wheel wrench
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz ; Electric air pump
Center to obtain the tools approved for = Mounting direction indicator
your vehicle. The illustration shows the ? Fuse chart
vehicle retrofitted with the necessary tools A Alignment bolt
for a wheel change.
B Collapsible wheel chock
C Towing eye bolt
D Spare wheel bolts
E Storage well casing
F Reversible ratchet for jack
G Jack
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 272
272 Where will I find ...?
Collapsible wheel chock

The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure
the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 270).
Storage position
X Take the reversible ratchet from the vehicle
Practical hints
tool kit (Y page 270).
X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward :.

X Fold the lower plate outward ;.
X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
into the openings of base plate =.
For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting
the vehicle” (Y page 324).
Operational position
Jack
X Attach reversible ratchet ; to jack : in
G Warning! such a way that the word UP can be seen.
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
Before placing the jack and the reversible
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If
ratchet back into the vehicle tool kit:
you use the jack for any other purpose, you or
others could be injured, as the jack is X Fully collapse the jack (storage position).
designed only for the purpose of changing a X Remove the reversible ratchet.
wheel.
When using the jack, observe the safety notes
in the “Mounting the spare wheel” section and Spare wheel
the notes on the jack.
X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit i The R 350 BlueTEC does not have a spare
(Y page 270). wheel.
The spare wheel is located in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 273
Where will I find ...? 273
X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 75).

X Lift the cargo compartment floor and
secure it on the upper cargo compartment
lip (Y page 270).
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
compartment floor before closing the
tailgate.
X Remove the jack from the vehicle tool kit
X Place the spare wheel into the spare wheel
(Y page 271).
well.
Practical hints
X Remove retaining screw : by turning it
X Make sure the spare wheel is placed
counterclockwise.
precisely on guide pins :.
i If retaining screw : does not come X Place storage well casing = (Y page 273)
loose, turn storage well casing = slightly into the spare wheel.
counterclockwise. Retaining screw : The electric air pump (Y page 271) must
should then come loose easily. point to the rear.
X Turn storage well casing = by X Turn storage well casing = (Y page 273)
approximately 180°. by approximately 180°.
The electric air pump (Y page 271) points The electric air pump (Y page 271) points
towards the rear. in direction of travel.
X Remove storage well casing =.
i The storage well casing should now be
X Remove spare wheel ;. positioned according to the mounting
For information on mounting the spare wheel, direction indicators (Y page 271).
see “Flat tire” (Y page 319). X Secure the spare wheel by turning retaining
screw : (Y page 273) clockwise.
Storing the spare wheel after use X Place the jack into the vehicle tool kit
There are two guide pins in the spare wheel (Y page 271).
well that serve to hold the spare wheel in
place.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 274
274 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Vehicle status messages in the G Warning!

multifunction display All categories of messages contain important
information which should be taken note of
Notes
and, where a malfunction is indicated,
Warning and malfunction messages appear in addressed as soon as possible at an
the multifunction display located in the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
instrument cluster. Failure to repair the condition noted may
Certain warning and malfunction messages cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-
are accompanied by an audible signal. Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property
Address these messages accordingly and damage or personal injury.
follow the additional instructions given in this
Operator’s Manual. G Warning!
Selecting the Vehicle status message No messages will be displayed if either the
Practical hints
memory menu in the control system instrument cluster or the multifunction

(Y page 130) displays both cleared and display is inoperative.
uncleared messages. As a result, you will not be able to see
High-priority messages appear in the information about your driving conditions,
multifunction display in red color. such as
Rspeed
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
cleared from the multifunction display using Routside temperature
the reset button (Y page 122) or button Rwarning/indicator lamps
&, *, U or V on the
Rmalfunction/warning messages
multifunction steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and Rfailure of any systems
messages of less immediate priority can be Driving characteristics may be impaired.
cleared from the multifunction display using
If you must continue to drive, do so with added
the reset button or button &, *,
caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
U or V on the multifunction steering Benz Center as soon as possible.
wheel. They are then stored in the Vehicle
status message memory menu On the pages that follow, you will find a
(Y page 130). Remember that clearing a compilation of the most important warning
message will only make the message and malfunction messages that may appear.
disappear. Clearing a message will not For your convenience the messages are
correct the condition that caused the divided into text messages (Y page 275) and
message to appear. symbol messages (Y page 285).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 275
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 275
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

ABS ABS, ESP The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Inoperativ malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-
e SAFE® system are unavailable.
See X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
Operator’s during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Manual
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
ABS ABS, ESP The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
Unavailabl The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle
e speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
See
Operator’s
Manual
ABS ABS, ESP The brake system still functions normally but due to
Unavailabl insufficient power supply, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and
e See the PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
Operator’s When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS,
Manual the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-SAFE® system are
operational again and the message should disappear.
X If the message does not disappear: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
ESP Inoperativ In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d comes on.
e See The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Operator’s malfunction the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-SAFE® system
Manual are unavailable.
The ABS may not be operational.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
accident.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 276

ESP Unavailabl The brake system still functions normally but due to
e See insufficient power supply the ESP®, the BAS, and the
Operator’s PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
Manual X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the
ESP®, the BAS, and the PRE-SAFE® system are operational
again and the message in the multifunction display should
disappear.
If the message in the multifunction display does not
Practical hints
disappear:
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
ESP Unavailabl If the yellow ESP® warning lamp d flashes while driving
e See and this message appears, the Electronic Traction System
Operator’s (4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive
Manual wheel brakes.
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
System (4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP® warning lamp d goes out.
ESP Unavailabl The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
e See The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle
Operator’s speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
Manual
PRE-SAFE Inoperativ The PRE-SAFE® system has failed. All other occupant safety
e See systems, such as the air bags, are still available.
Operator’s X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Manual possible.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 277

Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is activated while driving
Airbag even though a child, small individual, or object below the
Enabled system’s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or
See the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or
Operator’s forces acting on the seat may make the system sense
Manual supplemental weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Engage the parking brake.
Practical hints
X Open the front passenger door.
X Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat
and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the
child restraint if necessary.
X Remove any other items from on and around the front
passenger seat and make sure the parcel net on the back
of the front passenger seat is empty.
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged
behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against
roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as
supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the
front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually
present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 42 indicator lamp in the center
console (Y page 44) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the center console
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger
front air bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 278

If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 42
indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective
steps, do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the front
Practical hints
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 279

Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving
Airbag even though an adult or someone larger than a small
Disabled individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces
See acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in
Operator’s weight.
Manual X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the
Practical hints
vehicle.
X Adjust the seat height to a higher position (Y page 82).
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged
underneath, behind or around the seat). Such forces may
cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser
weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 42 indicator lamp in the center
console (Y page 44) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the center console
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger
front air bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 42
indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 280
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front
passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Driving systems

Cruise Inoperativ The cruise control is malfunctioning.
Control e X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized
Practical hints
Cruise - - - MPH One of the activation conditions for cruise control has not
Control been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 143).
DISTRONIC - - - Km/h One of the activation conditions for Distronic has not been
(Canada fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
only) 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for Distronic
(Y page 148).
DISTRONIC Inoperativ The Distronic or the display are malfunctioning.

e X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
DISTRONIC Override You have accelerated. The Distronic has switched off.
X Stop accelerating.
DISTRONIC Available Distronic had been deactivated and is available again.

Again X Activate Distronic (Y page 148).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 281

DISTRONIC Currently Distronic is deactivated because:
Unavailabl RThe Distronic cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
e
RThe functionality is impaired by heavy precipitation or fog.
See
Operator’s RThe system is overheated.
Manual
X If necessary, clean the Distronic cover in the area of the
radiator grille (Y page 265).
X If necessary, wait until the system has cooled down.
X Restart the vehicle.
Distronic becomes operational again without the engine being
Practical hints
restarted when:
Rdirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
Rthe system recognizes full sensor availability (due to
lessening rain or the road surface drying)
Rthe message in the multifunction display disappears
You can then operate Distronic as usual again.
DISTRONIC Currently Distronic is deactivated because the functionality is impaired
Unavailabl by external interferences, e.g. high-frequency sources such
e as toll stations, speed measuring systems etc.
See X Leave the area of the external interference.
Operator’s X
Activate Distronic again (Y page 148) when the message
Manual
DISTRONIC Available Again appears.
Distronic is deactivated because the Distronic sensor has not

sensed any other vehicles or objects, e.g. road sign or such,
for a long time.
X Activate Distronic again (Y page 148) when the message
DISTRONIC Available Again appears.
G Warning! the system is able to detect a dirty sensor. The

Distronic cannot take weather conditions into message DISTRONIC Currently
account. Switch off Distronic or do not turn it Unavailable See Operator’s Manual will
on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is be displayed in the multifunction display and
diminished as a result of snow, rain or fog. The Distronic will be turned off.
distance control may be impaired even before
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 282
Vehicle

Depress You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into
brake to drive position D, reverse gear R or neutral position N without
shift out depressing the brake pedal.
of P. X Depress the brake pedal.
Door Open Vehicle You have opened the driver’s door and the automatic
Not In transmission is still in drive position D, reverse gear R or
Park neutral position N.
X Before you leave the vehicle, make sure the automatic
Practical hints
transmission is in park position P and the parking brake is

engaged.
Drive to The automatic transmission cannot be shifted out of the

workshop current transmission position because of a malfunction.
without If the automatic transmission is in drive position D:
shifting X Without shifting the automatic transmission out of drive
gears.
position D, drive to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the automatic transmission is set to position neutral
position N, reverse gear R or park position P:
X Do not drive.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Only You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into

shift to park position P although the vehicle was still in motion.
P when X Stop the vehicle.
vehicle
is at a
standstill
.
Shift to You have attempted to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GO
P or N to start/stop button while the automatic transmission was in
start reverse gear R or drive position D.
engine. X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P or
neutral position N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.
Auxiliary Malfunctio The backup battery for the automatic transmission is no

Battery n longer charging.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 283
Tires

Check then There has been a warning message about a loss in the tire
tires, restart inflation pressure and the tire pressure loss warning system
Run Flat was not restarted yet.
Indicator. X Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each
tire.
X Then restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 231).
Run Flat Inoperativ The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
Indicator e
Practical hints
X Have the tire pressure loss warning system checked at an
Tire Check The tire pressure loss warning system indicates that the tire
Pressure Tires inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 319).
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 230).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system after
adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (Y page 231).
Tire driving The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the Advanced
pressure for a few TPMS.
displayed minutes. X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
after
Tire Inoperativ The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.
Pressure e X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Inoperativ There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted
Pressure e No (e.g. winter tires).
Monitor Wheel X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Sensors Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 284

Tire Wheel At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).
Pressure Sensor The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
Monitor Missing inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors is

mounted (e.g. spare tire).
The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
Practical hints
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.

X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Tire Currently The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressure
Pressure Unavailabl due to a nearby radio interference source or insufficient
Monitor e power supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,
the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically after
a few minutes of driving.
Tire The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
Pressure(s or
) Please The tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ from
Correct each other significantly.
The tire inflation pressure values are shown in the
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 230).
X Restart the Advanced TMPS (Y page 235).
Caution: At least one tire is deflating.

Tire The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
Defect X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 319).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 285

Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly
Tire(s) below the reference value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
Practical hints
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Symbol messages
Brake
# Brake Wear The brake pads have reached their wear limit.
X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 286
$ EBV, ABS, The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
ESP malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, the ESP®, and the
(USA only) Inoperativ PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
J e See X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
(Canada Operator’s during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
only) Manual
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
$ Release You are driving with the parking brake engaged. In addition
Practical hints
Parking an acoustic warning sounds.

(USA only) Brake X Release the parking brake.
!
(Canada
only)
$ Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

Brake Risk of accident!
(USA only) Fluid X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
J Level
to do so.
(Canada X Engage the parking brake
only)
X Do not drive any further.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark
or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 287
Safety systems
G Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are
Inoperativ malfunctioning.
e X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized
+ Restraint The system is malfunctioning.

Sys. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Malfunctio Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked
n immediately.
Service
Practical hints
Required
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.
Driving systems
Á Level You are driving too fast for the desired vehicle level.
Selection X Reduce vehicle speed and set the desired vehicle level
Not again (Y page 154).
Permitted
Á Vehicle The vehicle level is too low.

Rising X Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction
Wait display.
Briefly
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 288
Á STOP Car You have driven off while the vehicle level was too low or the
Too Low AIRMATIC is inoperative.
The AIRMATIC should have raised the vehicle to the set level
after a short while. While the message is displayed:
X Avoid excessive steering maneuvers. The fenders or tires
could otherwise be damaged. Listen for scraping noises.
X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
If the message does not disappear from the multifunction
display:
Practical hints
Center.
Á Malfunctio The AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.

n X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
Center.
Á Compressor You have selected a higher vehicle level. Due to frequent level
Cooling changes within a short period, the compressor must cool
Down down first.
! When the message Compressor Cooling Down appears
in the multifunction display, driving is still possible. Keep in
mind that the ride height of the vehicle is not yet reached,
so you can damage the underbody of the vehicle.
X Let the compressor cool down until the message
disappears.
The selected level will be set once the compressor has
cooled down.
Vehicle
E You are driving with the hood or the tailgate open.

X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Close the hood (Y page 223) or the tailgate (Y page 75).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
You are trying to lock the vehicle with the KEYLESS-GO
function with a door or the tailgate open.
X Close all doors and/or the tailgate (Y page 75).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 289
; You are driving with at least one door open.

X Close all doors.
+ Key A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle was

Detected recognized while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.
In Vehicle X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
+ Don’t This message appears for a maximum of 60 seconds if the

Forget driver’s door is opened with the engine turned off and no
Your Key SmartKey in the starter switch. This message is only a
reminder.
Practical hints
X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle.
+ Remove Key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.

X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
+ You need The SmartKey is malfunctioning.

a new key. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
+ Key Does The SmartKey in the starter switch does not belong to the
Not vehicle.
Belong to X Find the SmartKey that belongs to the vehicle to operate
Vehicle the vehicle.
+ Change The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are

Key discharged.
Batteries X Replace the batteries (Y page 310).
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
(message X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
appears in X Engage the parking brake.
red)
X Search for the SmartKey.
The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can the engine
be started again after the engine is stopped.
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because there is strong radio-frequency
(message interference.
appears in X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
red) X Engage the parking brake.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
(Y page 80).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 290
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.

Detected X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
(message X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the
appears in
starter switch (Y page 80).
white)
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
+ Pull The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is permanently not detected.

starting X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
button (Y page 80).
out then X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
insert
Practical hints

key.
~ Bluetooth The telephone has not yet been connected to the COMAND
Ready system via Bluetooth®.
X Connect the telephone to the COMAND system via
Bluetooth®.
¥ Top Up The fluid level has dropped to approximately 1/3 of total

Washer reservoir capacity.
Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 226).
Engine
+ Top Up The coolant level is too low.

Coolant X Add coolant (Y page 225).
See X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
Operator’s
system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message
and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat causing major engine damage.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 291
? Coolant The coolant is too hot.

Stop car, X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
switch X Turn off the engine immediately.
engine
off.
X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction
display.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Practical hints
During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡
(120†).
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 292
? Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken.

Stop car, X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
switch X Turn off the engine immediately.
engine
X Check the poly-V-belt.
off.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine
Practical hints
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.
display.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
? The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.

display.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
# The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:
Ralternator malfunctioning
Rbroken poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronic system
X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 293
# Battery/ The battery is defective.

Alternator X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
Stop to do so.
Vehicle X Engage the parking brake.
X Do not continue to drive.
4 Check The engine oil level is too low.

engine X Check the engine oil level (Y page 224) and add engine oil
oil level as required (Y page 225).
at next
Practical hints
X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
refueling.
checked for possible leaks.
If the message Check engine oil level For information on approved engine oils
at next refueling. appears while the contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
engine is running and at operating or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
temperature, the engine oil level has dropped ! Engine oil level warnings should not be
to approximately the minimum level.
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
The message will be stored in the vehicle displayed could result in serious engine
status message memory after you have damage that is not covered by the
cleared it from the multifunction display. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
station to refill your engine oil to the required
level.
C The fuel level is low.

X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Reserve The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Fuel X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Ultra Low- Vehicles with diesel engine only:

sulfur The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Diesel X Refuel at the next gas station.
Fuel Only
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW
SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 294
8 Gas Cap A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The
Open fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaky.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 221).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
¸ Replace The air filter is clogged.

air filter X Have the air filter checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Practical hints
· Clean There is water in the fuel filter.

Fuel X Have the water drained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Filter Center as soon as possible.
Ø Check The AdBlue® supply is almost depleted.

Additive X Have the AdBlue® tank refilled as soon as possible
See (Y page 331).
Operator's Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
Ø Remaining The AdBlue® supply has dropped to the minimum level.

Starts: 20 X Have the AdBlue® tank refilled immediately (Y page 331).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i When the message Remaining approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue®

Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction (corresponds to approximately 2 refill
display, you can start the engine 20 more containers AdBlue®) or have the AdBlue®
times. If you do not add AdBlue®, the tank filled at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
engine cannot be started beyond that Center. After AdBlue® was refilled, the
point. Therefore, fill the AdBlue® tank with engine can be started again.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 295
Lamps
b Active The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning.

Headlamps X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Inoperativ possible.
e
b Reverse The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.

Lamp Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 312).
or
Reverse
Lamp Right
Practical hints
b Brake The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute
Lamp Left bulb is being used.
or X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 312).
Brake
Lamp Right
b 3rd Brake The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This

Lamp message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b Front The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Foglamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Left possible.
or
Front
Foglamp
Right
b Marker The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Front Left possible.
or
Marker
Lamp
Front
Right
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 296
b Parking The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A

Lamp substitute bulb is being used.
Front Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 312).
or
Parking
Lamp
Front
Right
b High Beam The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
or
Practical hints
(Y page 312).
High Beam X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Right
Benz Center as soon as possible.
b License The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

Plate X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 312).
Lamp Left
or
License
Plate
Lamp Right
b AUTO The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come on

Light automatically.
Inoperativ X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
e possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X In the control system, set daytime running lamp mode to
manual (Y page 134).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch
(Y page 97).
b Low Beam The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
or (Y page 312).
Low Beam X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Right
Benz Center as soon as possible.
b Foglamp The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Rear Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 312).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 297
b Switch You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
Off Lights opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on or
removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the vehicle
and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or Ã
(Y page 97).
or
X With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in the exterior
lamp switch to its stop.
b Tail Lamp The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb
Practical hints
Left is being used.
or X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 312).
Tail Lamp
Right
b Cornering The left or right corner-illuminating front fog lamp is

Lamp Left malfunctioning.
or X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Cornering possible.
Lamp Right
b Trailer The left or right trailer brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Brake Lamp X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
b Trailer The left or right trailer tail lamp is malfunctioning.

Tail Lamp X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Left
or
Trailer
Tail Lamp
Right
b Trailer The left or right trailer turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Turn X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Signal
Left
or
Trailer
Turn
Signal
Right
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 298
b Turn The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A

Signal substitute bulb is being used.
Rear Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 312).
or
Turn
Signal
Rear Right
b Turn The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A

Signal substitute bulb is being used.
Front Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 312).
or
Practical hints
Turn
Signal
Front
Right
b Turn The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror is
Signal malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs have
Left stopped working.
Mirror X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
Turn
Signal
Right
Mirror
Tires
h Tire The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
pressure(s or
) Please The tire inflation pressure of the individual tires differ from
Correct each other significantly.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 230).
h Tire At least one tire is deflating.

Pressure X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Caution: steering and braking maneuvers.
Tire X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 319).
Defect
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 299
What to do if … 299
h Tire The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly

Pressure below the reference value.
Check X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Tires steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
Practical hints
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
What to do if … When you switch on the ignition, all lamps

(except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
Lamps in instrument cluster high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the
Notes
instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
If any of the following lamps in the instrument instrument cluster fails to come on when the
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- ignition is switched on, have it checked and
check when switching on the ignition, have replaced if necessary.
the respective bulb checked and replaced if
necessary.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 300
300 What to do if …
Brake
Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

! The yellow ABS The ABS has detected a malfunction and switched off. The BAS,
indicator lamp the ESP® and the PRE-SAFE® are also switched off.
comes on while The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
the engine is systems specified above available.
running.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as
the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be
malfunctioning.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Practical hints
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the

multifunction display (Y page 274).
accident.
! The yellow ABS The ABS has switched off due to insufficient power supply.
indicator lamp The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
comes on while When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
the engine is operational again. The ABS indicator lamp should go out.
running.
X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator
and the battery checked.
! The yellow ABS The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.
indicator lamp The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a
comes on while vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
the engine is
running.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 301

$ (USA only) The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) switched off due to a
J (Canada only) malfunction.
! The ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are also switched off.
d X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The red brake warning Center as soon as possible.
lamp comes on while Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
driving. In addition, the accident.
yellow ABS malfunction
indicator lamp, and the
yellow ESP® warning
lamp come on and an
Practical hints
acoustic warning
sounds.
$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and an acoustic
warning sounds.
$ (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
J (Canada only) Risk of accident!
The red brake warning X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
lamp comes on while soon as it is safe to do so.
the engine is running X Engage the parking brake.
and an acoustic
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
warning sounds.
multifunction display (Y page 274).
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning! the brake fluid catching fire. You can be

Driving with the brake warning lamp seriously burned.
illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if the ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
brake fluid before checking the brake system. mark or below, have the brake system
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 302
Safety systems

7 The red seat belt The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten
telltale comes your seat belts before driving off.
on for a X Fasten your seat belts.
maximum of
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
6 seconds after
belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
starting the
starting the engine.
engine.
7 The red seat belt You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
telltale comes X Fasten your seat belt.
Practical hints
on. In addition The warning chime stops sounding.

you hear a
warning chime
for a maximum
of 6 seconds
after starting the
engine.
7 The red seat belt You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your
telltale comes seat belts.
on while the X Fasten your seat belts.
vehicle is The seat belt telltale goes out.
standing still
and the engine is There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
running or while the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
driving. X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
7 The red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you
telltale flashes and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat
while driving. In belts.
addition, an X Fasten your seat belts.
intermittent The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
warning chime sounding.
sounds with
increasing There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
intensity. the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 303
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.

+ The red SRS There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or
indicator lamp Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
comes on while or fail to activate in an accident.
driving. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Practical hints
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.

d The yellow ESP® The ESP® has been switched off.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while
When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
the engine is
system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
running.
is spinning.
X Switch the ESP® back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 65).
X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
d The yellow ESP® The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while X
Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
the engine is
running.
X Continue driving with added caution.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 304

d The yellow ESP® The ESP® or the 4-ETS has come into operation because of
warning lamp detected traction loss in at least one tire.
flashes while The cruise control is deactivated.
driving. X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 65).

Practical hints
accident.
At least one wheel is spinning and the 4-ETS has switched off to
prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes.
X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the 4-ETS switches on
again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP® warning lamp d goes out.
Driving systems

· The red distance You are too close to the vehicle in front of you to maintain selected
warning lamp speed.
comes on while X Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following
driving. distance.
· The red distance You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you or the
warning lamp distance warning system has recognized a stationary obstacle on
comes on while your probable line of travel.
driving and an X Apply the brakes immediately.
acoustic X Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake
warning sounds.
or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 305
Vehicle

The yellow fuel tank The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
reserve warning lamp in X Refuel at the next gas station.
the fuel gauge comes
on while driving.
Engine

! (USA only) There may be a malfunction in
Practical hints
; (Canada only) Rthe fuel management system
The yellow engine Rthe ignition system
malfunction indicator
Rthe emission control system
lamp comes on when
the engine is running. Rsystems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as
soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
! (USA only) A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel
; (Canada only) cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
The yellow engine X Check the fuel cap (Y page 220).
malfunction indicator X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
lamp comes on when X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
the engine is running. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Diesel engine: Your fuel tank was driven empty.

X After refueling, start, turn off and restart the engine three or four
times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your
vehicle checked.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 306
Tires

h USA only: The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
Combination X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
low tire pressure braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
telltale/TPMS X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
malfunction (Y page 274).
telltale for the
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
Advanced TPMS
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
illuminates
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
continuously.
Practical hints
h USA only: There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.

Combination X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
low tire pressure (Y page 274).
telltale/TPMS X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-
malfunction Benz Center.
telltale for the
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
Advanced TPMS
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes
flashes 60
of driving.
seconds and
then stays
illuminated.
G Warning! your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
should be checked at least once a month significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
when cold and inflated to the inflation to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
pressure recommended by the vehicle Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
Information placard on the driver’s door B- handling and stopping ability. Please note that
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has maintenance, and it is the driver’s
tires of a different size than the size indicated responsibility to maintain correct tire
on the Tire and Loading Information placard pressure, even if underinflation has not
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should reached the level to trigger illumination of the
determine the proper tire inflation pressure TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
for those tires. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring the system is not operating properly. The
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
pressure telltale when one or more of your the low tire pressure telltale. When the
tires are significantly underinflated. system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure flash for approximately 1 minute and then
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check remain continuously illuminated. This
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 307
sequence will continue upon subsequent or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction TPMS from functioning properly. Always
exists. When the malfunction indicator is check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
illuminated, the system may not be able to replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
reasons, including the installation of continue to function properly.
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
Lamp in center console
Practical hints
Canada only: A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the front passenger seat.
42 Therefore the front passenger front air bag is switched off.
The front passenger
The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child
front air bag off
seat installed on the front passenger seat.
indicator lamp
illuminates and X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
remains illuminated Mercedes-Benz Center.
(Y page 47).
Canada only: The system is malfunctioning.
42 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.
The front passenger X Check installation of the child seat (Y page 57).
front air bag off If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:
indicator lamp does not
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
illuminate or does not
remain illuminated with
a BabySmartTM child Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the
seat properly installed front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
on the passenger seat.
USA only: The system is malfunctioning.
42 X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
The front passenger Mercedes-Benz Center.
front air bag off X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
indicator lamp follow corrective steps (Y page 274).
illuminates and
remains illuminated
with the weight of a
typical adult or
someone larger than a
small individual on the
front passenger seat.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 308
308 Unlocking/locking manually
G Warning! than a small individual on the front passenger

If the 42 indicator lamp seat, do not have any passenger use the front
illuminates and remains illuminated with the passenger seat until the system has been
weight of a typical adult or someone larger repaired.

USA only: The system is malfunctioning.
42 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
The front passenger and check installation of the child seat.
front air bag off X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the
indicator lamp does not seat are present.
illuminate and/or does X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
Practical hints
not remain illuminated (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or
with the weight of a around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The
typical 12-month-old system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
child in a standard child X
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains
restraint or less on the
out, have the system checked as soon as possible at an
front passenger seat.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
follow corrective steps (Y page 274).
G Warning! and
If the 42 indicator lamp does not Ropen the driver’s door
illuminate or remains out with the weight of a To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey into
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child the starter switch.
restraint or less on the front passenger seat,
do not transport a child on the front
Removing the mechanical key
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the
driver’s door using the mechanical key.
The anti-theft alarm system will trigger when
you SmartKey
Runlocking the driver’s door with the
mechanical key
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 309
Unlocking/locking manually 309
Locking the vehicle

If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as
follows:
X Close the front passenger door, the right
rear door, and the tailgate.
X Open the driver’s door and the rear left
door.
X Press the central locking switch
(Y page 74).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
The locking knobs of the front passenger
X Move locking tab : in the direction of door and the rear doors move down.
Practical hints
arrow. X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing. drained: Press down the locking knobs on
the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
Unlocking the driver’s door
X Exit the vehicle.
X Close the driver’s door.
X Enter the vehicle through the rear left door.

X Press down the locking knob of the driver’s
door.
! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make
sure to have the SmartKey with you before
proceeding with the next step. The next
step will lock the vehicle.
X Exit the vehicle.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s X Close the rear left door.
door lock. The vehicle is locked.
X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise
to position 1. i This procedure does not arm the anti-
theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
X Pull the door handle past the resistance
filler flap.
point until the locking knob moves up.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
X Pull the door handle once more to open the Fuel filler flap
driver’s door.
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove G Warning!
it from the driver’s door lock. Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
could injure yourself while releasing the fuel
filler flap.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 310
310 Replacing SmartKey batteries
In case the central locking system does not G Warning!

release the fuel filler flap, you can open it When pushing back the head restraint
manually. cushion, make sure your fingers do not
The fuel filler flap release is located on the become caught between the head restraint
passenger side in the cargo compartment cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
behind the cover. lead to injury.
X Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
X Open the cover on the passenger-side trim i Pressing the head restraint cushion back
panel (Y page 317). requires high force. If you encounter
difficulties when pushing the head restraint
back, please have the procedure
performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Practical hints
X Pull red fuel filler flap release : in

direction of arrow.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 220).
X Pull the top of the head restraint cushion in
X Close the cover. direction of arrow : as far as it will go.
X Close the tailgate.
X Adjust the head restraint cushion
downward in direction of arrow ; as far as
it will go.
Resetting activated NECK-PRO active X Firmly press the top of the head restraint
front head restraints
cushion towards the head restraint cover in
direction of arrow = until it engages.
If the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
X Repeat this procedure on the NECK-PRO
have been triggered in a rear-end collision,
they must be reset. active front head restraint for the second
front seat.
You can tell that the NECK-PRO active front
head restraints have been triggered when For information on NECK-PRO active front
they have been moved forward and cannot be head restraints, see “NECK-PRO active front
adjusted. head restraints” (Y page 53).
G Warning!
For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO active Replacing SmartKey batteries
front head restraints checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center after a If the batteries in the SmartKey are
rear-end collision. discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 311
Replacing SmartKey batteries 311
have the batteries replaced at an authorized SmartKey

G Warning!
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries out
of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
G Warning!
SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
Practical hints
and regard for the environment. Check with
your local government’s disposal guidelines. opening until battery compartment
California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ cover : opens. Do not keep the cover
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ shut.
index.cfm.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the

environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
of disposal. Many states (USA only) or
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
When inserting the batteries, make sure they
are clean and free of lint.
When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
X Remove the battery compartment cover.
i The required replacement batteries are
X Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
hand until battery = falls out.
Center.
X Insert the new battery with the positive
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth.
CR 2025 or equivalent.
X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment
X Remove the mechanical key from the
cover into the housing and press the cover
SmartKey (Y page 308). closed.
X Slide mechanical key : back into the
SmartKey.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 312
312 Replacing bulbs
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Replacing bulbs

Safety notes
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling to a large
degree.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
headlamp adjustment.
X Insert mechanical key : into opening. G Warning!
Practical hints
X Press mechanical key : in direction of Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow
arrow. the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Battery compartment ; is unlatched. Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
X Pull battery compartment ; out of the Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
SmartKey housing. bulb can explode if you
Rtouch or move it when hot
Rdrop the bulb
Rscratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
X Pull out batteries =. i Since replacing bulbs is a technically

X Insert new batteries = under contact highly demanding process, we recommend
springs ? with the positive terminal (+) to have them replaced at an authorized
side facing up. Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Return battery compartment ; into
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
SmartKey housing until it locks into place. fogged up on the inside as a result of high
X Slide mechanical key : back into the humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
SmartKey. the lights on should clear up the fogging.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey as
well as the KEYLESS-GO function.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 313
Replacing bulbs 313
Bulbs
You can replace the following bulbs yourself:
Halogen headlamps Type
: Turn signal lamp: 3457A
; Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
= Low-beam lamp: H7 55 W
? High-beam lamp/High-beam flasher
lamp: H7 55 W
Practical hints
Bi-Xenon headlamps Type
: Turn signal lamp: 3457A
; Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
= High-beam flasher lamp/High-beam
flasher spot lamp: H7 55 W
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 314
314 Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Type

: Tail lamp, brake lamp, side marker lamp:
P 21 W
; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
= Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only): P 21 W
? Backup lamp: P 21 W
Practical hints
License plate lamps Type

: License plate lamps: C 5 W
Notes on bulb replacement i Mercedes-Benz recommends using

Longlife (LL) bulbs.
! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not
described in this section. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs or Replacing bulbs for front lamps
parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and
bulbs replaced at an authorized Mercedes- Before you start to replace a bulb for a front
Benz Center. lamp, do the following:
ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and X Switch off the ignition.
with the specified watt rating. X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb $.

to prevent short circuits. X Open the hood (Y page 222).
RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when

handling bulbs.
RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
grease.
RIf the newly installed bulb does not come
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 315
Replacing bulbs 315
Example illustration: Passenger side headlamp ; Bulb socket for front turn signal lamp bulb
: Housing cover for low-beam and high- = Bulb socket for low-beam headlamp bulb
beam halogen or Bi-Xenon headlamp
Practical hints
(halogen headlamps only)
G Warning! ? Bulb socket for high-beam headlamp/
high-beam flasher bulb
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps
repair the lamp and its components. It is only)
recommended to have such work done by a X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
qualified technician. and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket = with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket =.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
=.
X Place bulb socket = back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
; Bulb socket for front turn signal lamp bulb High-beam and high-beam flasher bulb
(halogen headlamps only)
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket ? with the bulb
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket ?.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb
socket ?.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 316
316 Replacing bulbs
X Place bulb socket ? back into the housing X Gently press the new bulb into bulb
and turn it clockwise until it engages. socket :.
X Align housing cover : and turn it X Place bulb socket : back into the housing
clockwise until it engages. and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Front turn signal lamp bulb

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
X Turn bulb socket ; with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it. Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following:
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$.
Practical hints
Tail lamp unit

To access the tail lamp units, you first have to
remove the cover in the corresponding side
trim panel of the cargo compartment.
X Open the tailgate.
X On both sides open catch A and pull bulb

Opening the driver’s side trim panel
B out of bulb socket ;.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb
socket ;.
X Place bulb socket ; back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Parking and standing lamp bulb
X Insert a suitable object such as a coin into

the slot of lock :.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of the
arrow.
X Remove cover ;.
X Turn bulb socket : with the bulb

X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket :.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 317
Replacing wiper blades 317
Opening the passenger-side trim panel X Gently press the new bulb into its bulb
socket and turn it clockwise until it
engages.
X Align the bulb socket and turn it clockwise.
X Make sure the bulb socket is attached
properly.
X Close the respective cover in the cargo
compartment.
License plate lamps

X Insert a suitable object such as a coin into
Practical hints
the slot of lock :.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of the
arrow.
X Remove cover ;.
Replacing bulbs
X Loosen screws : of lamp cover to be

removed.
X Remove lamp cover ;.
X Replace the bulb.
X Reinstall lamp cover ;.
X Retighten screws :.
Example illustration: Rear lamp driver’s side

: Tail lamp, side marker lamp, brake lamp,
parking and standing lamp bulb socket Replacing wiper blades
; Backup lamp bulb socket Safety notes
= Rear fog lamp bulb socket (driver’s side
only) G Warning!
? Rear turn signal lamp bulb socket For safety reasons, switch off the wipers and
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
X Depending on which bulb needs to be (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the
replaced, turn the respective bulb socket vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)
counterclockwise. before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the
X Pull the bulb socket out of the housing. wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause
X Gently press onto the bulb and turn it injury.
counterclockwise out of its bulb socket.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 318
318 Replacing wiper blades
G Warning!
Wiper blades are components that are subject
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.
Otherwise the windows will not be wiped
properly. As a result, you may not be able to
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
could cause an accident.
! Never open the hood when a front wiper

arm is folded forward.
X Press tabs ; together.
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the X Tilt wiper blade : away from wiper arm
Practical hints
impact from the tensioning spring could =.

crack the windshield or the rear window. X Take off wiper blade : in direction of
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the arrow.
windshield glass or the rear window
without a wiper blade inserted. Rear wiper blade
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
this work carried out at an authorized ! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It
Mercedes-Benz Center. could tear.

switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (Y page 80).
Removing wiper blades

Front wiper blades
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear
They could tear. window until it engages.
X Turn wiper blade ; as far as it will go.
X Fold the wiper arms forward until they
X Hold wiper arm : and disengage wiper
engage.
blade ; by carefully sliding it in direction
of arrow.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 319
Flat tire 319
Installing wiper blades X Insert wiper blade ; into wiper arm :.

X Hold wiper arm : and engage wiper
Front wiper blades
blade ; by pushing it in direction of arrow
until it locks into place.
X Check whether the wiper blade is securely
fastened.
X Fold wiper arm : to rest on the rear
window.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back.
! Make sure the wiper blade is installed
properly. An improperly installed wiper
Practical hints
blade may cause rear window damage.
X With guide tab = sliding into opening ?,
place wiper blade : onto wiper arm in
direction of arrow. Flat tire
X Fold wiper blade : towards wiper arm. Safety notes
Tabs ; (Y page 318) must engage into
both recesses of attachment ;. Your vehicle may be equipped with an
MOExtended system or a spare wheel with
X Check whether the wiper blade is securely
collapsible tire. Vehicles with an MOExtended
fastened. system do not have a spare wheel or a TIREFIT
X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the kit.
windshield. For information on your vehicle’s equipment,
Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm see “Rims and tires” (Y page 347).
when folding it back.
G Warning!
! Make sure the wiper blades are installed The dimensions of the spare wheel are
properly. Improperly installed wiper blades different from those of the road wheels. As a
may cause windshield damage. result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
Rear wiper blade mounted. Adapt your driving style
accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with a spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than one
spare wheel mounted.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 320
320 Flat tire
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare Only use the power outlet in the second-
wheel is mounted. row footwell for electric air pump
operation.
G Warning! You can use the power outlet even when
Vehicles with AIRMATIC: the ignition is switched off, e.g. in order to
Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate inflate the collapsible tire.
while mounting a spare wheel. The vehicle An emergency shut-off feature is designed
could rise or lower to a previously selected to prevent the vehicle’s on-board voltage
level. You or others could be injured as a from dropping below a minimum level. If
result. the on-board voltage drops to this
minimum level, the power outlets are
switched off automatically to help preserve
Preparing the vehicle engine starting power.
Practical hints
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC:

Make sure the vehicle level is set to
Sealing tires with TIREFIT
highway level (Y page 153).
X Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a This section applies to vehicles retrofitted
safe distance from moving traffic on a hard, with a TIREFIT kit only.
flat surface. Small tire punctures, particularly those in the
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher. tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures
wheels are in a straight-ahead position. down to -4‡ (-20†).
X Engage the parking brake. G Warning!
X Shift the automatic transmission into park TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
position P. cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
X Turn off the engine. than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter damage caused by driving with extremely low
switch. tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or a
damaged wheel.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
Do not drive the vehicle under such
circumstances.
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-
removed from the starter switch). The Benz Center for assistance or call Roadside
driver’s door can then be closed again. Assistance.
Open doors only when conditions are safe
X Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)
to do so.
should not be removed from the tire.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Remove the
X Take the TIREFIT kit, the sticker, and the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the
starter switch. electric air pump out of the vehicle.
X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
safe distance from the roadway. Open
doors only when conditions are safe to do
so.
i Vehicles retrofitted with TIREFIT kit:
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 321
Flat tire 321
G Warning!
Observe safety instructions on air pump label.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of

two versions of the electric air pump:
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are located
behind a flap.
RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose and
Two-part sticker electrical plug are located at the bottom of
X Attach upper part : of the sticker where the pump housing.
Practical hints
it will be easily seen by the driver on the The following description applies to both
instrument cluster. versions. Differences in usage are expressly
X Attach lower part ; of the sticker to the declared.
damaged tire (close to the tire valve).
G Warning!
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT
to come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing.
TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or
absorbed through the skin - causes skin, eye
and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
Version 1
change clothing as soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.
G Warning!
Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.
Version 2
i If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
X Version 1 only: Open flap C on the
can then peel it off.
If clothing has come in contact with electric air pump.
TIREFIT, have it dry-cleaned with X Pull plug ? and air hose A out of the pump
perchloroethylene as soon as possible. housing.

X Screw the air pump’s air hose A onto
flange B of TIREFIT container :.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 322
322 Flat tire
X Stick TIREFIT container : upside down X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
into notch ; of the electric air pump. position 1.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Do
not depress the brake pedal.
X Press I on electric air pump switch =.
The electric air pump is switched on and
inflates the tire.
i First, the sealing is pumped into the tire.
The pressure may briefly rise to up to 73 psi
(5 bar). This is normal and not an indication
Practical hints
Example illustration of a malfunction. Do not switch off the

X Unscrew the valve cap of the damaged tire electric air pump.
from tire valve E. X Let the electric air pump inflate the tire for
approximately 5 minutes.
The pressure gauge must display at least
26 psi (1.8 bar).
G Warning!
The air hose can become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
! Do not operate the electric air pump

longer than 8 minutes without interruption.
Otherwise it may overheat.
Version 1 You may operate the air pump again after
X
it has cooled off.
Version 1 only: Close vent screw F on
pressure gauge G. If the tire inflation pressure of at least
X Screw filler hose D onto tire valve E. 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained:
X Insert electrical plug ? into the power X Turn off the electric air pump by pressing
outlet in the second-row footwell 0 on electric air pump switch =.
(Y page 205). X Detach filler hose D from tire valve E.
! The cigarette lighter as well as the power X Drive vehicle back or forth very slowly
outlets in the passenger footwell and cargo approximately 30 ft (10 m).

compartment are not designed for use with This serves to better distribute the TIREFIT
the electric air pump. Use the power outlet sealant material inside the tire.
in the second-row footwell for electric air X Inflate the tire again.
pump operation.
G Warning!
If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)
is not attained, the tire is too severely
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 323
Flat tire 323
damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire

repair.
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal the
tire.
Do not drive the vehicle.
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or
call Roadside Assistance.
After attaining a tire inflation pressure of

at least 26 psi (1.8 bar):
X Press 0 on electric air pump switch =. Version 2
The electric air pump is switched off. X After driving the vehicle for an initial
Practical hints
X Detach the TIREFIT kit from the tire valve. 10 minutes, check the tire inflation
pressure using pressure gauge G on the
G Warning! air pump.
The air hose may still be hot. Exercise proper
caution to avoid burning yourself when G Warning!
detaching the electric air pump. If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the
! Remaining TIREFIT sealant could escape vehicle.
from the filler hose after it has been Park your vehicle safely away from the
detached from the tire valve. TIREFIT roadway and contact the nearest authorized
sealant may cause stains. Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside
Therefore, cover the filler hose, e.g. by Assistance.
inserting it into the plastic bag the TIREFIT Have the damaged tire replaced.
kit was packed in.
If the tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi
X Drive off immediately. (1.3 bar), inflate or deflate the tire to the
correct tire inflation pressure (see Tire and
G Warning! Loading Information placard on the driver’s
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph door B-pillar):
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed to
X To increase tire inflation pressure:
operate at higher speeds.
Switch on the electric air pump.
The sticker must be attached on the
X To decrease tire inflation pressure:
instrument cluster where it will be easily seen
by the driver. Version 1: Open vent screw F on
Vehicle handling characteristics of a TIREFIT pressure gauge G (Y page 322).
repaired tire may change. Adapt your driving Version 2: Press deflate button F located
accordingly. at the end of the filler hose.
X Drive to the nearest qualified workshop,
e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
to have the damaged tire replaced.
X Recommended duration of use: A
maximum of 300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 324
324 Flat tire
(80 km/h) or below with the recommended Lifting the vehicle

tire inflation pressure.
G Warning!
Center as soon as possible to obtain a new When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack
TIREFIT kit. which has been specifically approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
X Bring used TIREFIT materials to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
proper disposal. the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built
into both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the
X Replace your TIREFIT container every
jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up
4 years. Replacement containers are
bracket. The jack must always be vertical
when in use, especially on inclines or
Center.
declines.
Practical hints
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle

briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for
Mounting the spare wheel
performing maintenance work under the
Introduction vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the
jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
X Prepare the vehicle as described change.
(Y page 320).
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
X Take the following out of the vehicle:
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
Rspare wheel away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Rjack Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under the
Rwheel wrench
vehicle.
Rcollapsible wheel chock Always engage the parking brake firmly and
Ralignment bolt block the wheels with wheel chocks or other
Relectric
sizeable objects before raising the vehicle
air pump
with the jack. Do not disengage the parking
For information on where to find the brake while the vehicle is raised.
respective items, see “Where will I find ...?” Make sure that the ground on which the
(Y page 270) and (Y page 272). vehicle is standing and where you place the
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
factory-equipped with the tools required for necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
change are specific to your vehicle. Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
Center to obtain the tools approved for not be able to achieve its load-bearing
your vehicle. This section describes the capacity if it is not at its full height.
wheel change using the tools approved and Never start the engine when the vehicle is
recommended for your vehicle. raised.
Also observe the notes on the jack.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 325
Flat tire 325
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by

blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects.
When your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
chock, it is included with the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 270). For information on setting up
the collapsible wheel chock, see
(Y page 272).
G Warning!
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on
slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the Changing wheel on passenger side (example
illustration)
vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or
Practical hints
others. X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
objects on the downhill side in front of both
Changing a wheel on a level surface wheels on the side opposite to the side on
which the wheel is to be changed.
Changing a wheel on a slight incline

Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a slight
incline:
Changing rear wheel on passenger side (example

illustration)
X Place a wheel chock or other sizeable
object in front of and another wheel chock
or other sizeable object behind the wheel
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed.
Changing wheel on passenger side (example
Changing a wheel on a slight decline illustration)
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
a level surface. However, should objects on the downhill side in front of both
circumstances require you to do so on a slight wheels on the side opposite to the side on
decline: which the wheel is to be changed.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 326
326 Flat tire
X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but do X Attach reversible ratchet ? to jack = in

not yet remove the wheel bolts such a way that the word UP can be seen.
Practical hints
(approximately one full turn with wheel X Place jack = on firm ground.
wrench :).
X Position jack = under take-up
X Assemble the jack (Y page 272).
bracket ; so that it is always vertical as
seen from the side, even if the vehicle is
parked on an incline.
The jack take-up brackets are located directly

behind the front wheel housings and in front
of the rear wheel housings.
X Turn ratchet ? up and down until jack =
G Warning! is fully seated in take-up bracket ; and the
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up jack base evenly meets the ground.
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Make X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
take-up bracket.
If you do not position the jack correctly in the
jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can fall off
the jack and seriously or fatally injure you or
others.
! Do not position the jack on the body of

the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
the vehicle.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 327
Flat tire 327
Removing the wheel G Warning!

Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.
Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt and
Practical hints
remove it.
X Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt :.
X Remove the remaining bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. Wheel bolt : must be used for 19" and 20"
This could result in damage to the wheel light alloy wheels. Wheel bolt ; must be used
bolts and wheel hub threads. for the spare wheel. The wheel bolts for the
spare wheel are located in the cargo
X Remove the wheel. compartment with the spare wheel.
! Wheel bolts ; must be used when
Attaching the spare wheel mounting the spare wheel with collapsible
G Warning! tire. The use of any wheel bolts other than
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
wheel bolts ; for the spare wheel with
properly attached. collapsible tire will damage the vehicle’s
brakes.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle. G Warning!
Make sure to use the original length wheel
G Warning! bolts when remounting the original wheel
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged after it has been repaired.
or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
Damaged wheel hub threads should be hub.
repaired immediately. Do not continue to ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
drive under these circumstances! Contact an
against hub and hold it there while
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
installing first wheel bolt.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
This could cause an accident. Make sure to
use the correct wheel bolts.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 328
328 Flat tire
The following description applies to both

versions. Differences in usage are expressly
declared.
X Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment

bolt and push it on.
Practical hints
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them

slightly. Version 1
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X Install the last wheel bolt and tighten it
slightly.
X Inflate the collapsible tire (Y page 328).
Inflating the collapsible tire

G Warning!
properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric Version 2
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
X Version 1 only: Open flap : on electric
G Warning! air pump.
Observe safety instructions on air pump label. X Version 1 only: Pull out electrical plug
= and air hose with pressure gauge and
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating vent screw ?.
the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may X Version 2 only: Pull electrical plug = and
be damaged. the air hose out of the pump housing
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of bottom.
two versions of the electric air pump: X Version 1 only: Close vent screw on air
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure hose ?.
gauge and the electrical plug are located X Remove the valve cap from the collapsible
behind a flap. tire valve.
RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located X Screw union nut A onto the collapsible tire
in the pump housing. The air hose and valve.
electrical plug are located at the bottom of X Make sure air pump switch ; is set to 0.
the pump housing. X Insert electrical plug = into the power
outlet in the second-row footwell
(Y page 205).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 329
Flat tire 329
! The cigarette lighter as well as the power X Press 0 on electric air pump switch ;.
outlets in the passenger footwell and cargo X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
compartment are not designed for use with position 0.
the electric air pump. Use the power outlet or
in the second-row footwell for electric air
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
pump operation.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice. Do
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to not depress the brake pedal.
position 1. X Version 1 only: If the tire inflation pressure
or is above the recommended tire inflation
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the pressure as specified for your vehicle
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Do (Y page 350), decrease tire pressure using
not depress the brake pedal. the vent screw on air hose ?.
Practical hints
X Press I on electric air pump switch ;. X Version 2 only: If the tire inflation pressure
The electric air pump switches on and is above the recommended tire inflation
inflates the collapsible tire. pressure as specified for your vehicle
X Inflate the collapsible tire to the
(Y page 350), decrease tire pressure using
recommended tire inflation pressure as deflate button B.
specified for your vehicle (Y page 350). G Observe Safety notes, see page 230.
This should take approximately 5 minutes. X Detach the electric air pump.
X
G Warning! Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.
The air hose and the union nut can become X Version 1 only: Store electrical plug =
hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution and air hose ? behind flap :.
to avoid burning yourself when using the X Version 2 only: Store electrical plug =
equipment. and the air hose back into the pump
housing bottom.
! Do not operate the electric air pump X Place the electric air pump back in its
longer than 8 minutes without interruption. designated storage space.
Otherwise it may overheat. X Lower the vehicle.
You may operate the air pump again after
it has cooled off.
Lowering the vehicle
! Compare the recommended tire inflation G Warning!
pressure for your vehicle with the tire
inflation pressure on the yellow label
properly attached.
located on the spare wheel rim.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
label on the spare wheel rim differs from
the values given in this Operator’s Manual, X Attach ratchet to vehicle jack so that the
inflate the tire to the recommended tire word DOWN can be seen.
inflation pressure given on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim. Lower the vehicle until the vehicle is resting
fully on its own weight:
X Turn ratchet in direction DOWN.
X Remove the jack.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 330
330 Flat tire
You may only use the MOExtended system in

conjunction with the tire pressure loss
warning system (Y page 231) or the
Advanced TPMS (Y page 232).
The maximum distance in emergency mode
depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 50 miles
(80 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and
18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded.
The point at which the maximum driving
distance in emergency mode begins is when
the warning message appears in the
X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, multifunction display indicating that there is
following the diagonal sequence illustrated a loss of tire inflation pressure.
Practical hints
(: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observe X Do not exceed the maximum speed of
a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). 50 mph (80 km/h).
G Warning! G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
changing a wheel. The wheels could come characteristics are diminished in such
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of situations as:
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Rdriving around curves
X Fully collapse the jack to storage position, Rwhile braking
see (Y page 272). Rwhile accelerating rapidly
X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools
Therefore, your driving style must be adapted
in the designated storage space.
accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and driving
For information on storing the spare wheel maneuvers, as well as driving over obstacles
after it has been replaced by a regular road (road curbs, potholes, or off-road areas). This
wheel, see (Y page 272). is especially important if the vehicle is heavily
i The damaged road wheel cannot be loaded.
stored in the spare wheel well under the The emergency driving distance that can be
cargo compartment floor. It should be achieved greatly depends on the demands
transported in the cargo compartment placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
wrapped in a protective wrap. load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can be
i USA only: significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is driven
Do not restart the tire inflation pressure cautiously, somewhat longer.
monitor until a full size wheel/tire with Do not continue driving in emergency mode if
functioning sensor has been placed back
Ryou notice knocking sounds
into service on the vehicle.
Rthe vehicle starts to shake
Rsmoke develops and you smell rubber
MOExtended system
RESP® is intervening continuously
The MOExtended system allows you to
Ryou notice tears on the tire sidewalls
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 331
AdBlue® (diesel engine only) 331
After driving in emergency mode, you must If the engine still does not start, do not make
have the rims inspected by an authorized any further attempts to start the engine.
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
suitable for further use. The failed tire must or call Roadside Assistance (Y page 210).
be replaced in any case. i When the malfunction indicator lamp
When replacing individual or all tires on the = (USA only) or ; (Canada only) in
vehicle, make sure only tires marked with the instrument cluster has been illuminated
“MOExtended” are mounted in the size for the above condition, it will remain
specified for your vehicle (Y page 347). illuminated until the engine was cycled on
and off four times in a row.
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel

engine only) AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
Practical hints
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is empty The BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment
is not recommended. Otherwise, air may be system requires a reducing agent (AdBlue®)
sucked into the fuel system. If this happens, in order to function properly. Refilling with
the malfunction indicator lamp = (USA AdBlue® is part of the regular maintenance
only) or ; (Canada only) comes on and the service work. A tankful of AdBlue® should
engine may not start immediately after suffice until the next maintenance service
refueling the vehicle. under normal driving conditions.
After refueling: When the AdBlue® tank is low, the message
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in Check Additive See Operator’s
park position P. Manual appears in the multifunction display.
The gear position indicator in the When the AdBlue® level drops to the
multifunction display should be on P. minimum level, the message Remaining
X Do not depress the accelerator. Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction
X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO display.
start/stop button from the starter switch. i When the message Remaining Starts:
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to 20 appears in the multifunction display, you
position 2 for at least 10 seconds. can start the engine 20 more times. If you
X Return the SmartKey in the starter switch do not add AdBlue®, the engine cannot be
to position 0. started beyond that point. Fill the
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to AdBlue® tank with approximately 1 gal
position 3 and hold it there for a maximum (3.79 l) AdBlue® (corresponds to
of 40 seconds or until the engine runs approximately 2 AdBlue® refill containers)
surge-free. or have the AdBlue® tank filled by an
If the engine does not start: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Wait for approximately 2 minutes.
i For refilling outside the maintenance
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to service intervals, refill the AdBlue® tank
position 3 and hold it there for a maximum with approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue®
of 40 seconds or until the engine runs (corresponds to approximately 2 AdBlue®
surge-free. refill containers).
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 332
332 AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
Always use the particular AdBlue® refill water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas
containers for refilling outside the aftertreatment system could be damaged.
maintenance service interval. Contact an Damage caused by using additives or
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call diluting with water are not covered by the
Roadside Assistance if necessary Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
(Y page 210).
Additional information on BlueTEC exhaust ! Rinse surfaces that have come into
gas aftertreatment and AdBlue® is available contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. with a moist cloth and cold water
immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
already, use cold water and a sponge.
Refilling with AdBlue® AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil
the affected surfaces.
G Warning!
Practical hints
Make sure ! AdBlue® is not a fuel additive and must

RAdBlue® not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If
does not come into contact with
skin, eyes, or clothing
AdBlue® reaches the diesel fuel tank, the
engine could be damaged which is not
Rto keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children
If you and/or others have come into contact Warranty.
with AdBlue®: For more information on AdBlue®, see
RIf AdBlue® has gotten into contact with (Y page 354).
eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately The AdBlue® filler neck is located under the
and seek medical help. cargo compartment floor.
RClean affected skin immediately with plenty X Switch off the ignition.
of water. X Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
RIf AdBlue® was swallowed, rinse mouth X Lift the cargo compartment floor
immediately with plenty of water and drink (Y page 270).
plenty of water. Consult a physician.
G Warning!
When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue®
tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill
AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
are particularly irritating for your skin,
mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling
ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes,
nose, and throat, as well as coughing and
watering eyes. X If so equipped, remove wheel wrench ;
and reversible ratchet for jack =.
! Only use AdBlue® complying with X Turn AdBlue® filler cap cover :
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 333
Battery 333
X Release AdBlue® refill container A.

X Turn AdBlue® refill container A
X Place AdBlue® filler cap ? (Y page 332) on
filler neck and turn it clockwise.
X Turn AdBlue® filler cap ?

counterclockwise and open it.
Practical hints
Filler cap ? is tethered with a plastic strap.
X Place AdBlue® filler cap cover : as

illustrated and turn it clockwise to its stop.
X Place wheel wrench ; and reversible
ratchet for jack = back in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
X Lower cargo compartment floor.
X Drive the vehicle at a speed of at least
X Pull dust cap off of AdBlue® refill container 10 mph (16 km/h).
A. The message Check Additive See
X Place AdBlue® refill container A on the Operator’s Manual disappears after
filler neck as illustrated and tighten it approximately 1 minute.
moderately (hand-tight) by turning it
clockwise.
i If the message Check Additive See
Operator’s Manual still appears in the
! Make sure to tighten the AdBlue® refill multifunction display, refill with one more
container only moderately, i.e. hand-tight, container of AdBlue®.
as you could otherwise damage it.
i Have the AdBlue® level checked and, if
X Push AdBlue® refill container A down. necessary, filled completely afterward at
The AdBlue® tank is filled. This may take up an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
to 1 minute.
i When you stop pushing the AdBlue® refill Battery
container down, the filling process is
stopped and you can remove the refill Safety notes
container. A battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 334
334 Battery
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery Recycling of the battery is the preferred
maintenance intervals. method of disposal. Many states (USA only)
If you use your vehicle mostly for short- or provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
distance trips, you will need to have the batteries to accept the old battery for
battery charge checked more frequently. recycling.
When replacing a battery, always use a G Warning!
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz. Failure to follow these instructions can result
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle in severe injury or death.
for an extended period of time, contact an Never lean over batteries while connecting.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about You might get injured.
steps you need to observe.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
G Warning! allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
Practical hints
Observe all safety instructions and skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
precautions when handling automotive flush affected area with water and seek
batteries. medical help if necessary.
Risk of explosion. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
Fire, open flames and smoking etc.
smoking are prohibited
when handling batteries. G Warning!
Avoid creating sparks. Do not place metal objects on the battery as
Battery acid is caustic. Do this could result in a short circuit.
not allow it to come into Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk
contact with skin, eyes or of acid burns in the event of an accident.
clothing. Take care that you do not become statically
Wear suitable protective charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
clothing, especially gloves, rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you
apron and faceguard. also should not pull or push the battery over
Wear eye protection. carpets or other synthetic materials.
Rinse any acid spills Never touch the battery first. First touch the
immediately with clear outside body of the vehicle in order to release
water. Contact a physician any possible electrostatic charges.
if necessary. Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The
Keep children away. battery could explode if touched due to
electrostatic charge or due to spark
formation.
Follow the instructions in
! The battery is a Valve-Regulated Lead
this Operator’s Manual.
Acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as
“fleece” battery.
Such batteries do not require topping-up of
A battery contains materials that can harm
the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries
the environment if disposed of improperly. A
therefore do not have cell caps and the
large 12 V storage battery contains lead.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 335
Battery 335
battery cover is non-removable. Do not authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for

attempt to open the battery as otherwise further information.
the battery will be damaged.
VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of i After battery power was interrupted, do
the electrolyte level. They cannot be the following:
opened to check the electrolyte level. RSet the clock (Y page 133).
However, the battery condition must be Vehicles with COMAND system with
checked periodically by performing a navigation module: Time and date are set
battery conductance test. Refer to automatically.
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition
RSynchronize the door windows
testing intervals.
(Y page 107).
The factory-equipped battery may only be
RSynchronize the power tilt/sliding
replaced with a battery that
Practical hints
sunroof (Y page 183).
Rhas the same security features
RSynchronize the power tilt/sliding panel
Ris of identical size (Y page 186).
Ris of identical voltage RSynchronize the exterior rear view
Ris of identical capacity mirrors (Y page 96).
! As any other battery, the battery may

discharge if you do not operate the vehicle Charging the battery
for an extended period of time. Have the
battery disconnected at a qualified G Warning!
workshop or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Never charge a battery while still installed in
Center in such a case. You may also the vehicle unless the accessory battery
connect an accessory battery charge unit charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for being used. Gases may escape during
your vehicle model to maintain the battery charging and could cause an explosion that
charge. Contact an authorized Mercedes- may result in personal injury, paint damage or
Benz Center for further information. corrosion.
The battery, the battery ventilation hose An accessory battery charge unit specially
and the lateral plug must always be adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
securely installed when the vehicle is in tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
operation. available. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
clamps while the engine is running or the information and availability.
SmartKey is in the starter switch or Charge battery in accordance with the
KEYLESS-GO button is in position 1. separate instructions for the accessory
Otherwise the alternator and other battery charger.
electronic components could be severely
damaged. Have the battery charged at an authorized
Have the battery checked regularly at an Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. battery yourself, follow the operating
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for instructions for your charging device.
maintenance intervals or contact an
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 336
336 Jump starting
Only use a battery charge unit with a If the engine does not run after several
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
X Charge battery in accordance with the checked at the nearest authorized
instructions of the battery charger Mercedes-Benz Center.
manufacturer. Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter17 and may
Jump starting present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have
G Warning! loose or missing insulation.
Failure to follow these directions will cause Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
damage to the electronic components, and any other metal part while the other end is
can lead to a battery explosion and severe still attached to a battery.
Practical hints
injury or death. If the battery is discharged, the engine can be

Never lean over batteries while connecting or started with jumper cables and the fully
jump starting. You might get injured. charged battery of another vehicle or an
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not equivalent starter pack. Observe the
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, following:
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately RAccess to the battery is not possible on all
flush affected area with water, and seek vehicles. If you cannot access the battery
medical help if necessary. of the other vehicle, provide jump start
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, power by an external battery or starter
which is flammable and explosive. Keep pack.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid RJump starting should only be performed
improper connection of jumper cables,
when the engine and catalytic converter18
smoking, etc.
are cold.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can
RDo not start the engine if the battery is
result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
ROnly jump start from batteries with the
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
otherwise seriously damage the automatic with a more powerful battery could damage
transmission which is not covered by the the vehicle’s electrical system. Such
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. damage will not be covered by the
! Jump starting should only be performed ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient
using the jump-start terminals located in cross-section and insulated terminal
the engine compartment. clamps.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
attempts. not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
Do not attempt to start the engine using a
battery quick-charge unit.
17 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.

18 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 337
Jump starting 337
that move when an engine is started or X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
running. X Switch off all electrical consumers.
RShould the battery be drained completely, X Engage the parking brake.
let the donating power source charge the X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
vehicle for several minutes before park position P.
reattempting the starting process. X Open the hood (Y page 222).
The jump-start contacts are located in the
engine compartment on the passenger side.
Practical hints
Position C represents the charged battery of a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to
another vehicle or an equivalent starter pack. negative terminal ? of charged battery
X Flip up cover : of positive terminal = in C first.
direction of arrow. X Start engine of the vehicle with the
discharged battery and run at idle speed.
! Never invert the terminal connections! You can now turn on the electrical
X Connect positive terminal ; of charged consumers. Do not switch on the
headlamps under any circumstances.
battery C with positive terminal = with a
X Remove the jumper cables from negative
jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive
terminal ; of charged battery C first. terminals ? and B first.
X Remove the jumper cables from positive
X Start engine of the vehicle with charged
battery C and run at idle speed. terminals ; and =.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
X Slide cover A from negative terminal B in
X Close cover : of positive terminal =.
direction of arrow.
X Connect negative terminal ? of charged
battery C with negative terminal B with
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 338
338 Towing the vehicle
X Slide cover A back onto negative terminal Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the
B. ground. Observe instructions for towing the
X Have the battery checked at the nearest vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G Warning!
assistance for the brake and steering
Towing the vehicle systems. In this case, it is important to keep
Safety notes in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
be transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly ! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or
equipment. This method is preferable to other diagonally, since it could result in damage
Practical hints
types of towing. to the chassis alignment.

! To prevent damage during transport, do
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or ! Do not use the towing eye bolt for
suspension parts. recovery, as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
If circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle i If the battery is disconnected or
may be towed with all wheels on the ground discharged
only so far as necessary to have the vehicle Rthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter
moved to a safe location where the
switch
recommended towing methods can be
employed. Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
park position P
! Before towing the vehicle observe the
following instructions: For more information see “Battery”
(Y page 333) or “Jump starting”
RDo not tow-start the vehicle. You could (Y page 336).
otherwise seriously damage the
automatic transmission which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Installing towing eye bolt
Warranty.
RDo
Depending on whether you are towing a
not tow with sling-type equipment.
vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
which are located behind covers on each
supports.
bumper.
RTowing of the vehicle should only be The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
done using the properly installed towing vehicle tool kit, located in the cargo
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow compartment underneath the cargo
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, compartment floor (Y page 270).
frame or suspension parts.
X Take the towing eye bolt out of the space
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so underneath the cargo compartment floor.
could damage the transfer case, which is
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 339
Towing the vehicle 339
Removing cover in front bumper Fixing towing eye bolt
Example illustration front bumper

X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
Practical hints
arrow. X Take the towing eye bolt and, if so
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole equipped, the wheel wrench from the
for the towing eye bolt. vehicle tool kit.
X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise into
Removing cover in rear bumper threaded hole to its stop.

X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
G Warning! tighten towing eye bolt ; by turning it
In order to avoid possible serious burns or clockwise.
injury, use extreme caution when removing or
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe
X If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel
is extremely hot.
wrench, use a suitable object to turn the
towing eye bolt.
Removing towing eye bolt

X Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it
counterclockwise.
X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;.
X Reinstalling cover in front bumper:
Engage cover : (Y page 338) on the left
and press on the right.
X Reinstalling cover in rear bumper:
X Pry cover : with a flat, blunt object as a Engage cover : (Y page 339) at top and
lever. press at bottom.
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole X Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheel
for the towing eye bolt. wrench back into the vehicle tool kit.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 340
340 Fuses
Towing with all wheels on the ground i While being towed with the hazard
warning flasher in use, use the combination
G Warning! switch in the usual manner to signal turns.
If circumstances require towing the vehicle Only the selected turn signal will operate.
with all wheels on the ground, always tow with Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
a tow bar if: warning flasher will operate again.
Rthe engine will not run
Rthere is a malfunction in the brake system Stranded vehicle
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
or in the vehicle’s electrical system
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should be
This is necessary to adequately control the done with the greatest of care, especially if
towed vehicle. the vehicle is heavily loaded.
Practical hints
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on Note the following when freeing a stranded
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in vehicle:
starter switch position 2. RAvoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or
diagonally, since it could result in damage
G Warning!
to the chassis alignment.
RNever try to free a vehicle that is still
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep coupled to a trailer.
in mind that a considerably higher degree of RIf possible, a vehicle equipped with a trailer
effort is necessary to brake and steer the hitch receiver should be pulled backward in
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. its own previously made tracks.
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the Fuses
X Shift the automatic transmission into Introduction
neutral position N. The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
X Release the brake pedal. switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
X If engaged, release the parking brake. If a fuse is blown, the components and
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher systems secured by that fuse will stop
(Y page 101). operating.
! Keep in mind that it is important to have G Warning!

the ignition switched on. Removing the Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
SmartKey from the starter switch or with the specified amperage for the system in
opening a front door with the ignition question and do not attempt to repair or
switched off will automatically shift the bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
automatic transmission into park position approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
P. fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,
and/or cause damage to electrical
! The vehicle may be towed only for components and/or systems. Have the cause
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a determined and remedied by an authorized
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Mercedes-Benz Center.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 341
Fuses 341
A blown fuse must be replaced by an

appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of
the amperage recommended in the fuse
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
to advise you on this subject.
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the
cause determined and rectified by an X Open the front passenger door.
X Opening: Insert flat, blunt object into
Practical hints
The fuse chart is located in the cargo recess of fuse box cover : and pry it out
compartment with the vehicle tool kit
slightly.
(Y page 270). The fuse chart explains the fuse
X Remove fuse box cover : in direction of
allocation and fuse amperages.
arrow.
X Closing: Clip upper end of fuse box
Before replacing fuses cover : into opening.
X Push on lower end of fuse box cover :
X
until it engages.
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P. ! The fuse box cover must be properly
The transmission position indicator in the positioned as described. Otherwise,
multifunction display should be on P. moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
X Switch off all electrical consumers. and possibly impair fuse operation.
X Turn off the engine.
Fuse box in engine compartment
switch.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the X Open the hood.
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed again.
Fuse box in passenger compartment

! Do not use sharp objects such as a
screwdriver to open the fuse box cover in
the dashboard. You could damage the fuse
box cover or the dashboard.
X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from
The fuse box is located behind a cover in the fuse box cover ;.
dashboard on the front passenger side.
X Release clamp :.
X Lift fuse box cover ; up.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 342
342 Fuses
X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is X Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit
positioned properly. (Y page 270).
X Insert the tabs of fuse box cover ; that are X Open the fuse box in engine compartment.
opposite of clamp : into the openings. X Remove fuse 120.
X Press fuse box cover ; down Find its location in the fuse chart.
X Close clamp :.
! The fuse box cover must be properly

positioned as described. Otherwise,
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
and possibly impair fuse operation.
X Close the hood after checking or replacing
Practical hints
fuses.
Fuse box in cargo compartment
X Opening: Open the cargo compartment.

X Lift the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 270).
X Secure cargo compartment floor with
securing hook (Y page 270).
X Fold cover : to the left as indicated by the
arrow.
X Closing: Install everything in reverse order.
Emergency engine shutdown

If the engine cannot be turned off as
described (Y page 114), you may use the
following emergency procedure.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 343
343

Parts service ..................................... 344
Warranty coverage ........................... 344
Identification labels .......................... 344
Vehicle specification R 350 Blue-
TEC (251.125) ................................... 346
Vehicle specification R 350
(251.165) ........................................... 346
Rims and tires ................................... 347
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 350
Technical data
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 344
344 Identification labels
Vehicle equipment accordance with the terms of the following

warranties:
i This Operator’s Manual describes all RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
features, standard or optional, potentially REmission System Warranty

available for your vehicle at the time of REmission Performance Warranty
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine,
features described in this manual. Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty19
Parts service RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Replacement parts and accessories are
Parts required for maintenance and repair covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
work. In addition, strategically located parts Accessories warranties, copies of which are
Technical data
distribution centers provide quick and available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz

reliable parts service. Center.
More than 300 000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected Information booklet
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has
been specifically developed, manufactured or Should you lose your Service and Warranty
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz Information booklet, have an authorized
vehicles. Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts replacement. It will be mailed to you.
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz Identification labels
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
19 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 345
Identification labels 345
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can data shown in the illustration. Refer to
be found certification label on vehicle for actual data
Ron certification label : on the driver’s door specific to your vehicle.
B-pillar
Ron passenger side underneath the second-
row seat (Y page 345)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 345)
X Move passenger-side second-row seat ?
Technical data
backward as far as possible (Y page 87).
X Fold carpet B backward in direction of
arrow.
VIN A is now visible.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
i You may have to cut perforated carpet
; Paintwork code
B using a sharp object, e.g. a knife.
= VIN
C Emission control information label,

Example certification label (Canada vehicles) includes both federal and California
; Paintwork code certification exhaust emission standards
= VIN D VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
E Engine number (engraved on engine)
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are i When ordering parts, please specify
specific to each vehicle and may vary from vehicle identification and engine number.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 346
346 Vehicle specification R 350 (251.165)
Vehicle specification R 350 BlueTEC Main dimensions R 350 BlueTEC

(251.125)
Overall vehicle 203.7 in (5 173 mm)
The quoted data apply only to the standard length
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Overall vehicle 85.4 in (2 168 mm)
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
width20
special bodies and special equipment.
Overall vehicle 65.5 in (1 663 mm)
Engine R 350 BlueTEC
height21
Engine, type 642
Wheelbase 126.6 in (3 215 mm)
Mode of operation Diesel 4-stroke
Track, front 64.7 in (1 643 mm)
engine
Track, rear 64.4 in (1 636 mm)
No. of cylinders 6
Ground 5.8 in (148 mm)
Bore 3.27 in (83.00 mm)
Technical data
clearance21
Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm)
Turning circle 40.7 ft (12.4 m)
Total piston 182.3 cu in
displacement (2 987 cm3)
Weights R 350 BlueTEC
Compression 16.5:1
ratio Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Output acc. to 210 hp/3 400 rpm

SAE J 1349 (157 kW/3 400 rpm) Vehicle specification R 350 (251.165)
Maximum torque 400 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 1 600 - 2 400 rpm The quoted data apply only to the standard
(543 Nm/ vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
1 600 - 2 400 rpm) Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment.
Maximum engine 4 500 rpm
speed Engine R 350
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Engine, type 272
Poly-V-belt 2 035 mm Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,

gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6
Electrical system R 350 BlueTEC
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Alternator 14 V/220 A
Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm)
Starter motor 12 V/2.0 kW
Total piston 213.5 cu in
Battery 12 V/95 Ah
displacement (3 498 cm3)
20 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.

21 Data apply to unladen vehicle with standard equipment. Data may vary in vehicles equipped with AIRMATIC
depending on the selected damping settings and the current vehicle level.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 347
Rims and tires 347
Engine R 350 Main dimensions R 350

Compression 10.7:1 Track, front 64.7 in (1 643 mm)
ratio
Track, rear 64.4 in (1 636 mm)
Output acc. to 268 hp/6 000 rpm
(200 kW/6 000 rpm) Ground 5.8 in (148 mm)
SAE J 134922
clearance24
Maximum torque 258 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 400 - 5 000 rpm Turning circle 40.7 ft (12.4 m)
(350 Nm/
2 400 - 5 000 rpm) Weights R 350
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
speed
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Rims and tires
Technical data
Poly-V-belt 2 404 mm
Notes
Electrical system R 350 ! Only use tires which have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
Alternator 14 V/180 A approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW to provide best possible performance in
conjunction with the driving safety systems
Battery 12 V/70 Ah on your vehicle such as the ABS or the
ESP®. Tires specially developed for your
Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33
vehicle and tested and approved by
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm) Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding
electrode gap the following on the tire’s sidewall:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
equipment tires
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires with limited run-flat
Main dimensions R 350 characteristics) original equipment tires
Overall vehicle 203.7 in (5 173 mm) Using tires other than those approved by
length Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Overall vehicle 85.4 in (2 168 mm) Limited Warranty.
width23
For information on driving with MOExtended
Overall vehicle 65.5 in (1 663 mm) tires, see the “Practical hints” section
height24 (Y page 330).
Wheelbase 126.6 in (3 215 mm)
22 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
23 Exteriorrear view mirrors folded out.
24 Data apply to unladen vehicle with standard equipment. Data may vary in vehicles equipped with AIRMATIC
depending on the selected damping settings and the current vehicle level.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 348
348 Rims and tires
i Vehicles with MOExtended system are i Please keep in mind that the vehicle must
not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit. be equipped
When retrofitting with tires that do not have Rwith wheels of identical dimensions on
run-flat characteristics, you should also each axle (left and right)
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit.
Rwith tires of identical characteristics all
TIREFIT kits are available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires,
all-season tires, or MOExtended tires etc.
! Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental i The following pages also list the approved
effects, such as rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle
Rpoor handling characteristics with winter tires. Winter tires are not
available as standard or optional factory
Rincreased noise equipment, but can be purchased from an
Rincreased fuel consumption authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
Technical data
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit approved for your vehicle model may
dimensional variations and different tire require the purchase of rims of the
deformation characteristics that could recommended size for use with these
cause them to come into contact with the winter tires. This depends on vehicle model
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the and the standard or optional factory-
tires or the vehicle may be the result. equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
your vehicle. For more information contact
i Further information on tires and rims is an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Center. The Tire and Loading Information
placard with the recommended tire
inflation pressures for cold tires is located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Supplemental
tire inflation pressure information for
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads
less than the maximum loaded vehicle
condition can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
manufacturer’s maintenance
recommendation included with the vehicle.
For information on recommended tire
inflation pressure and supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for special
driving situations, see (Y page 228).
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 349
Rims and tires 349
Same size tires
Model R 350 BlueTEC

19" wheels Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 2.64 in (67 mm)
All-season tires25,26 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
MOExtended
Winter tires25,26,27 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+Si
MOExtended
Model R 350
19" wheels Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 19 H2
Technical data
All-season tires25 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Winter tires25,27 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+Si
Model R 350 (Appearance Package)28

20" wheels AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 20 H2
All-season tires25 265/45 R20 108H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Winter tires25,27 265/45 R20 108H XL (Extra Load) M+Si
25 Radial-ply tires.
26 Must be used in conjunction with Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles) or tire pressure
loss warning system (Canada vehicles) only.
27 Not available as factory equipment.
28 USA only.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 350
350 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation
pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure
given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
i The R 350 BlueTEC does not have a spare wheel.

Model R 350
Rim 6.5 B x 18 H2
Technical data

Collapsible tire29 195/75-18 106P
Recommended tire inflation pressure 44 psi (3.0 bar)
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons
or the environment.
Capacities
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
Vehicle components and their respective children.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use For health reasons, you should prevent
products tested and approved by Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct contact
Benz. with your skin or clothing.
For information on tested and approved If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
products, contact an authorized Mercedes- physician immediately.
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil R 350 BlueTEC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Approved engine
filter oils
R 350 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Automatic All models 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic
transmission Transmission Fluid
29 Must not be used with snow chains.

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 351
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 351
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Front axle All models 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
Rear axle All models 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
Transfer case All models 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Power steering All models approx. 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) MB Power Steering
Fluid or approved
Dexron III ATF
Brake system All models 0.85 US qt (0.8 l) MB Brake Fluid
(DOT 4+)
Cooling system All models approx. 10.0 US qt (9.5 l) MB 325.0
Technical data
Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze
Fuel tank All models 21.1 US gal (80.0 l) Gasoline engine:
Premium unleaded
Fuel tank All models approx. 3.4 US gal (13.0 l) gasoline (Minimum
reserve Posted Octane 91
[Avg. of
96 RON/86 MON])
Diesel engine:
ULTRA-LOW
SULFUR HIGHWAY
DIESEL FUEL
(15 ppm SULFUR
MAXIMUM)
AdBlue® tank R 350 BlueTEC 7.5 US gal (28.2 l) AdBlue® complying
with ISO 22241
Air All models — R134a refrigerant
conditioning and special
system PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Washer system All models 8.0 US qt (7.6 l) MB Windshield
and headlamp Washer
cleaning Concentrate30
system (Y page 357)
Washer fluid mixing
ratio (Y page 357)
30 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 352
Approved engine oils Viscosity grades for engine oils

Engine oils are specifically tested for their Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
suitability in our engines and durability for our according to the lowest air temperature
service intervals. Therefore, only use expected before the next oil change.
approved engine oils and oil filters required
for vehicles with the Maintenance System.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Using engine oils and oil filters of a
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change
Technical data
intervals longer than those called for by the

Maintenance System will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Engine oil additives
Warranty.
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
Please follow Maintenance System
They may damage the engine. Damage or
recommendations for scheduled oil
malfunctions resulting from blending oil
changes. Failure to do so will result in
additives are not covered by the Mercedes-
engine or emission control system damage
Benz Limited Warranty.
Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL. Air conditioning refrigerant
Use the table below to determine the
R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
MB sheet number.
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning
Model Engine, MB sheet system.
type number ! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based
R 350 BlueTEC 642 229.51 lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
R 350 272 229.5
Brake fluid
i MB sheet numbers are printed on the
outside of oil containers. G Warning!
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from the
atmosphere.
Under extremely strenuous operating
conditions, this moisture content can lead to
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 353
the formation of bubbles in the system, thus light load such as two persons and no
reducing the system’s efficiency. luggage.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
Booklet for replacement interval. is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center will provide you with additional
information. Fuel requirements
Gasoline engine
Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The
engine) octane number (posted at the pump) must be
91 min. It is an average of both the Research
G Warning! Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
Technical data
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
It burns violently and can cause serious known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
personal injury. Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
materials near gasoline! such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and
Turn off the engine before refueling. TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
contact. Extinguish all smoking materials. The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
Direct skin contact with fuels and the exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not
health. allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
! To maintain the engine’s durability and used.
performance, premium unleaded gasoline These blends must also meet all other fuel
must be used. requirements, such as resistance to spark
If premium unleaded gasoline is not knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
available and low octane gasoline is used,
follow these precautions: Diesel engine
RHave the fuel tank only partially filled Only use commercially available vehicular
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM) that meets the
as possible. ASTM D975 standard. Failure to use
RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL
acceleration. can severely damage the vehicle’s exhaust
after-treatment device.
RDo not exceed an engine speed of
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
improved cold flow characteristics is offered
in the winter months. Check with your fuel
retailer.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 354
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not additives that prevent the build-up of carbon
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene. deposits.
The fuel system and engine will otherwise After an extended period of using fuels
be damaged, which is not covered by the without such additives carbon deposits can
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. build up, especially on the intake valves and
For further information on diesel fuel pump in the combustion area, leading to engine
labeling, contact an authorized Mercedes- performance problems such as:
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA RWarm-up hesitation
only). RUnstable idle
Biodiesel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl RKnocking/pinging
Ester) containing fuels
RMisfire
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC approves the use of
RPower loss
B5 (standard ULSD [ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
DIESEL] with a maximum of up to 5 vol % In areas where carbon deposits may be
biodiesel) in all Common Rail Injection (CDI) encountered due to lack of availability of
Technical data
and BlueTEC diesel engines. gasoline which contains these additives, the
As biodiesel can be produced from a variety use of Mercedes-Benz approved additives is
of raw materials resulting in widely varying recommended.
qualities, the only approved biodiesel for B5 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
is one that meets ASTM D6751 specification or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a
and has additionally an adequate oxidation listing of approved products. Follow
stability of min. 6 hours (acc. to EN14112) to directions on the product label.
prevent damage to the system from deposits Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
and/or corrosion. This only results in unnecessary cost and may
Diesel fuels containing a higher percentage of be harmful to the engine operation.
biodiesel, e.g. B20, as well as straight
biodiesel may cause severe damage to your ! Damage or malfunction resulting from
engine/fuel system and are not approved. poor fuel quality or from blending additional
fuel additives other than those tested and
Please ask your service station personnel for
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz
further information. If the B5 biodiesel blend
vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-
is not sufficiently labeled to clearly indicate
Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned
that it meets the above standards, please do
or Extended Limited Warranties.
not use it.
The Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty does
not cover damages caused by the use of fuels AdBlue®
not meeting Mercedes-Benz approved fuel
standards. AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic,
colorless and odorless, water-soluble liquid.
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
Gasoline additives (gasoline engine) ISO 22241. Do not blend with additives.
A major concern among engine
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by ! Rinse surfaces that have come into
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
the use of quality gasoline containing with a moist cloth and cold water
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 355
immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized If AdBlue® is pumped out of the tank, e.g.
already, use cold water and a sponge. during repair work, the same liquid must not
AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil be used to refill the tank as its purity is no
the affected surfaces. longer guaranteed.
! Impurities caused for example by other
High ambient temperatures service products, cleaning agents, and dust
If AdBlue® in the reservoir heats up to above result in increased emissions,
122‡ (50†) for a long period of time, for malfunctions, catalyst damage, or engine
example due to direct sunlight, ammonia gas damage.
vapors may escape when opening the
AdBlue® tank.
Coolants
G Warning!
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue® anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill
RCorrosion protection
Technical data
AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and RFreeze protection
are particularly irritating for your skin, RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling point)
ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes,
nose, and throat, as well as coughing and The cooling system was filled at the factory
watering eyes. with a coolant providing freeze protection to
approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
protection.
Low ambient temperatures
! Add premixed coolant solution only.
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
approximately 12‡ (-11†). Your vehicle is Antifreeze separately from each other,
factory equipped with an AdBlue® preheating could cause engine damage not covered by
system. The vehicle can thus be operated at the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
temperatures below 12‡ (-11†).
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the
Special additives
pressurized cooling system is reached at
! Only use AdBlue® complying with approximately 266‡ (130†).
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to The coolant solution must be used year round
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with to provide the necessary corrosion protection
water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas and increase boil-over protection. Refer to
aftertreatment system could be damaged. the Maintenance Booklet for replacement
Damage caused by using additives or interval.
diluting with water are not covered by the Coolant system design and coolant used
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Purity Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution
The purity of AdBlue® is of particular or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
importance for avoiding malfunctions in the of equal specification are used to renew the
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 356
coolant concentration or bring it back up to have the anticorrosion/antifreeze

the proper level. concentration checked.
For information on other Mercedes-Benz The coolant is also regularly checked each
approved products of equal specification, time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 50%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately -35‡
[-37†]).
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection
to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine
temperature will increase due to the lower
Technical data
heat transfer capability of the solution.

Therefore, do not use more than this amount
of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
system checked for signs of leakage). Please
make sure the mixture is in accordance with
label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water.
If you are not sure about the water quality,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
parts. The use of aluminum components in
motor vehicle engines necessitates that
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
such engines be specifically formulated to
protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
result in a significantly shortened service life.
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or once
a year in hot southern regions), you should
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 357
Model Approximate freeze protection

-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system All models 5.0 US qt (4.75 l) 5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
Washer system and headlamp

cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
Technical data
X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.
X Mix with commercially available premixed
washer solvent/antifreeze for
temperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above the freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
Z
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 358
358
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 359
359
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 360
360
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 361
Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work or
repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the
use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or
materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in
personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out
any type of service, turn to the advice of an
We reserve the right to make changes in

design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time March 27, 2009
GSP/OIS
Printed in U. S. A.
251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 362
É2515843082_ËÍ
2515843082
Order no. 6515 1833 13 Part no. 251 584 30 82 Edition A 2010

Mercedes Benz 2010 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes Benz 2010 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

251_AKB; 4; 52, en-US 2009-03-23T09:22:52+01:00 - Seite 1

d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

! Highlights hazards that may result in

i Helpful hints or further information you

Our company and staff congratulate you on

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25

Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety and security ............................. 35

Controls in detail ................................. 69

Operation ........................................... 219

Practical hints ................................... 269

Technical data ................................... 343

1, 2, 3 ... Front passenger front air bag off

Armrest, rear Battery, Vehicle ................................. 333

B CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 23

Cargo net ........................................... 196 Clock ............................................ 28, 133

Changing the set speed ................. 144 Messages in the multifunction

Driving off .................................. 112, 255 Emission control ............................... 260

Parking position ............................... 95 Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 351

Gross Vehicle Weight Hood ................................................... 222

J Tire and Loading Information

Loading MOExtended system ......................... 330

Parktronic system PRE-SAFE® ............................................ 52

Reminder, Seat belt Seats ..................................................... 81

Snow chains ...................................... 252 Opening ........................................... 75

Telephone ............................................. 30 Information placard ....................... 236

Decoupling ..................................... 259 V

Parking brake ................................ 286

Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

1 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.

determined by our authorized technician and Operating safety

Proper use of the vehicle Reporting safety defects

This information helps, for example, to

Exterior view ....................................... 26

; Fuel filler flap 220

= Exterior rear view mirrors 94

? Power tilt/sliding sunroof 181

Function Page Function Page

30 Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel Function Page

4 Function only available in telephone menu.

Center console Function Page

32 Overhead control panel

Lower part Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

Door control panel 33

Function Page Door control panel

Vehicle equipment .............................. 36

Safety and security

Vehicle equipment G Warning!

G Warning! Deployment of the air bags temporarily

Safety and security

G Warning! position that is as upright as possible with

order to do its job.

Safety and security

protected by the fastened seat belts.

impact air bags inoperative or causing deceleration or acceleration exceeds the

Safety and security

by the seat belt the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Safety and security

Safety and security

Occupants, especially children, should always the 42 indicator lamp is

Safety and security

For information on infants and children G Warning!